HANDBOOK

3008
5008
Access to the Handbook

MOBILE APPLICATIONS ONLINE

Install the MYPEUGEOT APP application (content View or download the handbook at the following
available offline). address:
Also available in the Scan MyPeugeot App http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/APddb/
application.
Scan this QR Code for direct access.

Select:
– the language,
– the vehicle and body style,
– the issue period of the handbook corresponding to
the date of 1st registration of the vehicle.

This symbol indicates the latest

information available.
Welcome Key
Safety warning
Thank you for choosing a Peugeot 3008 or a Peugeot 5008.
This document contains the key information and recommendations you Additional information
will need to be able to explore your vehicle in complete safety. We strongly
recommend familiarising yourself with it, as well as the Maintenance and
Warranty Guide. Environmental protection feature
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in this
document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the Left-hand drive vehicle
country in which it was sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are for guidance only.
Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical specifications, Right-hand drive vehicle
equipment and accessories without having to update this document.
If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this Handbook is Location of equipment/button indicated using a
passed on to the new owner. black area

Key
This allows the specific features of your vehicle to be identified:

For any work on your vehicle, contact a qualified workshop that has
the required technical information, skills and equipment, all of which 3008
a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide.
5008
 Contents

Overview ■ Front seats  43 Safety 5

Steering wheel adjustment  47 General safety recommendations  84
Mirrors  47 Hazard warning lamps  84
Eco-driving ■ Rear bench seat  49 Horn  85
Rear seats  50 Pedestrian horn (Rechargeable hybrid)  85
Seat modularity  55 Emergency or assistance  85
Dashboard instruments 1 Heating and Ventilation  56 Electronic stability control (ESC)  87
Driver information  9 Dual-zone automatic air conditioning  57 Advanced Grip Control  89
Digital instrument panels  9 Front demisting - defrosting  60 Hill Assist Descent Control  90
Warning and indicator lamps  11 Heated windscreen  60 Seat belts  91
Indicators  16 Rear screen demisting/defrosting  61 Airbags  95
Manual test  20 Temperature pre-conditioning Child seats  97
Distance recorders  20 (Rechargeable hybrid)  61 Deactivating the front passenger airbag  99
Lighting dimmer  21 Front fittings  62 ISOFIX child seats  102
Trip computer  21 Courtesy lamps  66 i-Size child seats  108
Touch screen  22 Interior ambient lighting  66 Child lock  109
Remotely operable additional functions Rear fittings  66
(Rechargeable hybrid)  24 Boot fittings  68
Driving 6
Driving recommendations  111
Access 2 Lighting and visibility 4 Starting/Switching off the engine  112
Electronic key with remote control function Lighting control stalk  74 Starting rechargeable hybrid vehicles  113
and built-in key  26 Direction indicators  75 Electric parking brake  115
Keyless Entry and Start  28 Headlamp beam height adjustment  76 6-speed manual gearbox  117
Central locking  30 Automatic illumination of headlamps  76 Automatic gearbox (type 1)  117
Back-up procedures  30 Guide-me-home and welcome lighting  77 Automatic gearbox (type 2)  120
Doors  32 Automatic lighting systems - General Hill start assist  124
Boot  32 recommendations  77 Driving modes  125
Hands-free tailgate  33 Automatic headlamp dipping  77 Gear shift indicator  126
Alarm  37 Static cornering lighting  78 Stop & Start  127
Electric windows  38 Night Vision  79 Tyre under-inflation detection  128
Panoramic sunroof  39 Wiper control stalk  80 Driving and manoeuvring aids - General
Automatic wipers  81 recommendations  130
Changing a wiper blade  83 Memorising speeds  131
Ease of use and comfort 3 Road signs recognition  131
Driving position  42 Speed limiter  135

2
 Contents

Cruise control - Specific recommendations  137 In the event of a breakdown 8 Steering mounted controls  238
Cruise control  137 Warning triangle  195 Menus  238
Drive Assist Plus  139 Running out of fuel (Diesel)  195 Voice commands  240
Adaptive cruise control  139 Tool kit  195 Navigation  243
Lane positioning assist  143 Temporary puncture repair kit  198 Connected navigation  246
Lane keeping assist  147 Spare wheel  201 Applications  248
Active Safety Brake with Collision Risk Alert and Changing a bulb  206 Radio  251
Intelligent emergency braking assistance  150 Fuses  208 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio  252
Distraction detection  153 12 V battery/Accessory batteries  208 Media  252
Blind spot monitoring  154 Towing the vehicle  213 Telephone  254
Parking sensors  155 Settings  256
Visiopark 1 - Visiopark 2  157 Frequently asked questions  258
Park Assist  161 Technical data 9
Engine technical data and towed loads  217
Petrol engines  218 Vehicle data recording and privacy 12
Practical information 7 Diesel engines  220
Compatibility of fuels  165 Rechargeable hybrid engines  221
Refuelling  165 Dimensions  222 Alphabetical index ■
Misfuel prevention (Diesel)  166 Identification markings  223
Rechargeable hybrid system  167
Charging the traction battery Appendix ■
(Rechargeable hybrid)  175 PEUGEOT Connect Radio 10
Towing device  177 First steps  224
Towing device with quickly detachable towball  178 Steering mounted controls  225
Roof bars  180 Menus  226
Snow chains  181 Applications  227
Very cold climate screen  182 Radio  227
Energy economy mode  183 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio  229
Bonnet  183 Media  229
Engine compartment  184 Telephone  231
Checking levels  185 Settings  234
Checks  187 Frequently asked questions  235
AdBlue® (BlueHDi)  189
Free-wheeling  191
Advice on care and maintenance  192 PEUGEOT Connect Nav 11
First steps  237

3
 Overview

Presentation 1. Sunroof and blind controls 5. Gearbox

Front courtesy/map reading lamps 6. Hill Assist Descent Control
These illustrations and descriptions are intended
Warning lamp display for seat belts and front 7. Electric parking brake
as a guide. The presence and location of some
passenger airbag
elements vary depending on the version or trim Steering-mounted controls
Emergency call/Assistance call
level.
2. Interior rear view mirror/Driving in Electric
Instruments and controls mode indicator LED
3. Head-up digital display
4. Fusebox
5. Bonnet release
6. Door mirror and electric window control panel
7. Front passenger airbag
8. Glove box
Deactivation of the front passenger airbag

Centre console

1. External lighting controls/Direction indicators

2. Wiper controls/Screenwash/Trip computer
3. Automatic gearbox control paddles
4. Horn/Driver front airbag
5. Controls for Cruise control/Speed limiter/
Adaptive cruise control
6. Instrument panel and audio system
1. 8" or 10" HD touch screen adjustment controls
2. 12 V socket/USB socket A. Select the instrument panel display mode
Wireless smartphone charger B. Voice commands
3. "START/STOP" button C. Decrease/Increase volume
4. Drive mode selector

4
 Overview

D. Select previous/next media Central switch panel Rechargeable hybrid

Confirm a selection
E. Access the Telephone menu
system
Manage calls
F. Select an audio source
G. Display the list of radio stations/audio tracks

Side switch panel

1. Hazard warning lamps

2. Touch screen controls
Access to the Energy menu
3. Front demisting/defrosting
4. Recirculation of interior air 1. Petrol engine
5. Rear screen defrosting 2. Front and rear electric motors (depending on
6. Central locking version)
7. Heated seats 3. Traction battery
1. Headlamp beam height adjustment 4. 12 V accessories batteries
2. Temperature pre-conditioning operation 5. 8-speed electric automatic gearbox (e-EAT8)
indicator lamp 6. Charging flap
3. Opening/Closing the hands-free tailgate 7. Fuel filler flap
4. Alarm 8. Driving mode selector
5. Heated windscreen 9. Domestic charging cable
6. Electric child lock
7. Lane keeping assist The rechargeable hybrid technology combines
8. Lane positioning assist two sources of energy: that of the petrol engine
9. Opening the fuel filler flap and that of one or two electric motors (depending
on version).
The engine and the motor can operate
alternately or simultaneously, according to the
driving mode selected and the driving conditions.

5
 Overview

The electric power alone provides the mobility

i-Size
of the vehicle in Electric mode, and in Hybrid "In the event of a breakdown - Temporary
TOP TETHER

mode in case of moderate demand. It assists the "Driving - Electric parking brake" section: puncture repair kit" section:
petrol engine during starting and acceleration
phases.
The electric power is supplied by a rechargeable
"Driving - Stop & Start" section:
traction battery.

Labels "Practical information - Compatibility of

fuels" section:
"Ease of use and comfort - Front fittings - "In the event of a breakdown - Spare wheel"
Wireless smartphone charger" section: section:

"In the event of a breakdown - 12 V battery/

"Lighting and visibility - Exterior lighting "Practical information - Rechargeable hybrid Accessory batteries" section:
control stalk" and "In the event of a system" section:
breakdown - Changing a bulb" sections:

24V

12V

"Safety - Child seats - Deactivating the front

passenger airbag" section:

"Practical information - Charging the traction

battery (Rechargeable hybrid)" section:

"Practical information - Bonnet" section:

"Safety - ISOFIX mountings" section:

6
 Eco-driving

Eco-driving Control the use of electrical equipment Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and
minimise wind resistance (e.g. roof bars, roof
Before moving off, if the passenger compartment
Eco-driving refers to a range of everyday rack, bicycle carrier, trailer). Preferably, use a
is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows
practices that allow the motorist to optimise roof box.
and air vents before using the air conditioning.
the vehicle's energy consumption (fuel and/or Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
At speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the
electricity) and CO2 emissions. At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit
windows and leave the air vents open.
Optimise your use of the gearbox Consider using equipment that can help keep summer tyres.
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and the temperature in the passenger compartment Avoid using the Dynamic Pack for too long, in
change up promptly. While accelerating, change down (e.g. sunroof blind, window blinds). order to limit your energy consumption.
up early. Unless automatically regulated, switch off the air Comply with the servicing instructions
With an automatic gearbox, favour automatic conditioning as soon as the desired temperature Check tyre pressures regularly, with the tyres
mode. Do not depress the accelerator pedal has been reached. cold, referring to the label in the door aperture on
heavily or suddenly. Switch off the demisting and defrosting functions, the driver's side.
The gear shift indicator prompts you to engage if they are not managed automatically. Carry out this check in particular:
the most suitable gear. Whenever this indication Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible. – before a long journey.
is displayed on the instrument panel, follow it Adapt your use of the headlamps and/or – at each change of season.
straight away. foglamps to the level of visibility, in accordance – after a long period out of use.
With an automatic gearbox, this indicator with current legislation in the country in which Do not forget the spare wheel and, where
appears only in manual mode. you are driving. applicable, the tyres on your trailer or caravan.
Drive smoothly Avoid running the engine before moving off, Have your vehicle serviced regularly (e.g. engine
particularly in winter (other than in severe wintry oil, oil filter, air filter, passenger compartment
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use
conditions: temperature below -23°C). The filter, etc.). Observe the schedule of operations in
engine braking rather than the brake pedal and
vehicle will warm up much faster while driving. the manufacturer's service schedule.
press the accelerator gradually. These practices
As a passenger, avoid connecting your With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system
help to save on energy consumption, reduce
multimedia devices (e.g. film, music, video has a fault, your vehicle will emit pollution. Visit
CO2 emissions and decrease general traffic
game) to help reduce the consumption of energy. a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
noise.
Disconnect all portable devices before leaving as soon as possible to restore your vehicle's
When the traffic is flowing smoothly, select the
the vehicle. nitrogen oxide emissions to legal levels.
cruise control.
Limit the causes of excess consumption When filling the fuel tank, do not continue after
Spread loads throughout the vehicle. Place the the third cut-out of the nozzle, to avoid overflow.
heaviest items in the boot as close as possible to
the rear seats.

7
 Eco-driving

You will only see the fuel consumption of your

new vehicle settle down to a consistent average
after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres).
Optimising the driving range
(rechargeable hybrid vehicles)
Connect the vehicle as soon as possible.
Favour the ECO zone of the power indicator by
driving smoothly and at a steady speed.
Anticipate slowing down as much as possible
and, if possible, favour decelerations with
regenerative braking mode activated (power
indicator in the CHARGE zone).
With the vehicle connected, carry out
temperature pre-conditioning before setting off.
To optimise consumption during a journey:
► Programme a destination in the vehicle’s
GPS navigation system.
► Select the Hybrid driving mode.
► Make sure that the battery charge level is
close to maximum.
► Do not use the e-Save function while driving.
► Use the heating/air conditioning system
wisely.

8
 Dashboard instruments

Driver information 7. Engine coolant temperature indicator (°C)

8. Trip distance recorder (miles or km)
8. Trip distance recorder (miles or km)
9. Total distance recorder (miles or km)
1
Instrument panel 9. Total distance recorder (miles or km)
A. Instrument panel ambient lighting on/off
The instrument panel displays all the information
A. Instrument panel ambient lighting on/off B. Short press: start a manual test
the driver needs about the status of the vehicle's
B. Short press: start a manual test Long press: reset the service indicator or trip
various systems.
Long press: reset the service indicator or trip distance recorder (depending on the context)
This information appears in the form of warning
distance recorder (depending on the context)
and indicator lamps and messages.
In all-electric driving mode, the speed is
The instrument panel is in the form of a fully
displayed in blue.
digital screen.
Head-up digital display
Head-up digital display (Rechargeable hybrid) Displays
This digital instrument panel can be customised. Most warning and indicator lamps do not have a
This digital instrument panel can be customised. fixed position.
Depending on the display mode selected, certain
Depending on the display mode selected, certain The warning and indicator lamps in the second
information is hidden or presented differently.
information is hidden or presented differently. line are displayed from right to left in order of
Example with the "Energy" display mode:
Example with the "DIALS" display mode: priority.
For certain functions that have indicator lamps
for both operation and deactivation, there is only
one dedicated location.
Permanent information

1. Fuel gauge and remaining range (miles or In the standard display, the instrument panel
1. Fuel gauge shows:
km)
2. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h) – in fixed locations:
2. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h)
3. Gear shift indicator • Information related to the gearbox and gear
READY indicator lamp
Selector position and gear engaged on shift indicator.
3. Status of the gearbox
automatic gearbox • Fuel gauge.
4. Energy flows
4. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) • Coolant temperature indicator (Petrol or
5. Driving mode selected
5. Cruise control or speed limiter settings Diesel).
6. Power indicator
Display of speed limit signs • Charge level and range indicator
7. Battery charge level and remaining range
6. Rev counter (x 1,000 rpm) (Rechargeable hybrid).
(miles or km)
• Distance recorders.

9
 Dashboard instruments

– in variable locations: As a safety measure, these adjustments Display modes

• Digital speedometer. must be carried out with the vehicle – "Dials": standard display of analogue and
• Status or alert messages displayed stationary. digital speedometers, distance recorders and:
temporarily. • fuel gauge, coolant temperature indicator
Optional information Choosing the display colour and rev counter (Petrol or Diesel).
Depending on the selected display mode and • fuel gauge, battery charge level indicator and
Depending on version, the instrument panel
active features, additional information may be power indicator (Rechargeable hybrid).
display colour depends on the colour scheme
displayed: – "Navigation": specific display, showing current
chosen in this system.
– Rev counter (Petrol or Diesel). navigation information (map and instructions).
This function is set via the Settings touch
– Trip computer. – "Driving": specific display, showing
screen menu.
– Driving aid functions. information relating to active driving aid systems.
– Speed limiter or cruise control. Choosing the display mode – "Minimum": minimal display with digital
– Media currently playing. speedometer and distance recorders, and in the
In each mode, specific types of information are
– Navigation instructions. event of a warning only, fuel gauge and coolant
displayed on the instrument panel.
– Engine information from the Dynamic Pack. temperature indicator.
– Power flow (Rechargeable hybrid). – "Energy": specific display, showing a visual
representation of the vehicle’s energy flows
Customising the instrument (Rechargeable hybrid).
– "Personal": minimal display, with the ability
panel to select and display optional information in the
Depending on version, the appearance of the personalisable areas on the left and right.
instrument panel may be customisable (colour
Configuring a "Personal" display mode
and/or display mode).
With PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Display language and units ► Press Settings in the banner of the
These depend on the multifunction touch screen.
screen settings (configuration menu). ► Select "Configuration".
► Turn the thumbwheel on the left of the
When travelling abroad, the speed must be
steering wheel to display and scroll through the
shown in the official units of the country you ► Select "Instrument panel
various modes on the right-hand side of the
are driving in (mph, miles or km/h, km). personalisation".
instrument panel.
► Press the thumbwheel to confirm the mode. With PEUGEOT Connect Nav
The new display mode is applied immediately. ► Press Settings in the banner of the
touch screen.

10
 Dashboard instruments

► Select "OPTIONS".
► Select "Instrument panel
Associated warnings
The illumination of a lamp may be accompanied
(3): Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop. 1
personalisation". by an audible signal and/or a message displayed
► For each personalised display area (left and in a screen.
List of warning and
right), select a type of information using the Relating the type of alert to the operating status indicator lamps
corresponding scroll arrows on the touch screen: of the vehicle allows you to determine whether
• "Driving aids". Red warning/indicator lamps
the situation is normal or whether a fault has
• "Engine info" (depending on version). occurred: refer to the description of each lamp STOP
• "G-metres" (depending on version). for further information. Fixed, associated with another warning
• "Temperatures" (engine oil). lamp, accompanied by the display of a
When the ignition is switched on
• "Media". message and an audible signal.
• "Navigation". Certain red or orange warning lamps come on
A serious fault with the engine, braking system,
• "Trip computer". for a few seconds when the ignition is switched
power steering or automatic gearbox or a major
• "Rev counter". on. These warning lamps should go off as soon
electrical fault has been detected.
• "Hybrid flows" (depending on version). as the engine is started.
Carry out (1) and then (2).
• "Power indicator" (depending on version). For more information on a system or a function,
refer to the corresponding section. Maximum coolant temperature
• "Accessories consumption" (depending on
Fixed.
version).
► Confirm to save and exit. Persistent warning lamp The temperature of the cooling system is
too high.
"Personal" mode is displayed immediately. If a red or orange warning lamp comes on, there
Carry out (1), then wait until the engine has
may be fault which needs further investigation.
cooled down before topping up the level, if
Warning and indicator If a lamp remains lit necessary. If the problem persists, carry out (2).
lamps The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning
and indicator lamp description indicate whether
Engine oil pressure
Fixed.
Displayed as symbols, the warning and indicator you should contact a qualified professional in There is a fault with the engine lubrication
lamps inform the driver of the occurrence of a addition to the immediate recommended actions. system.
malfunction (warning lamps) or of the operating (1): You must stop the vehicle. Carry out (1) and then (2).
status of a system (operation or deactivation Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off
indicator lamps). Certain lamps light up in two System malfunction (Rechargeable hybrid)
the ignition.
ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in several colours. Fixed.
(2): Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
The rechargeable hybrid system is faulty.
workshop.
Carry out (1) and then (2).

11
 Dashboard instruments

Cable connected (Rechargeable hybrid) Seat belts not fastened/unfastened Identify the cause of the fault using the message
Fixed when the ignition is switched on. Fixed or flashing, accompanied by an displayed on the instrument panel.
The charging cable is connected to the increasing audible signal. You may be able to deal with some faults
vehicle's connector. A seat belt has not been fastened or has been yourself, such as changing the battery in the
Fixed when the ignition is switched on, unfastened. remote control.
accompanied by a message. Electric parking brake For other faults, such as with the tyre under-
It is not possible to start the vehicle while the Fixed. inflation detection system, carry out (3).
charging cable is connected to the vehicle’s The electric parking brake is applied. Fixed, accompanied by the display of a
connector. Flashing. message.
Disconnect the charging cable and close the Application/release is faulty. One or more major faults, for which there is/are
flap. Carry out (1): park on flat ground (on a level no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected.
12V battery charge surface). Identify the cause of the fault using the message
Fixed. With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. displayed on the instrument panel, then carry
The battery charging circuit is faulty With an automatic gearbox, select mode P. out (3).
(e.g. dirty terminals, loose or severed alternator Switch off the ignition and carry out (2). Fixed, accompanied by the message
belt). "Parking brake fault".
Braking
Carry out (1). Automatic release of the electric parking brake is
Fixed.
If the electric parking brake stops working, unavailable.
The brake fluid level in the braking circuit
immobilise the vehicle: Carry out (2).
has dropped significantly.
► With the manual gearbox, engage a gear. Service warning lamp fixed and
Carry out (1), then top up with fluid that complies
► With the automatic gearbox, fit the chocks service spanner flashing then
with the manufacturer's recommendations. If the
against one of the wheels. fixed.
problem persists, carry out (2).
Clean and tighten the terminals. If the warning The servicing interval has been exceeded.
Fixed.
lamp does not go off when the engine is started, The vehicle must be serviced as soon as
The electronic brake force
carry out (2). possible.
distribution (EBFD) system is faulty.
Only with BlueHDi Diesel engines.
Door(s) open Carry out (1) and then (2).
Fixed, associated with a message Engine pre-heating (Diesel)
Orange warning/indicator lamps
identifying the access. Temporarily on
An audible signal supplements the alert if the Service (up to approximately 30 seconds in
speed is higher than 6 mph (10 km/h). Temporarily on, accompanied by the severe weather conditions).
A door or the boot is not properly closed. display of a message. When switching on the ignition, if the weather
One or more minor faults, for which there is/are conditions and the engine temperature make it
no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected. necessary.

12
 Dashboard instruments

Wait until the warning lamp goes off before

starting.
The warning lamp should go off when the engine
is started.
SCR emissions control system (BlueHDi)
Fixed when the ignition is
1
When the warning lamp goes off, starting will Carry out (3) without delay. switched on, accompanied
occur immediately if you press and hold: AdBlue® (BlueHDi) by an audible signal and a message.
– the clutch pedal with a manual gearbox. On for around 30 seconds when starting A malfunction of the SCR emissions control
– the brake pedal with an automatic gearbox. the vehicle, accompanied by a message system has been detected.
If the engine does not start, make the engine indicating the driving range. This alert disappears once the exhaust
starting request again, while keeping your foot The driving range is between 1,500 and 500 emissions return to normal levels.
on the pedal. miles (2,400 and 800 km). Flashing AdBlue® warning
Low fuel level Top up the AdBlue®. lamp on switching on the
Fixed, with the reserve level shown in red, Fixed, on switching on the ignition, ignition, with the Service and Engine self-
accompanied by an audible signal and accompanied by an audible signal and a diagnostics warning lamps on fixed,
the display of a message. message indicating the driving range. accompanied by an audible signal and a
When it first comes on, you have approximately The driving range is between 500 and 62 miles message indicating the driving range.
6 litres of fuel remaining in the tank (reserve). (800 and 100 km). Depending on the message displayed, it is
Until the fuel level is topped up, this alert will Promptly top up the AdBlue®, or carry out (3). possible to drive for up to 685 miles (1,100 km)
be repeated every time the ignition is switched Flashing, accompanied by an audible before the engine immobiliser is triggered.
on, with increasing frequency as the fuel level signal and a message indicating the Carry out (3) without delay, to avoid starting
decreases and approaches zero. driving range. being prevented.
Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel. The driving range is less than 62 miles (100 km). Flashing AdBlue® warning
Never drive until completely empty, as You must top up the AdBlue® to avoid engine lamp on switching on the
this could damage the emissions control and starting being prevented, or carry out (3). ignition, with the Service and Engine self-
injection systems. Flashing, accompanied by an audible diagnostics warning lamps on fixed,
signal and a message indicating that accompanied by an audible signal and a
Engine self-diagnostic system
starting is prevented. message indicating that starting is prevented.
Flashing.
The AdBlue® tank is empty: the legally required The engine immobiliser prevents the engine from
The engine management system has a
engine immobiliser system prevents the engine restarting (the permitted driving limit has been
fault.
from starting. exceeded after confirmation of a malfunction of
There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be
To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue® or carry the emissions control system).
destroyed.
out (2). To start the engine, carry out (2).
You must carry out (2).
Fixed. It is essential to add at least 10 litres of AdBlue®
The emissions control system has a fault. to the tank.

13
 Dashboard instruments

Automatic functions deactivated (electric Fixed, accompanied by the Collision Risk Alert/Active Safety Brake
parking brake) message "Parking brake Fixed, accompanied by the display of a
Fixed. fault". message.
The "automatic application" (on switching The parking brake is faulty: manual and The system has been deactivated via the touch
off the engine) and "automatic release" (on automatic functions may not be working. screen (Driving/Vehicle menu).
acceleration) functions are deactivated. When stationary, to immobilise the vehicle: Flashing.
If automatic application/release is no longer ► Pull the electric parking brake control and The system activates and brakes the
possible: hold it for approximately 7 to 15 seconds, until vehicle momentarily to reduce the speed of
► Start the engine. the indicator lamp lights up on the instrument collision with the vehicle in front.
► Use the control to apply the electric parking panel. For more information, refer to the Driving
brake. If this procedure does not work, secure the section.
► Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. vehicle: Fixed, accompanied by a message and
► Hold the control pressed in the release ► Park on a level surface. an audible signal.
direction for between 10 and 15 seconds. ► With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. The system has a fault.
► Release the control. ► With an automatic gearbox, select P, then Carry out (3).
► Depress and hold the brake pedal. place the supplied chocks against one of the Fixed.
► Pull the control in the application direction for wheels. The system has a fault.
2 seconds. Then carry out (2). If these warning lamps come on after the engine
► Release the control and the brake pedal. Braking is switched off and then restarted, carry out (3).
Malfunction (with electric parking brake) Fixed. Fixed.
Fixed, accompanied by the A minor fault with the braking system has The system is deactivated
message "Parking brake fault". been detected. temporarily because the driver and/or front
The vehicle cannot be immobilised with the Drive carefully. passenger (depending on version) has been
engine running. Carry out (3). detected as present but the corresponding seat
If manual application and release commands are belt has not been fastened.
Pedestrian horn (Rechargeable hybrid)
not working, the electric parking brake control is Fixed. Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
faulty. Horn fault detected. Fixed.
The automatic functions must be used at all Carry out (3). The anti-lock braking system has a fault.
times and are automatically reactivated in the The vehicle retains conventional braking.
event of a fault with the control. Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry
Carry out (2). out (3).

14
 Dashboard instruments

Dynamic stability control (DSC)/Anti-slip

regulation (ASR)
Lane keeping assist
Flashing.
Front passenger airbag (OFF)
Fixed.
1
Fixed. You are about to cross a broken The front passenger airbag is deactivated.
The system is deactivated. lane marking without operating the direction The control is set to the “OFF” position.
The DSC/ASR system is reactivated indicators. A "rearward facing" child seat can be installed,
automatically when the vehicle is restarted, The system is activated, then corrects the unless there is a fault with the airbags (Airbags
and at speeds above approximately 31 mph trajectory on the side of the detected lane warning lamp on).
(50 km/h). marking. Under-inflation
At speeds below 31 mph (50 km/h), it can be For more information, refer to the Driving Fixed.
reactivated manually. section. The pressure in one or more tyres is too
Flashing. Fixed, accompanied by the display low.
DSC/ASR regulation is activated in the of a message and an audible Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as
event of a loss of grip or trajectory. signal. possible.
Fixed. The system has a fault. Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting
The DSC/ASR system has a fault. Carry out (3). the pressure.
Carry out (3). Lane positioning assist Under-inflation warning lamp
Emergency brake malfunction (with Fixed, accompanied by the flashing then fixed and Service
electric parking brake) Service warning lamp. warning lamp fixed.
Fixed, accompanied by the The system has a fault. The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.
message "Parking brake fault". Carry out (3). Under-inflation detection is no longer monitored.
Emergency braking does not deliver optimal Airbags Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible
performance. Fixed. and carry out (3).
If automatic release is not available, use manual One of the airbags or seat belt Stop & Start
release or carry out (3). pyrotechnic pretensioners is faulty. Fixed, accompanied by the display of a
Hill start assist Carry out (3). message.
Fixed, accompanied by the Front passenger airbag (ON) The Stop & Start system has been deactivated
message "Anti roll-back system Fixed. manually.
fault". The front passenger airbag is activated. The engine will not switch off at the next traffic
The system has a fault. The control is set to the "ON" position. stop.
Carry out (3). In this case, do not install a "rearward facing" Fixed.
child seat on the front passenger seat - risk The Stop & Start system has been
of serious injury! deactivated automatically.

15
 Dashboard instruments

The engine will not switch off at the next traffic Flashing temporarily. Dipped beam headlamps
stop, if the exterior temperature is: STOP mode is momentarily unavailable Fixed.
– below 0°C. or START mode is automatically triggered. The lamps are on.
– above +35°C. For more information, refer to the Driving Automatic headlamp dipping
For more information, refer to the Driving section. Fixed.
section. Vehicle ready to drive (Rechargeable The function has been activated
Flashing then fixed, accompanied by a hybrid) via the touch screen (Driving/Vehicle menu).
message. Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal The lighting control stalk is in the "AUTO"
The system has a fault. when it comes on. position.
Carry out (3). The vehicle is ready to drive. For more information, refer to the Lighting and
Rear foglamps The indicator lamp goes out upon reaching a visibility section.
Fixed. speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) and Blue warning/indicator lamps
The lamps are on. lights up again when the vehicle stops moving.
The lamp will go out when you turn off the Main beam headlamps
Green warning/indicator lamps
engine and exit the vehicle. Fixed.
Blind spot monitoring The lamps are on.
Lane positioning assist
Fixed. Black/white warning lamps
Fixed.
The function has been activated.
The function has been activated. eSave function (Rechargeable hybrid)
Hill Assist Descent Control All conditions have been met: the system is Fixed, accompanied by the reserved
Fixed. operating. electric range.
The function has been activated, but the For more information, refer to the Driving The eSave function is activated.
conditions for regulation are not met (gradient, section.
gear engaged).
Flashing.
Automatic wiping
Fixed.
Indicators
The function is regulating the speed of
Automatic windscreen wiping is activated.
the vehicle.
Direction indicators Service indicator
The vehicle is being braked; the brake lamps
Flashing with audible signal. The servicing information is expressed in terms
come on during the descent.
The direction indicators are on. of distance (miles or kilometres) and time
Stop & Start (months or days).
Fixed. Sidelamps
The alert is given at whichever of these two
When the vehicle stops, the Stop & Start Fixed.
terms is reached first.
puts the engine into STOP mode. The lamps are on.

16
 Dashboard instruments

The servicing information is displayed in the

instrument panel. Depending on the version of
Resetting the service indicator
The service indicator must be reset after each
The servicing information is displayed for a few
seconds, then disappears.
1
the vehicle: service.
– The distance recorder display line indicates If you have serviced your vehicle yourself: Engine oil level indicator
the distance remaining before the next service ► Switch off the ignition. (Depending on version)
is due, or the distance travelled since it was due On versions fitted with an electric gauge, the
preceded by the "-" sign. engine oil level status is displayed on the
– An alert message indicates the distance instrument panel for a few seconds when
remaining, as well as the period before the next the ignition is switched on, after the servicing
service is due or how long it is overdue. information, in the form of messages.
The value indicated is calculated The level read will only be correct if the
according to the distance covered and vehicle is on level ground and the engine
the time elapsed since the last service. has been off for more than 30 minutes.
The alert may also be triggered close to a
► Press and hold the button located on the end
due date. Low oil level
of the wiper control stalk.
► Switch on the ignition; a temporary display This is indicated by the message "Oil
Service spanner level incorrect" on the instrument panel,
On temporarily when the ignition is window appears and a countdown begins.
► When the display indicates =0, release the accompanied by the lighting of the Service
switched on.
button; the spanner disappears. warning lamp and an audible signal.
Between 620 and 1,860 miles (1,000 and 3,000
If a low oil level is confirmed by a check using
km) remain before the next service is due. If you have to disconnect the battery the dipstick, the level must be topped up to avoid
Fixed, when the ignition is switched on. following this operation, lock the vehicle damage to the engine.
The next service is due in less than 620 and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to be For more information on Checking levels, refer
miles (1,000 km). registered. to the corresponding section.
Have your vehicle serviced very soon.
Oil gauge malfunction
Service spanner flashing
Reminder of the servicing information This is indicated by the message "Oil level
Flashing then fixed, when the
ignition is switched on. You can access the servicing information at any measurement invalid" on the instrument panel.
(With BlueHDi Diesel engines, associated with time. Consult a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
the Service warning lamp.) workshop.
The servicing interval has been exceeded.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. ► Press the trip distance recorder reset button.

17
 Dashboard instruments

In the event of a malfunction of the Wait a few minutes before switching off the engine until the minimum level of AdBlue® has
electric gauge, the oil level is no longer engine. been topped up.
monitored.
After switching off the ignition, carefully
If the system is faulty, you must check the
open the bonnet and check the coolant Manual display of driving range
engine oil level using the manual dipstick
level. While the driving range is greater than
located in the engine compartment.
For more information on Checking levels, 1,500 miles (2,400 km), it is not displayed
refer to the corresponding section. For more information on Checking automatically.
levels, refer to the corresponding
section.
Coolant temperature ► Press this button to temporarily display the
indicator AdBlue range indicators
® driving range.

(BlueHDi) Actions required related to a lack of

The Diesel BlueHDi engines are equipped with AdBlue®
a system that associates the SCR (Selective The following warning lamps light up when the
Catalytic Reduction) emissions control system quantity of AdBlue® is below the reserve level:
and the Diesel particle filter (DPF) for the driving range of 1,500 miles (2,400 km).
treatment of exhaust gases. They cannot Together with the warning lamps, messages
function without AdBlue® fluid. regularly remind you of the need to top up to
When the level of AdBlue® falls below the avoid engine starting being prevented. Refer to
reserve level (between 1,500 and 0 miles (2,400 the Warning and indicator lamps section for
and 0 km)), a warning lamp lights up when details of the messages displayed.
the ignition is switched on and an estimate
With the engine running: For more information on AdBlue®
of the distance that can be travelled before
– In zone A, the temperature is correct. (BlueHDi) and in particular on topping
engine starting is prevented is displayed in the
– In zone B, the temperature is too high. up, refer to the corresponding section.
instrument panel.
The associated warning lamp and the
STOP warning lamp light up in red on the The engine starting prevention system
instrument panel, accompanied by the display of required by regulations is activated
a message and an audible signal. automatically once the AdBlue® tank is empty.
You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is It is then no longer possible to start the
safe to do so.

18
 Dashboard instruments

Warning/
indicator
Action Remaining
range
minutes of driving before the top-up detection
is effective.
The AdBlue warning lamp flashes and
a message is displayed ("Emissions
1
control fault: starting prevented in X miles
lamps on
(kms)"), indicating the driving range in miles or
Malfunction of the SCR emissions
Top up. Between kilometres.
1,500 miles
control system While driving, the message is displayed every 30
and 500 Malfunction detection seconds. The alert is repeated when switching
miles (2,400 on the ignition.
km and 800 If a malfunction is detected, You can continue driving for up to 685 miles
km) these warning lamps come (1,100 km) before the engine starting
on, accompanied by an prevention system is triggered.
Top up as Between
audible signal and the
soon as 500 miles Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
display of an "Emissions
possible. and 62 or a qualified workshop.
control fault" message.
miles (800
km and The alert is triggered while driving when the Starting prevented
100 km) fault is detected for the first time, and thereafter Every time the ignition is switched on, the
A top-up is Between 62 when switching on the ignition for subsequent message "Emissions control fault: Starting
vital, there is miles and 0 journeys, for as long as the cause of the fault prevented" is displayed.
a risk that the miles (100 persists.
To restart the engine
engine will km and 0
If the fault is temporary, the alert Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
be prevented km)
disappears during the next journey, after qualified workshop.
from starting.
self-diagnostic checks of the SCR emissions
To be able 0 miles (km) control system.
to restart the Power indicator
engine, add at Malfunction confirmed during the (Rechargeable hybrid)
least 10 litres permitted driving phase (between 685 The power indicator shows in real time the power
of AdBlue® to miles and 0 miles (1,100 km and 0 km)) demanded from the vehicle.
the tank. If the fault indication is still displayed There are 3 zones:
permanently after 31 miles (50 km) of driving, the
Taking into account of top-up fault in the SCR system is confirmed.
Top-up detection may not be
instantaneous after addition. It may take a few

19
 Dashboard instruments

CHARGE Energy recovery for partly Manual test on the

recharging the traction battery.
The slider is located in this zone
instrument panel
during deceleration: taking your foot This function allows you, at any time, to check
off the accelerator pedal or braking. certain indicators and to display the alerts log.

Charge level indicator

► With the engine running, briefly press this
(Rechargeable hybrid) button.
The following information is displayed on the
POWER High power demand, using the instrument panel:
combined capabilities of the petrol – Engine oil level.
engine and the electric motor(s) – Next service due.
(depending on version). – Driving range associated with the AdBlue® and
The slider is located in this zone the SCR system (BlueHDi Diesel).
during more dynamic driving phases – Current alerts.
when high levels of performance are This information is also displayed
being demanded. automatically every time the ignition is
The charge level of the traction battery and
ECO Optimal use of energy (internal switched on.
the remaining range in electric driving mode
combustion or electric).
are permanently displayed when the vehicle is
The slider is located in this zone
switched on.
when driving under electric power
and when optimal use is being made The range displayed depends on the use
Distance recorders
of the petrol engine, both accessible of the vehicle (type of driving and speed), With the ignition on, the distances are
by adopting a suitable driving style. the outside temperature and the activated permanently indicated. They are deactivated
A symbol indicates the threshold at comfort equipment. about 30 seconds after switching the ignition
which the petrol engine will restart. off. They are displayed when the driver's door
The driver can therefore moderate is opened, and when the vehicle is locked or
their acceleration to remain in electric unlocked.
driving mode.
When travelling abroad, you may have to
change the distance units (km or miles):

20
 Dashboard instruments

the road speed must be displayed in the local

country’s official unit (km/h or mph).
Instrument panel lighting ► Select "Screen configuration".
1
The unit is changed via the screen dimmer ► Select the "Brightness” tab.
configuration menu, with the vehicle Allows the instrument panel lighting to be ► Adjust the instrument panel and
stationary. switched on or off. screen brightness by using the arrows or
► Press this button. moving the slider.
► Press this button to save and exit.
Total distance recorder
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting is
This recorder measures the total distance You can also switch off the screen:
adjusted using the touch screen.
travelled by the vehicle since its initial ► Press this button to select the
registration. With PEUGEOT Connect Radio Settings menu.
► Press this button to select the ► Select "Turn off screen".
Trip distance recorder Settings menu.
This measures the distance travelled since it was ► Select "Brightness". The screen goes off completely.
last reset by the driver. ► Press the screen again (anywhere on its
► Adjust the brightness by pressing the surface) to turn it on.
arrows or moving the slider.
The settings are applied immediately.
► Press outside the settings window to exit.
Trip computer
You can also switch off the screen: Displays information related to the current trip
► Press this button to select the (range, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.).
Settings menu.
► Select "Dark".
Data displayed on the
instrument panel
The screen goes off completely. Trip computer data is displayed permanently
Resetting the trip recorder ► Press the screen again (anywhere on its when the "TRIP COMPUTER" or "PERSONAL"
► With the ignition on, press the button until surface) to turn it on. display mode is selected, depending on version.
zeros appear. In all other display modes, pressing the end of
With PEUGEOT Connect Nav the wiper control stalk will cause this data to
With the lamps switched on: appear temporarily in a specific window.
► Press this button to select the Display of the different tabs
Settings menu.
► Select "OPTIONS".

21
 Dashboard instruments

Definitions Average speed

(mph or km/h)
Range Calculated since the last trip computer
(miles or km) reset.
Distance that can still be travelled with the
fuel remaining in the tank (based on the
Distance travelled
average fuel consumption over the last few miles (miles or km)
(kilometres) travelled). Calculated since the last trip computer
This value may vary following a change in driving reset.
► Pressing the button located on the end of the style or terrain, leading to a significant change in
wiper control stalk displays the following tabs in current fuel consumption.
Stop & Start time counter
turn: When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km), (minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)
– Current information: dashes are displayed.
• Total range (Petrol or Diesel). After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range If your vehicle is fitted with the Stop & Start
• Current consumption (Petrol or Diesel). is recalculated and is displayed if it exceeds 62 function, a time counter calculates the time spent
• Stop & Start time counter (Petrol or Diesel). miles (100 km). in STOP mode during a journey.
• Percentage of the current journey travelled Dashes appearing permanently in place of The time counter is reset each time the ignition is
in all-electric driving mode (Rechargeable numbers while driving indicates a malfunction. switched on.
hybrid). Consult a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
– Trips "1" then "2": workshop. Touch screen
• Average speed.
• Average fuel consumption. Current consumption This system gives access to the following
• Distance travelled. (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) elements:
Calculated during the last few seconds. – Permanent display of the time and outside
Trip reset temperature (a blue warning lamp appears if
This function is only displayed at speeds above there is a risk of ice).
► When the desired trip is displayed,
19 mph (30 km/h). – Heating/air conditioning system controls.
press the button on the end of the wiper
– Vehicle functions and equipment setting
control stalk for more than 2 seconds.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent and are used Average consumption menus.
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l) – Audio system and telephone controls and
in the same way.
Calculated since the last trip computer display of related information.
reset.

22
 Dashboard instruments

– Display of visual manoeuvring aid functions

(visual parking sensor information, Park Assist,
After a few moments with no action on
the second page, the first page is
For more information about the menus,
refer to the sections describing the audio
1
etc.). displayed automatically. and telematics systems.
– Internet services and display of related
information. To deactivate/activate a function, select "OFF" Radio/Media
– Navigation system controls and or "ON".
display of related information (depending on Configuring a function Climate
version). Settings for temperature, air flow, etc.
Access to additional information on the For more information on Dual-zone automatic
For safety reasons, always stop the function air conditioning, refer to the corresponding
vehicle before performing operations Confirm section.
that require sustained attention. Navigation (Depending on equipment)
Some functions are not accessible while Return to the previous page or confirm
driving. Driving or Vehicle (Depending on
Volume adjustment/mute. equipment)
Recommendations Activation, deactivation and settings for certain
functions.
This screen is of the capacitive type. Menus The functions are organised in 2 tabs: "Driving
– Do not use pointed objects on the touch
functions" and "Vehicle settings".
screen.
Telephone
– Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands.
– Use a soft, clean cloth to clean the touch
Applications
screen.
Access to certain configurable equipment.
Energy
Principles Access to the rechargeable hybrid system
► Use the buttons arranged below the touch features (energy flow, consumption statistics,
screen to access the menus, then press the deferred charging, eSave function).
buttons that appear on the touch screen.
Some menus may display across two pages: Energy menu
press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
second page. Flow
Press the touch screen with three fingers
to show all of the menu buttons. The page shows the operation of the
rechargeable hybrid system in real time.

23
 Dashboard instruments

– Green bar chart: energy recovered during ► To use the energy reserve, choose the
deceleration and braking, used to recharge the Electric driving mode in the mode selector.
battery.
If the requested range exceeds the
2. Average fuel consumption for the current trip
available range (not recommended), the
(kWh/100 km) and historical values (orange bar
internal combustion engine starts to recharge
chart).
the traction battery up to the requested
► You can change the displayed time scale by
threshold. This leads to excessive fuel
pressing the - or + buttons.
1. Active driving mode consumption.
2. Petrol engine A current trip is any trip of more than 20
3. Electric motor(s) minutes without switching off the ignition.
4. Traction battery charge level
Upper bar
Certain information is displayed permanently in
The energy flows have a colour for each type of Charging
the upper bar of the touch screen:
driving: This page allows you to programme deferred – Time and outside temperature (a blue warning
– Blue: 100% electrical energy. charging. lamp appears if there is a risk of ice).
– Orange: energy from the petrol engine. For more information on Charging the traction – Reminder of the air conditioning information,
– Green: energy recovery. battery (Rechargeable hybrid), refer to the and direct access to the corresponding menu.
Statistics corresponding section. – Reminder of information from the
RadioMedia and Telephone menus and
This page shows electrical energy and fuel eSave
navigation instructions (depending on
consumption statistics. The eSave function makes it possible to reserve equipment).
all or part of the electrical energy in the traction – Notifications.
battery for later use during a journey (e.g. driving – Access to the Settings for the touch screen
in an urban area or in an area reserved for and the digital instrument panel (date/time,
electric vehicles). languages, units, etc.).
► Select the electric range to be reserved (10
km, 20 km or the full range MAX) then activate
the function by pressing ON.
Remotely operable
1. Average electrical consumption for the current
Activation of the function is confirmed by additional functions
trip (kWh/100 km) and historical values:
the lighting of this indicator lamp on the
instrument panel and the indication of the energy
(Rechargeable hybrid)
– Blue bar chart: directly consumed energy reserve in miles or kms. (Depending on country of sale)
supplied by the traction battery.

24
 Dashboard instruments

The following functions are

1
available from the MYPEUGEOT
APP application, which is
accessible from a smartphone:
– Managing the traction battery charging
(deferred charging).
– Managing the temperature pre-conditioning.
– Viewing the state of charge and range of the
vehicle.
Installation procedure
► Download the MYPEUGEOT APP application
from the appropriate online store for your
smartphone.
► Create an account.
► Enter the vehicle identification number
(available on the vehicle registration certificate).
For more information on Identification
markings, refer to the corresponding section.

Network coverage
In order to be able to use the various
remotely operable features, ensure that your
vehicle is located in an area covered by the
mobile network.
A lack of network coverage may prevent
communication with the vehicle (for example,
if it is in an underground car park). In such
cases, the application will display a message
indicating that the connection with the vehicle
could not be established.

25
 Access

Electronic key with etc. For more information on the Back-up

procedures, refer to the corresponding section.
Unlocking the vehicle
remote control function
and built-in key Built-in key
Selective unlocking (driver’s door, boot) is
The key built into the remote control can be
configured in the Driving/Vehicle touch
used for the following operations, depending on
Remote control function version:
screen menu.
– Unlocking/Locking/Deadlocking the vehicle. Complete unlocking
– Activation/Deactivation of the manual child
► Press the unlocking button.
lock.
– Activation/Deactivation of the front passenger Selective unlocking
airbag.
Driver's door
– Back-up Unlocking/Locking of the doors.
► Press the unlocking button.
The driver's door and the fuel filler flap are
unlocked (Petrol or Diesel).
The driver's door is unlocked (Rechargeable
hybrid).
► Press it again to unlock the other doors and
The remote control can be used to perform
the boot.
the following remote functions (depending on
The charging nozzle can be unplugged on the
version):
second press.
– Unlocking/Locking/Deadlocking the vehicle.
Complete or selective unlocking, and alarm
– Unlocking - Opening the boot.
deactivation (depending on version), is confirmed
– Remote operation of lighting.
by the flashing of the direction indicators.
– Folding/Unfolding the door mirrors. ► To eject the key or put it back in place, pull Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold.
– Activating/Deactivating the alarm. and hold the button.
– Locating the vehicle. Selective unlocking and opening of
– Closing the windows. Once the built-in key is ejected, always
keep it with you to be able to carry out
the tailgate
– Closing the sunroof.
the corresponding back-up procedures. By default, selective unlocking of the tailgate
– Activating the vehicle’s electronic immobiliser.
is deactivated and its motorised operation is
Back-up procedures allow the vehicle to be
activated.
locked/unlocked in the event of a failure of the
remote control, the central locking, the battery,

26
 Access

► Press and hold this button to unlock

the boot and trigger the motorised
will automatically lock itself again after about
30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with an
– The direction indicators flash for approximately
10 seconds.
2
opening of the tailgate. alarm, it will be reactivated automatically. – The door mirror spotlamps come on.
When selective unlocking of the tailgate is – The courtesy lamps come on.
activated, the doors and the fuel filler flap remain ► Make a long press on this button.
Deadlocking
locked.
If selective unlocking of the tailgate is Deadlocking renders the interior door
deactivated, pressing the button unlocks the controls inoperative. It also disables the Remote lighting of the
whole vehicle. central locking button. lamps
If motorised operation of the tailgate is The horn remains operational. Availability of this function depends on version.
deactivated, pressing the button partially Never leave anyone inside the vehicle ► Press this button. The sidelamps,
opens the tailgate. when it is deadlocked. dipped beam headlamps, number plate
To lock the vehicle, it is necessary to close lamps and door mirror spotlamps come on for 30
► Press the locking button.
the tailgate again. seconds.
► Press the locking button again within 5
Pressing again before the end of the timed
seconds to deadlock the vehicle (confirmed by
period switches off the lamps immediately.
Locking the vehicle the temporary lighting of the direction indicators).
Closing the windows
Holding the locking button pressed for
Advice
more than 3 seconds closes the windows. Remote control
Normal locking When closing windows, ensure that no The remote control is a sensitive, high-
person or object could prevent their frequency device; avoid handling it in your
► Press the locking button.
correct closure. pocket, due to the risk of unintentionally
The locking, and the activation of the alarm
To leave the windows partly open on versions unlocking the vehicle.
depending on version, is confirmed by the
with alarm, you must first deactivate the Avoid pressing the remote control buttons
lighting of the direction indicators.
interior volumetric alarm. while out of range of the vehicle, due to
Depending on version, the door mirrors fold.
For more information on the Alarm, refer to the risk of rendering the remote control
An access (door or boot) that is not the corresponding section. inoperative. It would then be necessary to
properly closed prevents locking of the reset it.
vehicle. However, if the vehicle is fitted with
an alarm, it will be activated after 45 seconds. Locating the vehicle
If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or boot This function helps you to spot your vehicle from
are not subsequently opened, the vehicle a distance, with the vehicle locked:

27
 Access

Anti-theft protection
Do not modify the electronic vehicle
Keyless Entry and Start Complete unlocking
► Pass your hand behind the handle of one
immobiliser, as this might result in of the front doors or press the tailgate opening
malfunctions. control.
Remember to turn the steering wheel to If the motorised tailgate opening control is
engage the steering lock. activated, this action triggers its automatic
opening.
Locking the vehicle Opening the windows
Driving with the doors locked could make Depending on version, keeping your hand
it more difficult for the emergency services behind the door handle or maintaining the
to enter the passenger compartment in an press on the tailgate opening control allows the
emergency. windows to be opened to the desired position.
As a safety precaution, take the electronic key
with you when leaving the vehicle, even for a This system allows the unlocking, locking Selective unlocking
short time. and starting of the vehicle, while carrying the Driver’s door and fuel/charging flap
electronic key on your person in the recognition ► Pass your hand behind the driver’s door
zone A. handle.
Purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the key codes memorised by a ► To unlock the vehicle completely, pass your
PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that the keys
Unlocking the vehicle hand behind the front passenger door handle
in your possession are the only ones able to with the electronic key close to the passenger
start the vehicle. door.
Complete or selective unlocking, and
deactivation of the alarm depending on
version, is confirmed by the flashing of the
direction indicators.
Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold.

Selective unlocking of the tailgate

Selective unlocking (driver’s door, boot) is ► Press the tailgate opening control to unlock
configured in the Driving/Vehicle touch just the boot.
screen menu. The doors remain locked.
Selective unlocking is deactivated by default.

28
 Access

If selective unlocking of the tailgate is

deactivated, pressing this control also
Make sure that no item or person could
prevent the correct closing of the
► Press it again within 5 seconds to deadlock
the vehicle (confirmed by the temporary lighting
2
unlocks the doors. windows and sunroof. of the direction indicators).
Pay particular attention to children when
operating windows. Advice
Locking the vehicle
The locking, and the activation of the alarm If one of the doors or the boot is still open
Normal locking depending on version, is confirmed by the or if the electronic key for the Keyless
temporary lighting of the direction indicators. Entry and Start​system has been left inside
Depending on version, the door mirrors fold. the vehicle, central locking will not take place.
However, if the vehicle is fitted with an alarm,
Deadlocking it will be activated after 45 seconds.

Deadlocking renders the interior door

If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or
controls inoperative. It also disables the
boot are not subsequently opened, the
central locking button.
vehicle will automatically lock itself again after
The horn remains operational.
about 30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with
Never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it
► Press the handle on one of the front doors an alarm, it will be reactivated automatically.
is deadlocked.
(at the markings) or the locking control on the
tailgate. Depending on version, the automatic
It is not possible to lock the vehicle if one of the door mirror folding/unfolding function is
electronic keys is left inside the vehicle. configured via the touch screen's
Closing the windows and sunroof Driving/Vehicle menu.
Maintaining pressure on the door handle or Otherwise, this setting can be carried out at a
the tailgate control allows the windows and, PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
depending on version, the sunroof to be closed
to the desired position.
As a safety measure, never leave the
This operation also closes the sunroof blind.
vehicle, even for a short time, without
► Press the handle on one of the front doors taking the Keyless Entry and Start system’s
(at the markings) or the locking control on the electronic key with you.
tailgate to lock the vehicle. Be aware of the risk of theft of the vehicle if
the key is present in one of the defined areas
while the vehicle is unlocked.

29
 Access

To preserve the battery charge in the Manual Transporting long or voluminous

electronic key and the vehicle's battery, objects
► Press this button to lock/unlock the vehicle
the "hands-free" functions are set to Press the central locking control to drive
(doors and boot) from inside the vehicle.
hibernation mode after 21 days without use. with the boot open and the doors locked.
The indicator lamp comes on to confirm the
To restore these functions, press one of the Otherwise, every time the speed of the
central locking of the vehicle.
remote control buttons or start the engine with vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the sound
the electronic key against the back-up reader. Central locking does not take place if any of the locks rebounding will be heard and an
For more information on starting with the of the doors are open. alert will be displayed.
Keyless Entry and Start system, refer to the
corresponding section. When locking/deadlocking from the
outside Back-up procedures
Electrical interference When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked
The electronic key may not work if it is from the outside, the indicator lamp flashes
and the button is deactivated.
Lost keys, remote control,
close to an electronic device (e.g. mobile
telephone (switched on or on standby), laptop ► After normal locking, pull one of the electronic key
computer, strong magnetic fields). If this interior door controls to unlock the vehicle. Go to a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's
occurs, move the electronic key away from ► After deadlocking, you must use the registration certificate, your personal
the electronic device. remote control, the "Keyless Entry and identification documents and if possible, the label
Start" system or the built-in key to unlock the bearing the key code.
vehicle. The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve the
Central locking key code and the transponder code, enabling a
new key to be ordered.
Automatic (anti-intrusion
security) Complete unlocking/locking
The doors and boot lock automatically while of the vehicle with the key
driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). Use this procedure in the following situations:
To deactivate/reactivate this function (activated – Remote control battery discharged.
by default): – Remote control malfunction.
► Press the button until an audible signal is – Vehicle battery discharged.
triggered and a confirmation message appears. – Vehicle in an area subject to strong
electromagnetic interference.

30
 Access

In the first case, change the remote control

battery.
Front left-hand door
► Insert the key into the lock and turn it towards
► Close the doors and check from the outside
that the vehicle is locked.
2
In the second case, reinitialise the remote the rear of the vehicle to lock the door, or
control. towards the front to unlock it. Changing the battery
Refer to the corresponding sections. A message is displayed on the instrument panel
Other doors when the battery needs changing.
Unlocking Battery type: CR2032/3 volts.
► Pull the interior door opening control.
Locking
► Insert the key in the door lock.
► Turn the key towards the front/rear to unlock/
lock the vehicle.
► Turn the key towards the rear again within
5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle.

If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will

not be activated when locking with the
key.
If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds
when the door is opened; switch on the ► Unclip the cover by inserting a small
ignition to stop it. screwdriver in the slot and lift the cover.
► Remove the flat battery from its housing.
► Open the doors. ► Put the new battery in place, respecting the
Central locking not ► For the rear doors, check that the child lock polarity. Start by inserting it into the contacts
functioning is not on. located in the corner, then clip the cover onto
Refer to the corresponding section. the unit.
Use these procedures in the following cases:
► Remove the black cap, located on the edge ► Reinitialise the remote control.
– Central locking malfunction.
of the door, using the key. For more information on Reinitialising the
– Battery disconnected or discharged.
► Insert the key into the socket without forcing remote control, refer to the corresponding
In the event of a malfunction of the it, then turn the latch towards the inside of the section.
central locking system, the battery must door. Do not throw remote control batteries
be disconnected to ensure that the vehicle is ► Remove the key and refit the black cap. away, as they contain metals that are
locked fully.

31
 Access

harmful to the environment. Take them to an

approved disposal point.
Reinitialising the remote Doors
control
Following replacement of the battery or in Opening
This equipment contains a button type
the event of a fault, it may be necessary to
battery.
reinitialise the remote control. From outside
Do not swallow the battery. Risk of chemical
► After unlocking the vehicle or with the
burns!
"Keyless Entry and Start" system electronic key
Swallowing the battery can cause serious
in the recognition zone, pull the door handle.
internal burning in only 2 hours and can be
fatal.
From inside
If batteries have been swallowed or inserted
► Pull the interior opening control of a door; this
into a part of the body, seek immediate
unlocks the vehicle completely.
medical advice.
Keep new and used batteries out of the reach With selective unlocking activated:
of children. – Opening the driver's door unlocks
If the battery compartment does not close the driver's door only (if the vehicle has not
properly, stop using the product and keep it already been completely unlocked).
out of the reach of children. – Opening one of the passenger doors
► Insert the mechanical key (incorporated into
the remote control) into the lock to open the unlocks the rest of the vehicle.
Risk of explosion if the battery is vehicle.
replaced with an incorrect type! ► Place the electronic key against the back-up
Replace the battery with the same type. reader on the steering column and hold it there Boot
until the ignition is switched on.
Risk of explosion or leaking of ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever Opening the tailgate
inflammable liquid or gas! in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal.
Do not use in/store in/place in an environment ► With an automatic gearbox, while in mode
where the temperature is extremely high or P, depress the brake pedal.
where the pressure is extremely low due to ► Switch on the ignition by pressing the
very high altitude. "START/STOP" button.
Do not try to burn, crush or cut a used battery. If the fault persists after reinitialisation, contact
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.

32
 Access

► With the vehicle unlocked or with the

electronic key in the recognition zone, press the
2
central tailgate control.
► Raise the tailgate.

When selective unlocking is activated,

the electronic key must be close to the
rear of the vehicle.

The tailgate is not designed to hold a ► Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the Check that there is enough space to
bicycle carrier. lock to unlock the boot. allow for the movement of the motorised
► Move the latch to the left. tailgate.
Closing the tailgate Locking after closing
► Lower the tailgate using the interior grips. If the fault persists after closing again, the boot
► Release the grips and press down on the will remain locked.
outside of the tailgate to close it.
In the event of a fault with the central
In the event of a malfunction or if you locking system, it is essential to
experience difficulty opening or closing disconnect the battery to lock the boot and so
the tailgate, have it checked by a PEUGEOT ensure complete locking of the vehicle.
dealer or a qualified workshop without delay,
to avoid the issue deteriorating and prevent
any risk of the tailgate dropping, potentially
causing serious injury.
Hands-free tailgate Never insert a finger in the locking
(Depending on version) system of the motorised tailgate - risk of
The motorised tailgate must only be operated serious injury!
Back-up release with the vehicle stationary.
To manually unlock the boot in the event of a
battery or central locking failure. Anti-pinch
The motorised tailgate has an obstacle detection
Unlocking system that automatically interrupts and reverses
► Fold the rear seats to gain access to the lock its movement by a few degrees, to allow the
from inside the boot. obstacle to be cleared.

33
 Access

Please note that this anti-pinch system is not The tailgate opens, either completely by
active at the end of the closing travel (around default, or to the position memorised
1 cm from completely closed). beforehand.
If motorised operation is not activated, these
To avoid the risk of injury through
actions release the tailgate (partially-open
pinching or trapping, before and during
position).
operation of the motorised tailgate:
When the vehicle is locked, the request to
– ensure that there is no-one close to the
open the boot with one of the controls A
rear of the vehicle.
or B unlocks the vehicle, or only the boot if
– monitor the activity of the rear passengers,
selective unlocking is activated, prior to the
particularly any children.
opening of the boot.

There are several ways of operating the tailgate:

Bicycle carrier/Towing device Closing
A. Using the Keyless Entry and Start system’s
The motorised tailgate is not designed to support ► A short press on the interior tailgate control C.
electronic key
a bicycle carrier.
B. Using the exterior tailgate control It is possible to interrupt the operation of
When installing a bicycle carrier on the towing
C. Using the interior tailgate control the tailgate at any point.
device with connection of the cable to the trailer
D. Using the control on the dashboard* Pressing one of these controls again
socket, the motorised operation of the tailgate
interrupts the movement that is underway.
will be automatically deactivated. Opening
If using a towing device or bicycle carrier ► A long press on the central button A of the
not recommended by PEUGEOT, it is electronic key. Hands-free function (Hands-Free
essential to deactivate the motorised or Tailgate Access)
operation of the tailgate. ► A short press on the exterior tailgate control (Depending on version)
B, with the electronic key on your person. With the electronic key on your person, this
or function allows the motorised tailgate to be
Motorised operation ► Two consecutive presses on the control D of opened, closed or stopped via a "kicking"
Motorised operation of the tailgate is set the dashboard. movement under the rear bumper.
via the Driving/Vehicle touch screen The "Hands-Free Tailgate/Access"
menu. function is set via the Driving/Vehicle
touch screen menu.

* Depending on version.

34
 Access

Ensure that you are steady on your feet

before performing the "kicking"
The "kicking" movement must be given forwards,
smoothly, not too fast and with a vertical
Automatic locking with the hands-free
function 2
movement. movement from low to high. Raise the foot
Take care not to touch the exhaust system sufficiently and remove it immediately.
which may be hot - risk of burns! Recognition of the "kicking" movement is
confirmed by the lighting of the direction
Rechargeable hybrid vehicles indicators followed by an audible signal.
The function is not available when the "Sideward kicking" movements do not
vehicle is connected. work. If the "kicking" movement has not
been detected, wait at least 2 seconds before
► To activate/deactivate the automatic locking
repeating the movement.
of the vehicle when closing the tailgate with the
Do not perform repetitive "kicking"
hands-free function, press this button.
movements.
The green indicator lamp comes on to indicate
If the motorised tailgate has not started to open, that the function is activated.
check that: When the vehicle is locked, the request
– the function is activated. to open the tailgate with this function
– the electronic key is on your person, outside unlocks the vehicle, or only the tailgate if
the vehicle in the rear recognition area. selective unlocking is activated, prior to the
– the "kicking" movement was performed in the opening of the tailgate.
detection zone, close enough to the bumper. Closing the tailgate with the "Hands-Free
– the foot was removed from the bumper quickly Tailgate Access" function enables you to lock
enough. the vehicle.

Recommendations on the hands-free

function (Hands-Free Tailgate Access)
If it does not work, check that the electronic key
is not exposed to a source of electromagnetic
interference (e.g. smartphone).
► Position yourself behind the vehicle by the The function may be deactivated or affected if
number plate and perform a "kicking" movement there is rain or snow.
in the "OK" detection zone.

35
 Access

The function may not work correctly with a ► press button C or the exterior control B for Manual closing of the
prosthetic leg. more than 3 seconds (memorisation is confirmed
In some circumstances, the tailgate may open or by a brief audible signal).
motorised tailgate in case of
close by itself, particularly when:
Memorising is not available until the
failure
– hitching up or removing a trailer; This operation is only necessary in the case of
height of opening is more than or equal
– operating a towing device; failure of the tailgate motor.
to 1 metre between the low position and the
– fitting or removing a bicycle carrier; If the failure originates from the battery, it is
high position of the tailgate.
– loading or unloading bicycles on/from a bicycle recommended to recharge it or change it with the
carrier; To delete the memorised position: tailgate closed.
– depositing or lifting something behind the ► open the tailgate to any position. In this situation, a significant force may be
vehicle; ► press button C or the exterior control B for needed to close the tailgate.
– an animal approaches the rear bumper; more than 3 seconds (deletion is confirmed by a ► Close it gently without slamming, as slowly as
– washing the vehicle; long audible signal). possible, by pushing at the centre of the tailgate.
– maintenance is performed on the vehicle;
– accessing the spare wheel. Manual operation Do not lower the tailgate by pushing at
one of its sides - risk of damage!
To avoid such operating problems, keep the The tailgate can be manoeuvred by hand, even
electronic key away from the recognition zone or with motorised operation activated.
deactivate the hands-free function. The tailgate must be stationary. Precautions in use
Towing device When opening and closing the motorised tailgate
manually, there is no assistance from gas struts. In wintry conditions
The installation of a towing device may
Resistance to opening and closing is therefore To avoid any operating problems, remove
disturb the detection system.
entirely normal. the snow or wait until the ice melts before
► Perform the "kicking" movement on the
requesting motorised opening of the tailgate.
right side of the towing device. Repeatedly opening and closing the
motorised tailgate can cause overheating
When washing
Memorising an opening of its electric motor, after which opening and
When washing the vehicle in an
closing will not be possible.
position Allow at least 10 minutes for the electric
automatic car wash, do not forget to lock and
move away from the vehicle to prevent any
To memorise a position, in order to limit the motor to cool down before operating the
risk of unwanted opening.
motorised tailgate opening angle: tailgate again.
► move the tailgate to the desired position If you are unable to wait, operate it manually.
manually or by pressing the button.

36
 Access

Alarm
(Depending on version)
When the vehicle is parked, the alarm
will not be triggered if the vehicle is
Door, boot or bonnet
If an opening is not properly closed,
2
knocked. the vehicle is not locked, but the exterior
perimeter monitoring will be activated after
Self-protection function 45 seconds, at the same time as the interior
The system checks whether any of its volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring.
components are out of service.
The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central Deactivation
control or the siren wiring is put out of service or
► Press one of the remote control unlocking
damaged.
buttons:
Work on the alarm system short press
System which protects and provides a deterrent Consult a PEUGEOT dealer or a
against theft and break-ins. qualified workshop. long press
Exterior perimeter monitoring
or
The system checks for opening of the vehicle.
Locking the vehicle with full ► Unlock the vehicle with the Keyless Entry and
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a
door, the boot or the bonnet, for example. alarm system Start system.
The monitoring system is deactivated: the
Interior volumetric monitoring
Activation indicator lamp in the button goes off and the
The system checks for any variation in volume in direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds.
► Switch off the ignition and exit the vehicle.
the passenger compartment.
► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the If the vehicle automatically locks itself
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a
remote control or with the Keyless Entry and again (as happens if a door or the boot is
window, enters the passenger compartment or
Start system. not opened within 30 seconds of unlocking),
moves inside the vehicle.
When the monitoring system is active, the red the monitoring system is automatically
Anti-tilt monitoring indicator lamp in the button flashes once per reactivated.
The system checks for any change in the attitude second and the direction indicators come on for
of the vehicle. about 2 seconds.
The alarm goes off if the vehicle is lifted or The exterior perimeter monitoring is activated
moved. after 5 seconds and the interior volumetric and
anti-tilt monitoring after 45 seconds.

37
 Access

Locking the vehicle Reactivating the interior volumetric ► Switch on the ignition; this stops the alarm.
and anti-tilt monitoring The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
with exterior perimeter
► Deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring
monitoring only by unlocking the vehicle using the remote control
Locking the vehicle without
Deactivate the interior volumetric and anti-tilt or the Keyless Entry and Start system. activating the alarm
monitoring to avoid the unwanted triggering of The indicator lamp in the button goes off. ► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
the alarm, in certain cases such as: ► Reactivate all monitoring by locking the (built-in the remote control) in the driver's door
– Slightly open window. vehicle using the remote control or the Keyless lock.
– Washing the vehicle. Entry and Start system.
– Changing a wheel. The red indicator lamp in the button once again Malfunction
– Towing the vehicle. flashes every second. When the ignition is switched on, the fixed
– Transport on a ship or ferry.
lighting of the red indicator lamp in the button
Triggering of the alarm indicates a system malfunction.
Deactivating the interior volumetric This is indicated by sounding of the siren Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
and anti-tilt monitoring and flashing of the direction indicators for 30 qualified workshop.
► Switch off the ignition and within 10 seconds seconds.
press the alarm button until its red indicator lamp Depending on the country of sale, certain
is on fixed. monitoring functions remain active until the alarm Electric windows
► Get out of the vehicle. has been triggered eleven times consecutively.
► Immediately lock the vehicle using the remote When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control or the Keyless Entry and Start system. control or the Keyless Entry and Start system,
Only the exterior perimeter monitoring is rapid flashing of the red indicator lamp in the
activated; the button's red indicator lamp flashes button informs you that the alarm was triggered
once every second. during your absence. When the ignition is
1. Left-hand front
switched on, this flashing stops.
To take effect, this deactivation must be 2. Right-hand front
carried out after each time the ignition is
switched off.
Failure of the remote control 3. Right-hand rear
4. Left-hand rear
To deactivate the monitoring functions:
5. Deactivation of electric window controls
► Unlock the vehicle using the key in the
located by rear seats
driver's door lock.
► Open the door; the alarm is triggered.

38
 Access

Manual operation
► To open/close the window, press/pull the
Deactivating the rear
controls for the rear electric
► Continue to pull the control for at least one
second after the window reaches the closed
2
position.
switch without passing the point of resistance;
the window stops as soon as the switch is
windows If an electric window meets an obstacle
released. during operation, the movement of the
window must be reversed. To do this, press
Automatic operation the relevant control.
► To open/close the window, press/pull the When the driver operates the passengers’
switch past its resistance point: the window electric window controls, it is important to
opens/closes completely when the switch is ensure that nothing can prevent the window
For your children's safety, press control 5 to
released. from closing properly.
deactivate the controls for the rear electric
Operating the switch again stops the movement It is important to ensure that passengers use
windows, irrespective of their positions.
of the window. the electric windows correctly.
The red indicator lamp in the button comes
Pay particular attention to children when
Window controls remain operational for on and a confirmation message is displayed.
operating the windows.
approximately 45 seconds after switching The lamp will remain lit until the controls are
Be aware of passengers and/or other persons
off the ignition or after locking the vehicle. reactivated.
present when closing windows using the key
After that time, the controls are disabled. The rear electric windows can still be controlled
or the "Keyless Entry and Start" system.
To reactivate them, switch on the ignition or using the driver's controls.
Do not put your head or arms through the
unlock the vehicle.
open windows when the vehicle is moving -
Reinitialising the electric risk of serious injury!
Anti-pinch
windows
If the window meets an obstacle while rising, it After reconnecting the battery, or in the event
stops and immediately partially lowers again. of abnormal window movement, the anti-pinch Panoramic sunroof
function must be reinitialised.
The panoramic sunroof consists of a movable
The anti-pinch function is disabled during the
glass panel that slides over the roof and a blind
following sequence of operations.
that can be opened independently. Opening the
For each window:
sunroof automatically opens the blind.
► Lower the window fully, then raise it; it will
► To operate the panoramic sunroof or the
rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the
blind, use the buttons in the roof console.
control is pressed. Repeat the operation until the
window is fully closed.

39
 Access

If the sunroof is wet, following a shower Before operating the sunroof or blind
or washing the vehicle, wait until it is control buttons, ensure that no object or
completely dry before opening. person might prevent the movement.
Do not operate the sunroof if it is covered by Be particularly aware of children when
snow or ice - risk of damage! operating the sunroof or blind.
Use only plastic scrapers to remove snow or If something is trapped when operating the
ice from the sunroof. sunroof or blind, you should reverse the
movement of the sunroof or blind by pressing
Regularly check the condition of the the control in question.
sunroof seals (e.g. presence of dust, The driver must ensure that passengers use
A. Sunroof blind control dead leaves). the sunroof and blind correctly.
B. Sunroof control If using a car wash, check first that the roof is
correctly closed and keep the high-pressure Anti-pinch system
The sunroof or blind can be operated when the
ignition is turned on (if the battery is charged jet at least 30 centimetres from the seals. If the sunroof or blind encounters an obstacle
enough), with the engine running, in STOP mode when closing, the movement is automatically
of Stop & Start, and up to 45 seconds after Never leave the vehicle with the sunroof reversed.
turning off the ignition or after locking the vehicle. open. The roof anti-pinch system is designed to be
effective at speeds of up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
Precautions
Opening/Closing
Do not put your head or arms through the
Operation
► To open the sunroof or the blind, use the
sunroof while the vehicle is moving - risk When opening the sunroof fully, the movable
part of the button located towards the rear of the
of serious injury! glass moves to a partially open position, then
vehicle.
slides over the roof. Any intermediate position is
► To close the sunroof or the blind, use the part
possible.
Ensure that any luggage or accessories of the button located towards the front of the
carried on the roof bars do not interfere Depending on the speed of the vehicle, vehicle.
with the movement of the sunroof. the partially open position may vary to Operation of buttons
Do not place heavy loads on the movable improve the acoustics.
► Pressing a button beyond its point of
glass panel of the sunroof.
resistance directly opens or closes the sunroof
or blind fully.
► Pressing the button again stops the current
movement.

40
 Access

► When holding a button (without going

beyond the point of resistance), the movement
► Press and hold the front part of button B, until
the sunroof and blind move slightly, then hold for
2
of the sunroof or blind stops when this button is a further 1 second before releasing.
released. ► Wait 2 seconds and then press and hold the
► When the sunroof is closed: pressing once front part of button B. The blind and the sunroof
without passing the point of resistance moves it will open and close, one after the other. When
to a partially open position. both are completely closed again, hold for a
► When the sunroof is partially open: pressing further 2 seconds and release.
once without passing the point of resistance
If there is an operating fault, restart the
opens or closes it fully.
whole procedure.
The sunroof and windows, then the blind,
can be closed by holding down the door
locking control. The manoeuvre stops as soon
as the locking control is released.

Closing of the blind is limited by the

position of the sunroof: the blind cannot
go further than the front of the movable glass.
During simultaneous movements of the
sunroof and blind, the blind automatically
stops or resumes movement depending on
the position of the sunroof.

Reinitialisation
Following reconnection of the battery or in the
event of a fault or jerky movement of the sunroof
or blind, reinitialisation is required.
► Check that nothing is interfering with the
sunroof or blind and that the seals are clean.
► With the ignition on, fully close the sunroof
and blind.

41
 Ease of use and comfort

Driving position The distance between the knees and the

dashboard should be at least 10 cm, for easy
Passenger’s side

access to the dashboard controls.

Correct seating position Adjust the backrest angle to as vertical a position
Adopting a good driving position contributes to as possible; never tilt it more than 25°.
improving driver comfort and protection. Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is
It also optimises interior and exterior visibility as level with the top of the head.
well as access to controls. Adjust the length of the seat cushion to support
Certain seat adjustments described in this your thighs.
section depend on the trim level and the country Adjust the lumbar support so that it conforms to
in which the vehicle is sold. the shape of the spine.
Adjust the steering wheel so that it is at least
Driver’s side 25 cm from the sternum and you can hold it with Sit fully back in the seat with the pelvis, back and
the arms slightly bent. shoulders in contact with the seat backrest.
The steering wheel should not hide the Adjust the longitudinal position of the seat so that
instrument panel. you are at a distance of at least 25 cm from the
dashboard.
As a safety precaution, adjust the seats Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is
only when the vehicle is stationary. level with the top of the head.

Electrically-adjustable seats Before moving off

Switch the ignition on to enable the Adjust the interior and exterior door mirrors to
adjustments to be made. reduce blind spots.
Fasten the seat belt: place the diagonal belt in
Sit fully back in the seat with your pelvis, back
the middle of the shoulder and adjust the lap belt
and shoulders in contact with the seat backrest.
so that it is tightened across the pelvis.
Adjust the seat cushion height so that your eyes
Ensure that all passengers have fastened their
are level with the centre of the windscreen.
seat belts correctly.
The head should be at a minimum distance of
10 cm from the roof. Electric door mirrors
Adjust the longitudinal position of the seat so Switch the ignition on to enable the
that you can fully depress the pedals with legs adjustments to be made.
slightly flexed.

42
 Ease of use and comfort

When driving
Maintain a good driving position and hold the
Manually-adjusted seats 5. Lumbar support adjustment
(only on the driver's seat)
3
steering wheel with both hands at the 'quarter to ► Turn the knob forwards or backwards
three' position, so that you can easily and quickly to increase or decrease the level of lumbar
reach the controls behind and near the steering support.
wheel.

Never adjust the seats or steering wheel ‘AGR’ certified seats

when driving. Additional adjustments
Always keep your feet on the floor.

Front seats
Before moving the seat backwards,
ensure that there is no person or object
1. Longitudinal adjustment of the seat position
that might prevent the full travel of the seat.
► Raise the control bar and slide the seat 1. Seat cushion length adjustment
There is a risk of trapping or pinching
forwards or backwards. ► Pull the handle forwards to release the
passengers if present in the rear seats or of
► Release the bar to lock the seat in cushion, then move the front part of the seat
jamming the seat if large objects are placed
position in one of the notches. cushion forwards or backwards.
on the floor behind the seat.
2. Seat cushion height adjustment 2. Seat cushion angle electric adjustment
► Raise or lower the control as many times ► Press and hold the front or rear of the
as needed to obtain the desired height. button to raise or lower the front part of the
3. Seat backrest angle adjustment seat cushion.
► Turn the knob forwards or backwards to
recline the backrest to the desired angle.
or
► For a passenger seat that can be placed
in the table position, pull the handle and
guide the backrest forwards or backwards.
4. Head restraint height adjustment
Refer to the corresponding section.

43
 Ease of use and comfort

3. Lumbar support electric adjustment Folding the backrest Front head restraints
The control allows independent adjustment of
the depth and vertical position of the lumbar Adjusting the height
support.
► Press and hold the front or rear of the
control to increase or reduce the lumbar
support.
► Press and hold the top or bottom of the
control to raise or lower the lumbar support
area.

Placing the passenger seat

► Pull the control fully upwards to release the
in the table position backrest.
The backrest of the passenger seat can be fully ► Tip the backrest fully forwards. Upwards:
folded forwards and secured in this position.
In this position, the backrest can support ► Pull the head restraint up to the desired
This function, when associated with folding
a maximum load of 30 kg. position; you can feel the head restraint clicking
of the backrest of the rear seats, helps with
When sharp deceleration occurs, objects into position.
transporting long and bulky objects.
placed on the folded backrest can turn into Downwards:
First steps:
projectiles. ► Press lug A to lower the head restraint.
► Lower the head restraint.
► Fold up the “aircraft” type table (depending The head restraint is correctly adjusted
on version). Returning the backrest into position when its upper edge is level with the top
► Move the seat backwards to allow space for of the head.
► Pull the control fully upwards to release the
the head restraint.
backrest.
► Adjust the seat to the lowest position.
► Raise the backrest and guide it backwards Removing a head restraint
► Check that there is nothing that might
until it latches into place. ► Pull the head restraint fully up.
interfere with folding of the backrest (seat belt,
► Check that the backrest is correctly latched ► Press lug A to release the head restraint and
child seat, items of clothing, bags, etc.).
into place. raise it fully.
Deactivation of the front passenger ► Stow the head restraint securely.
airbag is recommended.

44
 Ease of use and comfort

Refitting a head restraint

► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides
5. Lumbar support adjustment
The control allows independent adjustment of
3
in the corresponding seat backrest. the depth and vertical position of the lumbar
► Push the head restraint fully down. support.
► Press the lug A to release the head restraint ► Press and hold the front or rear of the
and push it down. control to increase or reduce the lumbar
► Adjust the height of the head restraint. support.
► Press and hold the top or bottom of the
Never drive with the head restraints
control to raise or lower the lumbar support
removed; they should be in place and
area.
adjusted for the occupant of the seat.

Memorising driving
Electrically-adjusted driver's
positions
seat 1. Seat cushion height and angle adjustment/ Associated with the electrically-adjusted driver’s
To carry out these electric adjustments, Longitudinal adjustment of the seat position seat, this function allows two driving positions
switch on the ignition or start the engine ► Raise or lower the front of the control to to be memorised, to make these adjustments
if the vehicle has gone into energy economy obtain the desired seat cushion angle. easier if there are frequent driver changes.
mode. ► Raise or lower the rear of the control to It records the electric adjustments made to the
These electric adjustments are accessible raise or lower the seat cushion. seat and door mirrors.
about 1 minute after opening the driver's door. ► Slide the control forwards or backwards to
They are deactivated about 1 minute after move the seat forwards or backwards.
switching the ignition off. 2. Seat backrest angle adjustment
► Turn the control forwards or backwards to
recline the backrest to the desired angle.
3. Head restraint height adjustment
Refer to the corresponding section.
4. Seat cushion length adjustment
► Pull the handle forwards to release the
cushion, then move the front part of the seat
cushion forwards or backwards.
Using buttons M/1/2

45
 Ease of use and comfort

► Enter the vehicle and switch the ignition on. Heated seats Prolonged use of heated seats is not
► Adjust your seat and the door mirrors. recommended for people with sensitive
► Press button M, then press button 1 or 2 skin.
within 4 seconds. There is a risk of burns for people whose
An audible signal confirms the memorisation. perception of heat is impaired (e.g. illness,
Memorising a new position cancels the previous taking medication).
position. To keep the heated pad intact and to prevent
a short circuit:
Recalling a stored position – Do not place heavy or sharp objects on the
seat.
While the seat is moving, take care that
The function is active only with the engine – Do not kneel or stand on the seat.
no person or object hinders the
running and when the outside temperature is – Do not spill liquids onto the seat.
automatic movement of the seat.
below 20°C. – Never use the heating function if the seat
With the ignition on or engine running ► Press the button corresponding to the seat. is damp.
► Press button 1 or 2 to recall the ► Each press changes the heating level; the
corresponding position.
An audible signal sounds when adjustment is
corresponding number of indicator lamps come
on.
Multipoint massage
► To switch off the heating, press the button System with a choice of type of massage and
complete.
until all of the indicator lamps are off. adjustment of its intensity.
You can interrupt the current movement by
The system status is memorised when the This system operates with the engine running, as
pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using one of the
ignition is switched off. well as in STOP mode of the Stop & Start.
seat adjustment controls.
The massage settings are adjusted via the touch
A stored position cannot be recalled while
Do not use the function when the seat screen.
driving.
is not occupied. From the front seat:
The recalling of stored positions is deactivated
Reduce the heating intensity as soon as ► Press this button; its green indicator
45 seconds after switching off the ignition.
possible. lamp comes on.
When the seat and passenger compartment The settings page is displayed on the touch
have reached a satisfactory temperature, screen with the last memorised settings.
switch the function off; reducing electrical If the settings suit you and you make no
consumption in turn decreases energy changes, the display returns to its previous state,
consumption. and the function activates immediately.
Seats must be adjusted one after another,
starting with the driver's seat.

46
 Ease of use and comfort

To modify the settings:

► Begin with the driver’s seat.
► Adjust the height and reach to suit your
driving position.
As a safety measure, the mirrors should
be adjusted to reduce the "blind spots".
3
► Select a massage intensity from the three ► Push the control to lock the steering wheel. The objects that you see in the mirrors are
levels offered: "1" (Low), "2" (Normal) or "3" in fact closer than they appear. Take this
For safety reasons, these adjustments
(High). into account in order to correctly judge the
must only be carried out with the vehicle
► Select another type of massage from those distance of vehicles approaching from behind.
stationary.
offered.
► Wait for the driver's seat settings page to
Manual folding
disappear.
► Next, proceed with the passenger's seat in Mirrors The mirrors can be folded manually (parking
the same way. obstruction, narrow garage, etc.).
The changes are applied immediately. Door mirrors ► Turn the mirror towards the vehicle.
Once activated, the system starts a one hour
Electric folding
massage cycle, made up of sequences of 6 Adjustment
minutes of massage followed by 3 minutes at Depending on equipment, the door mirrors can
rest. be folded electrically.
The system automatically stops at the end of the ► From the inside, with the
cycle; the indicator lamp for the button goes off. ignition on, place control A in the
central position.
Steering wheel ► Pull control A backwards.

adjustment ► Lock the vehicle from the outside.

If the mirrors are folded using control A,

they will not unfold when the vehicle is
unlocked.
► Move control A to the right or to the left to
select the corresponding mirror. Electric unfolding
► Move control B in any of the four directions ► From outside: unlock the vehicle.
to adjust. ► From inside: with the ignition on, place
► When stationary, pull the control to release ► Return control A to its central position. control A in the central position and then pull it
the steering wheel. rearwards.

47
 Ease of use and comfort

Depending on version, the automatic

door mirror folding/unfolding function is
Interior rear view mirror Rear head restraints
configured via the Driving / Vehicle touch
screen menu.
Otherwise, this setting can be carried out at a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

Automatic tilting in reverse gear

Depending on version, this function allows to
automatically tilt the mirrors downwards to assist
with parking manoeuvres in reverse gear.
With the engine running, on engaging reverse
gear, the mirror glasses tilt downwards.
They return to their initial position:
– A few seconds after coming out of reverse The electrochrome system uses a sensor that
gear. detects the level of exterior brightness and that
– Once the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph coming from the rear of the vehicle, in order to
(10 km/h). automatically and gradually switch between day
– When the engine is switched off. and night usage.
This function is set via the Driving/
To ensure optimum visibility while
Vehicle touch screen menu.
manoeuvring, the mirror automatically
Demisting/Defrosting brightens when reverse gear is engaged.
The system is deactivated if the load in the
The demisting/defrosting of the door
boot exceeds the height of the load space
mirrors works with the demisting/
cover or if the load space cover has items
defrosting of the rear screen.
placed on it.
For more information on Rear screen High position (use):
demisting/defrosting, refer to the ► Pull the head restraint fully up.
corresponding section. Low position (stowing; when the seats are not
in use):
► Press the lugs A to release the head restraint
and push it down.

48
 Ease of use and comfort

The rear head restraints can be removed.

Removing a head restraint
Folding the backrests ► Check that the centre seat belt buckle is
stored in its housing.
3
► Pull the head restraint fully up. The folding of the backrest is
► Press the lugs A to release the head restraint accompanied by a slight lowering of the
and remove it completely. corresponding cushion.
► Store the head restraint. To obtain a flat surface, it is necessary to
Refitting a head restraint place the adjustable boot floor in the high
position.
► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides
When the backrest is released, the red
in the corresponding seat backrest.
indicator in the release grip is visible.
► Push the head restraint down as far as it will
go.
► Press the lugs A to release the head restraint Folding from the passenger
and push it down. Each section of the backrest has two release compartment
Never drive with passengers seated at controls:
the rear when the head restraints are – A grip 1 on the outer edge of the backrest.
removed; the head restraints should be in – A lever 2 on the boot side trim (depending on
place and in the high position. version).

The backrests should only be

The head restraint for the central manoeuvred when the vehicle is
seat and those for the side seats stationary.
are not interchangeable.
First steps:
► Lower the head restraints.

Rear bench seat ► Lift up the rear armrest.

► If necessary, move the front seats forward.
► Check that no person or object might interfere ► Press the backrest release grip 1.
with the folding of the backrests (e.g. clothing, ► Guide the backrest 3 down to the horizontal
luggage). position.

Bench seat with fixed cushions and split folding ► Check that the outer seat belts are lying flat
backrests (2/3-1/3) to adapt the boot load space. on the backrests.

49
 Ease of use and comfort

Folding from the boot ► Put the backrest 3 in the upright position and
push it firmly to latch it home.
► Check that the red indicator is no longer
visible in the release grip 1.
► Ensure that the outer seat belts were not
trapped during the operation.

Please note: an incorrectly latched

backrest compromises the safety of
passengers in the event of sudden braking or
an accident.
The contents of the boot may be thrown
forward - risk of serious injury!

► Pull the backrest release lever 2 towards you.

The backrest 3 folds fully onto the cushion.
Second row seats
Repositioning the backrests
First check that the outer seat belts are
lying vertically flat alongside the backrest A. Longitudinal adjustment
latching rings. B. Seat backrest angle adjustment and folding
Seat adjustment C. Folding the backrest from behind and
The three second row seats are independent emergency exit for third row passengers
and of the same width. Their backrests can be D. Access to third row seats
folded to adapt the boot load space.

50
 Ease of use and comfort

Longitudinal adjustment ► Lift control handle B1 and guide the backrest

backwards or forwards, raising yourself slightly
Before and while performing the
operation on the seats, check that the
3
if needed. passengers, children in particular, keep their
► Release the handle and ensure the backrest hands and their feet far from the moving parts
is properly locked on one of the positions offered. of the seats (hinges, slides, etc.) - risk of
Central seat serious injury!
► Lift control strap B2 and guide the backrest
backwards or forwards, raising yourself slightly Folding from the outside
if needed.
► Release the strap and ensure the backrest is
properly locked on one of the positions offered.

Flat floor
► Raise control bar A and slide the seat
forwards or backwards.
► Release the bar to lock the seat in position in
one of the notches.
Seat backrest angle adjustment

► Pull handle B1 or strap B2 until the backrest

is fully folded.
► Release the control.
► Gently push the backrest forwards so that
the backrest tilts until it is folded onto the seat
cushion.
Folding the backrests
► Check that the "aircraft" type tables of the
front seats are properly folded.
► Place the second row seats in the maximum
rear position.
Side seats

51
 Ease of use and comfort

Folding from the boot ► Straighten the backrest until it locks. Before unfolding the continuity panels,
check that the 2nd row seats are pulled as
Before performing any operations on the
far back as possible.
rear seats, to avoid damage to the seat
belts, check that the outer seat belts are
properly tensioned. The central seat belt must Accessing third row seats
be stored in the headlining. The third row seats are accessed via the second
row side seats.
Continuity panels

When loading, for example, or from the third row

seats:
► Pull strap C to unlock the desired seat and
give the backrest a slight push forwards.

Repositioning the seat

From the outside or from the third row seats:
► Check that the "aircraft" type tables of the
Each seat has a continuity panel at the bottom of
front seats are properly folded up.
the backrest, which, once unfolded:
► Pull paddle D and guide the backrest
– allows for a continuous loading surface in the
forwards to tilt it and move the seat forwards.
boot, whatever the position of the seats,
To put the seat back in place:
– prevents objects from sliding beneath the 2nd
► Straighten the backrest until the seat locks.
row seats.
Whatever the initial position of the seat, it is
The continuity panels are held against the
placed automatically a third of the way along
backrests with a magnetic fixing element.
the longitudinal adjustment range in order to
These continuity panels are not designed preserve enough space for passengers in the
to support a weight greater than 30 kg. third row seats.
► Place the continuity panels of the 2 row
nd

seats back up against the backrests.

52
 Ease of use and comfort

If this system fails (paddle D), the third

row passengers can also get out after
► Pull one of the straps; the 3 sections of the
corresponding panel fold into concertina form.
3
having folded the backrest of the second row When the 3rd row seats are straightened, these
seats using strap C. folded concertina panels can be left upright or
Do not let children operate the seats flat behind the seats (freeing up the seat well as
unsupervised. a storage space).

Positioning the seats

Third row seats These operations are carried out from the boot
When there is a seat at the back of the boot, the sill.
removable support is fixed against the front wall
of its housing.
If the seat is removed from the back of the boot
The two third row seats are stored in a retracted for extra storage space, the removable support
position in the bottom of the boot. Each one is must be installed on the two lugs on the central
covered with rigid concertina panels, secured to wall.
the vehicle.

Do not let children operate the seats

Folding the concertina
unsupervised. panels
Each concertina panel can support a
maximum load of 100 kg with the third ► Remove the load space cover roller.
row seats folded away. ► Straighten the continuity panels of the 2nd row
With the third row seats removed and the seats.
removable concertina panels supports ► Fold back the concertina panel and straighten
installed, the maximum load is limited to it vertically.
50 kg. ► Pull the black strap E, located behind the
backrest.
The backrest tilts backwards bringing the seat
cushion with it; the seat locks in the open
position.

53
 Ease of use and comfort

The load space cover roller can be stored behind ► Reposition the concertina panels above the
the backrests of the 3rd row seats. retracted seats.
For more information on the Boot fittings, and
Before doing anything to the 3rd row
in particular the load space cover roller, refer to
seats, straighten the continuity panels of
the corresponding section.
the 2nd row seats.
Storing the seats Do not try to fold back a seat in the 3rd row
without having opened it until the backrest is
fully locked.
Do not leave anything on or underneath the ► Lift the yellow lever G, located on the right-
cushions of the 3rd row seats when they are hand side, as far upwards as possible to unlock
being folded. the seat.
Do not guide strap F when storing the seat -
your fingers may get trapped!

Removing the seats

Removing the right-hand seat first is
recommended in order to facilitate access to the
left-hand seat unlocking control.
► Straighten the continuity panels of the 2nd row
seats.
► Place the head restraints in the low position.
► Check that the seat belts in the 3rd row are
properly stored along the side trims without ► While keeping the yellow lever held up as far
being folded or twisted. as possible, raise the rear part of the seat using
► Pull red strap F, located at the bottom of the the red strap F.
backrest.
The seat is unlocked.
► Push the backrest slightly forwards. The seat must be in the folded-away position.
The backrest tilts and folds onto the cushion; the These operations must be performed from the
folded seat is stored at the back of its storage boot sill.
area. ► Fold back the concertina panel.

54
 Ease of use and comfort

► While holding it by the sides at the plastic

covers, tilt the seat forwards.
Seat modularity 3
► Simultaneously place both hooks located at
the front of the seat onto the coloured securing
lugs on the right and left at the bottom of the seat
well. Configuration examples
Check that the front hooks of the seat are
positioned correctly on the two lugs.
► Once the rear part of the seat has been If they are not, you must remove the seat and
raised, take hold of each side of the seat start the procedure again.
cushion, at the plastic covers, then bring the seat
towards you, keeping it at the same angle.

Repositioning the seats

These operations must be performed from the
boot sill.
7 seats 5 seats Transport of
As long as the seat is not in the correct objects
position, it must be held with both hands
by the sides, keeping it folded.
► Release the rear part of the seat which will
► Check in advance that the seat storage well
lock in place under its own weight.
is empty and that the removable support is
The yellow lever G folds back automatically.
properly secured against the front wall.
If the seat is not perfectly horizontal, do
not press on the backrest and do not try
to unfold it - risk of damaging the mechanism!
Take out the seat and start the operation
again.
6 seats 4 seats

By folding the second row seats and

retracting the third row seats, you obtain

55
 Ease of use and comfort

a continuous storage floor through to the back Air distribution regulate the automatic air conditioning
of the front seats. system.
By placing the front passenger seat in the ► Operate the air conditioning system for at
table position, you obtain a continuous least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice a month to
storage floor through to the dashboard. keep it in good working order.
► If the system does not produce cold air,
Operations on the seats must only be switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT dealer
done when the vehicle is stationary. or a qualified workshop.
When towing a large load on a steep gradient
in high temperatures, switching off the air
Heating and Ventilation conditioning increases the available engine
power, enhancing the towing capacity.
1. Windscreen demisting/de-icing vents
Air intake
2. Front side window demisting/de-icing vents
The air circulating in the passenger compartment 3. Adjustable and closable side air vents Avoid driving for too long with the
is filtered and originates either from the 4. Adjustable and closable central air vents ventilation off or with prolonged operation
exterior, via the grille located at the base of the 5. Air outlets to the front footwells of interior air recirculation. Risk of misting and
windscreen, or from the inside in air recirculation 6. Air outlets to the rear footwells deterioration of the air quality!
mode. 7. Adjustable and closable air vents, with blower
Controls (depending on version) If the interior temperature is very high
after the vehicle has stood for a long
Depending on version, the controls are
time in the sunshine, air the passenger
accessible in the Climate touch screen menu Advice compartment for a few moments.
or are grouped together on the centre console
Using the ventilation and air Put the air flow control at a setting high
panel.
conditioning system enough to quickly change the air in the
► To ensure that air is distributed evenly, passenger compartment.
keep the external air intake grilles at the base
of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents, the Condensation created by the air
air outlets and the air extractor in the boot conditioning results in a discharge of
free from obstructions. water underneath the vehicle. This is perfectly
► Do not cover the sunshine sensor located normal.
on the dashboard; this sensor is used to

56
 Ease of use and comfort

Servicing the ventilation and air

conditioning system
Dual-zone automatic air 3
► Ensure that the passenger compartment conditioning
filter is in good condition and have the filter This system automatically controls the activation
elements replaced regularly. of the air conditioning system, regulating the
We recommend using a composite passenger temperature, air flow and air distribution inside
compartment filter. Its specific active additive the passenger compartment.
helps protect against polluting gases and bad This system works with the engine running, but
smells. access to the ventilation and its controls remains
► To ensure correct operation of the possible with the ignition on.
air conditioning system, have it checked Press the Climate menu button to display
according to the recommendations in the the system controls page.
Manufacturer’s service schedule.

Stop & Start

The heating and air conditioning systems 1. Temperature adjustment
only operate when the engine is running. 2. Air flow adjustment
Temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start 3. Air distribution adjustment
system to maintain a comfortable temperature 4. Interior air recirculation
in the passenger compartment. 5. Air conditioning on/off
For more information on the Stop & 6. Maximum air conditioning
Start system, refer to the corresponding 7. Switching the system off
section. 8. Automatic visibility programme
9. Automatic comfort programme on/off
Rechargeable hybrid vehicles 10. Access to the secondary page
Intensive use of the air conditioning 11. Selection of settings for the Automatic
reduces the vehicle range in Electric mode. comfort programme (Soft/Normal/Fast)
12. "AQS (Air Quality System)" function (with
pollution sensor) (depending on version)
13. Mono-zone/Dual-zone

57
 Ease of use and comfort

14. Temperature conditioning (depending on – "Normal": offers the best compromise Automatic Visibility
between a comfortable temperature and quiet
version)
operation (default setting).
programme
"REAR" function (depending on version)
– "Fast": provides strong and effective air flow. For more information on button 8, refer to the
To change the current setting (shown by the “Front Demisting/Defrosting” section.
Adjusting the temperature corresponding indicator lamp), press button 11
The driver and front passenger can each choose repeatedly until the desired setting is displayed. "Air Quality System" (AQS)
their own temperature setting. To ensure passenger comfort in the rear seats, function
The value indicated corresponds to a level of favour "Normal" and "Fast" settings. Using a pollution sensor, this function
comfort and not to a precise temperature. This setting is associated with automatic mode automatically activates recirculation of the
► Press one of the buttons 1 to increase (red) only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode, interior air once a certain level of polluting
or decrease (blue) the value. the indicator lamp for the most recently selected substances in the exterior air is detected.
It is recommended that you avoid a difference of setting remains on. When the air quality returns to a satisfactory
more than 3°C in the settings for left and right. Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO level, recirculation of interior air is automatically
mode if it was deactivated.
Automatic Comfort deactivated.
This function is not designed to detect
In cold weather with the engine cold, the
programme air flow is increased gradually until the unpleasant odours.
This automatic mode ensures optimum comfort setting has been reached, in order to Recirculation is automatically activated when the
management of the passenger compartment limit the delivery of cold air into the passenger windscreen wash is used or when reverse gear
temperature, air flow and air distribution, based compartment. is engaged.
on the selected comfort level. On entering the vehicle, if the interior The function does not operate if the exterior
► Press button 9 to activate or deactivate the temperature is much colder or warmer than temperature is below 5 °C, to avoid the risk of
air conditioning system’s automatic mode . the comfort setting requested, there is no misting of the windscreen and side windows.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up need to alter the value displayed to more To activate or deactivate the function, go to the
when the air conditioning system is operating quickly reach the required level of comfort. secondary page by using the "OPTIONS" button,
automatically. The system automatically corrects the then press button 12.
You can adjust the intensity of the temperature difference as quickly as possible.
automatic Comfort programme by using the Manual control
"OPTIONS" button to select one of the available It is possible to manually adjust one or more
settings: of these functions, while the system retains
– "Soft": provides soft and quiet operation by automatic control of the other functions:
limiting air flow. – air flow.

58
 Ease of use and comfort

– air distribution.
The indicator lamp in the "AUTO” button goes
Air conditioning on/off
The air conditioning system is designed to
Mono-zone/Dual-zone
The passenger temperature setting can be linked
3
out if a setting is changed.
operate effectively in all seasons, with the to the driver's setting (mono-zone function).
► Press button 9 again to reactivate the
windows closed. It is available in the secondary page which can
automatic Comfort programme.
It is used to: be accessed via the "OPTIONS" button.
– lower the temperature in summer, ► Press button 13 to activate the "MONO"
Adjusting the air flow
– increase the effectiveness of demisting in function; its status is displayed as "ON".
► Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) to increase
winter, above 3°C. The function is automatically deactivated if the
or decrease air flow.
► Press button 5 to activate/deactivate the air passenger uses their temperature adjustment
The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in according
conditioning system. buttons (dual-zone function).
to the request.
When the system is activated, the indicator lamp
When the air flow is reduced to a minimum,
in the button comes on. “REAR” function
ventilation stops.
"OFF" is displayed alongside the fan. Air conditioning does not operate when
the air flow is disabled.
Adjusting the air distribution To obtain cool air more quickly, enable interior
► Press the buttons 3 to adjust the air flow air recirculation for a brief period. Then return
distribution inside the passenger compartment. to the intake of exterior air.
Windscreen and side windows. Switching off the air conditioning may result in
some discomfort (humidity or misting).
Central and side air vents.

Footwells.
Maximum air conditioning
This function automatically adjusts the
The lighting of the button indicates that air is temperature setting to the lowest possible, the
being blown in the specified direction. air distribution towards the central and side air
For a uniform distribution of air in the passenger vents, the air flow to maximum and activates
compartment, the three buttons can be activated interior air recirculation.
When this function is activated, the rear air
simultaneously. ► Press button 6 to activate/deactivate the
vents blower starts up. In this case, the rear
In AUTO mode, the indicator lamps in all three function (the indicator lamp will come on/switch
passengers can control the air flow from these
buttons 3 are off. off).
air vents independently of the air conditioning air
Once the function is deactivated, the system
flow control for the front air vents.
returns to the previous settings.

59
 Ease of use and comfort

When the function is deactivated, the maximum The temperature is no longer regulated. A slight The programme automatically manages the air
air flow distributed by the rear air vents is limited flow of air can still be felt, due to the forward conditioning (depending on version), air flow
by the air conditioning air flow setting for the movement of the vehicle. and air intake, and provides optimum distribution
front air vents. towards the windscreen and side windows.
The function is available on the secondary
page, which can be accessed by pressing the
Interior air recirculation It is possible to manually change the air flow
without deactivating the automatic Visibility
“OPTIONS” button. The intake of exterior air prevents the formation programme.
► Press button 14 to activate the "REAR" of mist on the windscreen and side windows.
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
function; its status is displayed as "ON". Recirculating the interior air isolates the
been activated, STOP mode is not
► Press the “large fan” or “small fan” button to passenger compartment from outside odours
available.
increase or decrease the air flow. and fumes and allows the desired passenger
The corresponding indicator lamps come on. compartment temperature to be achieved more
If all of the indicator lamps are off, a slight air rapidly. In wintry conditions, before moving off,
flow can still be felt as a result of the vehicle's ► Press this button to activate/deactivate remove all snow or ice on the windscreen
movement. the function (confirmed by the near the camera.
illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp). Otherwise, the operation of the equipment
Ventilation with the ignition This function is activated automatically
using the camera may be affected.

on when reverse gear is engaged.

When the ignition is switched on, the ventilation
system and the air flow 2 and air distribution
Heated windscreen
3 settings in the passenger compartment are Front demisting
activated, for a period which depends on the
battery charge.
- defrosting
This function does not include the air
conditioning system. Automatic Visibility
Switching the system off programme
This mode allows the windscreen and side
► Press button 7; all the indicator lamps of the
windows to be demisted or defrosted as quickly
system go out.
as possible.
This action deactivates all of the functions of the
► Press this button to activate/deactivate
air conditioning system.
the mode (confirmed by the illumination/
extinction of the indicator lamp).

60
 Ease of use and comfort

In cold weather, this system heats the bottom of

the windscreen, as well as the area alongside
Depending on version, it also demists/defrosts
the doors mirrors.
► Select the time of entry into the vehicle and
the desired days. Press OK.
3
the left-hand windscreen pillar. ► Press this button to activate/deactivate ► Press ON to activate this programming.
Without changing the settings for the air the function (confirmed by the The pre-conditioning sequence begins
conditioning system, it allows faster release illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp). approximately 45 minutes before the
of the windscreen wiper blades when they Demisting/defrosting switches off automatically programmed time when the vehicle is connected
are frozen to the windscreen and helps avoid to prevent an excessive consumption of (20 minutes when it is not connected) and is
the accumulation of snow resulting from the electrical current. maintained for 10 minutes after.
operation of the windscreen wipers.
Switch off demisting/defrosting when
Switching on/off you no longer need it; reducing
electrical consumption in turn decreases
energy consumption.

Temperature
pre-conditioning This indicator lamp comes on fixed when

(Rechargeable hybrid) a temperature pre-conditioning cycle is

programmed. It flashes when temperature pre-
This function allows you to programme the conditioning is in progress.
► With the engine running, press this button to temperature in the passenger compartment to
activate/deactivate the function (confirmed by an You can set multiple programmes.
reach a pre-defined, non-modifiable temperature
indicator lamp). Each one is saved in the system.
(approx. 21°C) before you enter the vehicle, on
The function is activated when the outside To optimise the driving range, we recommend
the days and at the times of your choice.
temperature drops below 0°C. It is deactivated starting a programme while the vehicle is
This function is available when the vehicle is
automatically when the engine is switched off. connected.
connected or not connected.
Programming can also be carried out
Rear screen Programming from a smartphone using the
demisting/defrosting (With PEUGEOT Connect Nav)
In the Climate > OPTIONS menu:
MYPEUGEOT APP application.
With PEUGEOT Connect Radio, programming
This demisting/defrosting only works with the Select Temperature conditioning. can only be carried out from a smartphone using
engine running. the application.
► Press + to add a programme.

61
 Ease of use and comfort

For more information on Remote functions,

refer to the corresponding section.
Front fittings Make sure you do not leave any item in
the passenger compartment which could
act like a magnifying glass under the effect of
The fan noise that occurs during
the sun's rays and cause a fire - risk of fire or
temperature pre-conditioning is perfectly
damage to interior surfaces!
normal.

Operating conditions Sun visor

► With the ignition on, raise the concealing
– The function is only activated when the
flap; depending on the version, the mirror is
ignition is switched off and the vehicle
illuminated automatically.
locked.
This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket
– When the vehicle is not connected, the
holder.
function is only activated if the battery charge
level is greater than 20%.
– When the vehicle is not connected and a
Glove box
1. Grab handle ► To open the glove box, lift the handle.
recurring programme is active (e.g. from Monday
2. Sun visor With the ignition on, the glove box is lit when
to Friday), if two temperature pre-conditioning
3. Card holder open.
sequences are run without the vehicle being
4. Storage compartment below the steering
used, the programme will be deactivated.
wheel
5. Illuminated glove box
6. Door pockets
7. USB socket / Front 12 V accessory socket
(120 W)
8. Storage compartment or Wireless
smartphone charger
9. Storage compartment
10. Cup holder
11. Front armrest with storage
12. USB sockets or Rear 12 V socket (120 W)
13. Storage compartment or Rear blower

62
 Ease of use and comfort

It houses the front passenger airbag deactivation

switch.
Power supply and recharging. When the USB socket is used, the
portable device charges automatically.
3
Likewise, plus exchange of multimedia While charging, a message is displayed if the
Never drive with the glove box open
data with the audio system. power drawn by the portable device exceeds
when a passenger is at the front. It may
Likewise, plus use of smartphone the current supplied by the vehicle.
cause injury during sharp deceleration!
applications with the touch screen. For more information about how to use this
equipment, refer to the sections describing
12 V accessory socket the audio and telematics systems.

FOCAL® Hi-Fi system

The USB socket allows the connection of a

portable device or a USB memory stick.
► Plug in a 12 V accessory (with a maximum It reads the audio files that are sent to your audio
rated power of 120 W) using a suitable adapter. system and played via the vehicle's speakers.
Observe the maximum power rating to These files can be managed using the steering-
avoid damaging the accessory. mounted controls or those on the touch screen.
Depending on version, the USB
socket located on the centre
The connection of an electrical device The vehicle is equipped with a high-fidelity
console also allows a smartphone to be
not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a acoustic system from the French brand FOCAL®.
connected by Android Auto® or CarPlay®,
USB charger, may adversely affect the 10 speakers incorporating exclusive FOCAL®
enabling certain smartphone applications to be
operation of vehicle electrical systems, technologies offer the pleasure of pure and
used on the touch screen.
causing faults such as poor radio reception or detailed sound inside the vehicle:
For best results, use a cable made or approved
interference with displays in the screens. – Polyglass technology central speaker/mid-
by the device manufacturer.
range satellite speakers: sound immersion and
These applications can be managed using the
spatialisation.
USB socket steering-mounted controls or the audio system
– Polyglass technology woofers/mid-ranges with
These symbols determine the type of use of a controls.
high excursion: balance, dynamics and precision
USB socket: of sound.

63
 Ease of use and comfort

– Aluminium TNF inverted dome tweeter: Charging is managed by the smartphone. Checking operation
optimal sound dispersion, detailed treble. With the Keyless Entry and Start system, the The state of the indicator lamp allows the
– 12 channel active amplification - 515 Watts charger’s operation may be briefly disrupted operation of the charger to be monitored.
Hybrid Class AB/Class D technology: breadth when a door is opened or the ignition is switched
and finesse in the high frequency signals, as well off. State of the Meaning
as real power in the bass. indicator lamp
– Subwoofer with high excursion Power Charging Off Engine switched off.
FlowerTM triple coil technology: deep and ► With the charging area clear, place a device No compatible devices
controlled reproduction of low frequencies. in its centre. detected.
Charging complete.
Wireless smartphone Fixed green Compatible portable
When the portable device is detected, the
charger charger’s indicator lamp lights up green. It device detected.
remains lit for the whole time that the battery is Charging.
being charged. Flashing orange Foreign object detected in
The system is not designed to charge the charging zone.
multiple devices simultaneously. Portable device not well
centred in the charging
zone.
Do not leave metal objects (e.g. coins,
keys, vehicle remote control) in the Fixed orange Malfunction of the
charging area while a device is being charged portable device's battery
This system allows wireless charging of a - Risk of overheating or interrupting the meter.
portable device such as a smartphone, using the charging! Device battery
magnetic induction principle, in accordance with temperature too high.
the Qi 1.1 standard. Charger malfunction.
The portable device to be charged must be
compatible with the Qi standard, either by design
or by using a compatible holder or shell. If the indicator lamp is fixed orange:
A mat can also be used provided that it is When using applications for a long time
– remove the device, then place it back in the
approved by the Manufacturer. in combination with wireless charging,
centre of the charging zone.
The charging area is identified by the Qi symbol. some smartphones may switch to thermal
or
The charger works with the engine running and safety and cause some functions to stop.
with the Stop & Start system in STOP mode.

64
 Ease of use and comfort

– remove the device and try again in a quarter

of an hour.
The small removable tray can be installed in
front of or behind the storage space.
When fitting it on the driver's side, only use
the mountings present on the carpet (a "click"
3
If the problem persists, have the system checked A ventilation nozzle circulates fresh air. indicates proper locking).
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The other mats are simply laid over the carpet.
Closing
Front armrest Removing/refitting
It includes a refrigerated storage space. ► To remove it on the driver's side, move the
seat backwards and unclip the fasteners.
Opening ► To refit it, position the mat and secure it by
pressing down.
► Check that the mat is secured correctly.

To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:

– Only use mats which are suited to the
fixings already present in the vehicle; these
fixings must be used.
► Fold back the two parts of the cover. – Never fit one mat on top of another.
The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT
Mats may interfere with access to the pedals and
► Press the lever beneath the cover. hinder the operation of the cruise control/
The cover opens in two parts. Fitting speed limiter.
The approved mats have two fasteners
Storage
located underneath the seat.

65
 Ease of use and comfort

Courtesy lamps – when the key is removed from the ignition

switch.
Interior ambient lighting
– when a door is opened. The dimmed passenger compartment lighting
– when the remote control locking button is improves visibility inside the vehicle when the
activated, in order to locate the vehicle. light is poor.
It switches off gradually: Activation/deactivation and adjustment of
– when the vehicle is locked. the light intensity are set via the Driving/
– when the ignition is switched on. Vehicle touch screen menu.
– 30 seconds after the last door is closed.

1. Front courtesy lamp

Permanently off. Rear fittings
2. Front reading lamps Permanent lighting.
12 V accessory socket
In "Permanent lighting" mode, the lighting time
varies according to the circumstances:
– With the ignition off, approximately 10 minutes.
– In energy saving mode, approximately 30
seconds.
– With the engine running, unlimited.

When the front courtesy lamp is in the

"Permanent lighting" position, the rear
courtesy lamp also comes on, unless it is in ► To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum
the "Permanently off" position. power: 120 W), lift the cover and plug in a
3. Rear courtesy lamp To switch off the rear courtesy lamp, put it in suitable adaptor.
4. Rear reading lamps the "Permanently off" position. The connection of an electrical device
not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a
Front and rear courtesy Reading lamps USB charger, may adversely affect the
lamps ► With the ignition on, operate the
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor radio reception or
In this position, the courtesy lamp comes corresponding switch. interference with displays in the screens.
on gradually:
Do not place anything against the
– when the vehicle is unlocked.
courtesy lamps.

66
 Ease of use and comfort

USB sockets The armrest incorporates two cup holders.

3
Ski flap

Device for storing and transporting long objects.

Opening
► With the rear armrest lowered, open the flap
by pulling its handle downwards.
Each USB socket is used only to power or ► To use the table, lower it fully until it locks in
recharge a portable device. the low position.
► To store it, raise the table to the high position,
Rear armrest passing the point of resistance.

On the passenger side, do not forget to

fold it before placing the backrest in the
"table" position.
For more information on the Front seats, and
in particular placing the backrest in the "table"
position, refer to the corresponding section.

Do not place hard or heavy objects on

the table.
They could become dangerous projectiles in
the event of emergency braking or impact.
► Load the objects from inside the boot.

"Aircraft" type tables Side blinds

67
 Ease of use and comfort

On the left-hand side, it may also contain the

temporary puncture repair kit.
► To open them, lift the cover by the notch.

Boot fittings

Fitted to the second row windows, they protect

the passenger compartment from the sun's rays.
► Pull the central tab to unroll the blind.
► Position the blind's clip on the hook.
1. Load space cover roller
Always guide the blind slowly, using the 2. 12 V accessory socket (max. 120 W)
tab, while raising or lowering it. 3. Boot lamp
4. Luggage retaining strap
5. Storage brackets of the load space cover
Storage boxes roller
6. Armrest with cup holder and storage
compartment
7. Open storage compartment
1. Load space cover shelf 8. Concertina panels
2. 12V accessory socket (max. 120W) 9. Stowing rings
3. Boot lamp
4. Rear seat folding controls The stowing rings are designed to secure
5. Hooks luggage using different types of retaining
6. Stowing rings nets.
7. Boot floor These retaining nets are available as an
Depending on version, the storage boxes are 8. Storage well/Tool box under the floor option or as an accessory.
fitted in the floor, at the foot of the side seats on 9. Open storage compartments For more information, contact a PEUGEOT
the second row.
dealer or a qualified workshop.

68
 Ease of use and comfort

For information on installing the High load

retaining net, refer to the corresponding
In the event of sudden deceleration,
objects placed on the load space cover
3
section. roller can turn into projectiles.

Load space cover shelf Installation

To remove the load space cover shelf:

► Unhook the two cords.
► Raise the movable section slightly, then
unclip it on each side.
► Unclip the fixed section on each side, then
take out the load space cover shelf.
The load space cover shelf can be stowed under
► Position the left-hand and right-hand ends of
the boot floor.
the roller in cut-outs A, with the moving flap at
In the event of sudden deceleration, the front.
objects placed on the load space cover ► Unwind the roller until it reaches the boot
It consists of two sections:
shelf can turn into projectiles. pillars.
– a fixed section with an open storage space.
► Insert the roller guides into the rails in pillars
– a movable section which rises when the boot
B.
is opened, with an open storage space. Load space cover roller

In the 5-seat configuration, it is installed behind

the second row seats, with the third row seats
stored folded away.
In the 7-seat configuration, it is stored behind the
third row seats.

69
 Ease of use and comfort

Removal ► Position the roller within the space located

above the armrest, one side after the other, tilting
it slightly.
► Slide the roller as far as possible, until it
reaches the notches at the back of the boot, with
the two hinges facing down.
► Unfold the 3rd row seats.
The folded concertina panels can be placed in
the horizontal or upright position.
To fold the 3rd row seats with the roller stored at
the back, it is necessary to raise the concertina
panels in order to give access to the seat
unlocking controls (red straps).
► Remove the roller guides from the rails in
pillars B.
High load retaining net
► Guide the roller as it reels in.
► Unlock the roller by pressing one of the
handles located at the ends of the roller bracket.

Storage behind the 3rd row seats This removable net allows the entire loading
volume up to the roof to be used:
– behind the front seats (1st row) when the rear
seats are folded down.
– behind the rear seats (2nd row) when the load
space cover is removed.

It protects the occupants in case of

sudden braking.

► Make sure that the 3rd row seats are folded.

► Fold the first two concertina panels.

70
 Ease of use and comfort

Behind the front seats

(Depending on version)
Behind the rear seats Behind the front seats
3

► Remove the load space cover.

► Fold down the rear seats.
► Remove the trim covers on each side,
► Fold down the rear seats. ► Insert the ends of the bar, one after the other,
located in the upper section in the roof.
► Remove the trim covers on each side, into the fixing points in the roof.
► Position the net's upper hooks in the roof.
located in the upper section in the roof. ► Remove the caps from the Top Tether fixings.
► Attach the straps of the net to the lower rings,
► Position the net's upper hooks in the roof. ► Attach the net’s straps to the lower anchorage
located on each side trim of the boot.
► Attach the net’s straps to the lower anchorage points, located in the housing of the Top Tether
► Pull on the straps to stretch the net.
points, located directly below the fixings of the fixings.
rear bench seat cushion. ► Pull on the straps to stretch the net.
► Pull on the straps to stretch the net.

Once fitted, the net does not prevent

tipping of the rear backrests.

71
 Ease of use and comfort

Behind the rear seats On certain versions, the adjustable boot

floor cannot be fitted in the low position.

To change the height:

► Lift and pull the floor towards you using its
central handle, then use the lateral stops to
move it.
► Push the floor all the way forwards to place it
in the desired position.

► Remove the load space cover roller.

► Insert the ends of the bar, one after the other,
into the fixing points in the roof.
► Attach the straps of the net to the lower rings, ► Lift the boot floor as far as possible or lift the
located on each side trim of the boot. articulated boot mat (depending on version) to
► Pull on the straps to stretch the net. access the storage well.
Depending on version, it includes:
2-position boot floor – A temporary puncture repair kit with the tool
To keep it in the inclined position:
kit.
► From the high position, lift the floor towards
– A spare wheel with the tool kit.
the load space cover.
– The traction battery charging cable
► Take it past the retractable stops, then rest
(Rechargeable hybrid).
This two-position floor allows the boot volume to the floor on these stops.
The load space cover can also be stored here
be optimised using the lateral stops located on
(depending on version).
the sides: Storage well
– High position (100 kg max.): to obtain a flat 12 V accessory socket
floor up to the front seats, when the rear seats
► To connect a 12 V accessory (maximum
are folded down.
power: 120 W), lift the cover and plug in a
– Low position (150 kg max.): maximum boot
suitable adaptor.
volume.
► Switch on the ignition.

72
 Ease of use and comfort

The connection of an electrical device

not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a
3
USB charger, may adversely affect the
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor radio reception or
interference with displays in the screens.

Boot lamp
It comes on automatically when the boot is
opened and goes off automatically when the
boot is closed.
The lighting time varies according to the
circumstances:
– When the ignition is off, approximately 10
minutes.
– In energy saving mode, approximately 30
seconds.
– With the engine running, unlimited.

73
 Lighting and visibility

Lighting control stalk These two functions are activated/

deactivated via the Adaptive lighting
menu of the touch screen.
Main lighting
Headlamp dipping
► Rotate the ring forwards/backwards to turn
them on/off.
When the lighting is switched off automatically
("AUTO" position) the foglamps and the dipped
beam headlamps remain on.

Switching on the foglamps is prohibited

in clear weather or in rain, both day and
Automatic illumination of lamps/daytime night. In these situations, the power of their
running lamps ► Pull the lighting control stalk to switch beams may dazzle other drivers. They must
Sidelamps only between dipped and main beam headlamps. only be used in fog or falling snow (rules may
In "AUTO" and sidelamps mode, pull the lighting vary depending on country).
Dipped or main beam headlamps control stalk to switch the main beam headlamps Do not forget to switch off the foglamps when
on directly ("headlamp flash"). they are no longer necessary.

"Highway function" Display Switching off of the lamps when the

With "Full LED" technology headlamps,
Illumination of the corresponding indicator ignition is switched off
the range of the dipped beam headlamps is
lamp on the instrument panel confirms that the When the ignition is switched off, all of the
automatically increased once the speed of the
selected lighting is on. lamps turn off immediately, except for dipped
vehicle is above 68 mph (110 km/h).
A fault with a lamp is signalled by the beam headlamps if automatic guide-me-home
permanent illumination of this warning lighting is activated.
"Foggy function" lamp, accompanied by the display of a message
With "Full LED" technology headlamps, and an audible signal. Switching on the lamps after
in order to limit the “whiteout” effect when
switching off the ignition
driving in fog, the brightness of the dipped Rear foglamps If the driver's door is opened, a temporary
beam headlamps is decreased automatically They only work if the dipped or main audible signal warns the driver that the lamps
when the rear foglamps are switched on. beam headlamps are on. are on.

74
 Lighting and visibility

They will go off automatically after a period

of time that depends on the level of charge in
Daytime running lamps/
Sidelamps
Three flashes
► Press briefly upwards or downwards, without
4
the battery (entering energy economy mode).
going beyond the point of resistance; the
These LED lamps at the front and rear of the
direction indicators will flash 3 times.
vehicle light up automatically when the engine
In some weather conditions (e.g. low The lighting of the rear LED direction indicators
starts.
temperature or humidity), misting on the is scrolling.
They perform the following functions:
internal surface of the glass of the headlamps
– Daytime running lamps (lighting control stalk
and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear
at position "AUTO" with adequate ambient light).
Parking lamps
after the lamps have been on for a few (Depending on version)
– Sidelamps (lighting control stalk at position
minutes. Vehicle side marking by lighting the sidelamps
"AUTO" with low ambient light or "Sidelamps
only" or "Dipped/main beam headlamps"). on the traffic side only.
Never look too closely at the light beam ► Within one minute after switching off the
of LED technology lamps - risk of serious ignition, operate the lighting control stalk
eye injury! Direction indicators upwards or downwards, depending on the side
of the traffic (e.g. when parking on the right, push
the lighting control stalk down to light up on the
left).
This is confirmed by an audible signal and the
lighting of the corresponding direction indicator
lamp on the instrument panel.
► To switch off the parking lamps, return the
lighting control stalk to the central position.

Travelling abroad
Vehicles equipped with manual ► Left or right: lower or raise the lighting control
headlamp beam height adjustment: stalk, beyond the point of resistance.
If planning to use your vehicle in a country If you keep the direction indicators on for
that drives on the other side of the road, the more than 20 seconds, the volume of the
dipped beam headlamps must be adjusted to audible signal will increase if the speed is
avoid dazzling oncoming drivers. Contact a above 50 mph (80 km/h).
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.

75
 Lighting and visibility

Headlamp beam height Automatic illumination of

adjustment lamps
0 (Initial setting)
With the lighting control stalk in the “AUTO”
Manual adjustment of LED Driver only or driver + front passenger
position and if a low level of exterior brightness
1 Driver only or driver + front passenger + row 3
technology headlamps 2 7 people
is detected by the rain/sunshine sensor, the
sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are
3 7 people + load in the boot
switched on automatically, without any action on
4 Not used
the part of the driver. They may also come on if
5 Driver only + load in the boot
rain is detected, at the same time as automatic
6 Not used
operation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient
Automatic adjustment of level or after the windscreen wipers are switched
the Full LED technology off, the lamps are switched off automatically.

To avoid dazzling other road users, the height headlamps Malfunction

of these headlamp beams must be adjusted This system automatically adjusts the height of In the event of a malfunction of the rain/
according to the load in the vehicle. the headlamp beams according to the load in the sunshine sensor, the vehicle’s lamps
vehicle. come on and this warning lamp is displayed on
In the event of a malfunction, this warning the instrument panel, accompanied by an
lamp comes on on the instrument panel, audible signal and/or the display of a message.
accompanied by the display of a message and Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
0 (Initial setting)
an audible signal. qualified workshop.
Driver only or driver + front passenger
The system places the headlamp beams in the
1 5 people Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor
lowest position.
2 Not used located at the top centre of the
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
3 5 people + load in the boot windscreen behind the interior rear view
qualified workshop.
4 Not used mirror; the associated functions would no
5 Driver only + load in the boot Do not touch the "Full LED" technology longer be controlled.
6 Not used headlamps - risk of electrocution!
In fog or snow, the rain/sunshine sensor
may detect sufficient light. For this

76
 Lighting and visibility

reason, the lighting will not come on

automatically.
You can activate/deactivate this function
and adjust the welcome lighting duration
– If the windscreen is dirty, misted-up or
masked (e.g. sticker) in front of the camera.
4
in the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. – If the vehicle is facing highly reflective signs
The inner surface of the windscreen may or safety barrier reflectors.
become misted up and affect the proper Door mirror spotlamps The system is not able to detect:
operation of the rain/sunshine sensor. These spotlamps facilitate access to the vehicle – Road users that do not have their own
In humid and cold weather, demist the by lighting the ground near the front doors. lighting, such as pedestrians.
windscreen regularly. When the front courtesy lamp switch is in – Vehicles with hidden lighting (e.g. travelling
this position, the spotlamps come on behind a safety barrier on the motorway).
automatically: – Vehicles at the top or bottom of a steep
Guide-me-home and – when the vehicle is unlocked.
– when a door is opened.
slope, on winding roads, on crossroads.

welcome lighting – when a request to locate the vehicle is Maintenance

received from the remote control. Clean the windscreen regularly,
Guide-me-home lighting Whatever the position of the front courtesy lamp particularly the area in front of the camera.
With the ring of the lighting control stalk in the switch, they also come on with the welcome The internal surface of the windscreen can
"AUTO" position and when the light is poor, the lighting and guide-me-home lighting functions. also become misted around the camera.
dipped beam headlamps come on automatically They go off automatically after 30 seconds. In humid and cold weather, demist the
when the ignition is switched off. windscreen regularly.
You can activate/deactivate this function Automatic lighting Do not allow snow to accumulate on the
bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could
and adjust the guide-me-home lighting
duration in the Driving/Vehicle touch screen systems - General obstruct the camera.
menu. recommendations
Welcome lighting The automatic lighting systems use a detection
camera, located at the top of the windscreen.
Automatic headlamp
When the vehicle is unlocked, if the ambient
light is low and the "Automatic illumination of Operating limits
dipping
headlamps" function is activated, this system The system may be disrupted or not work For more information, refer to the
automatically turns on certain exterior lamps correctly: General recommendations for
as well as certain lamps in the passenger – When visibility conditions are poor automatic lighting systems.
compartment. (e.g. snowfall, heavy rain).

77
 Lighting and visibility

With the ring of the lighting control stalk in the Activation/Deactivation ► Switch the headlamps manually between
"AUTO" position and the function activated on dipped and main beam to pause the function.
The settings are changed via the Driving/
the touch screen, this system automatically If the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" indicator
Vehicle touch screen menu.
switches between dipped and main beam lamps were on, the system changes to main
The state of the system is stored when the
headlamps, according to lighting and traffic beam.
ignition is switched off.
conditions, using a camera located at the top of If the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator lamps
the windscreen. Operation were on, the system changes to dipped beam.
► To reactivate the function, once again switch
If the ambient light level is very low and traffic
the headlamps manually between dipped and
conditions permit:
main beam.
– The main beam headlamps
come on automatically. These
indicator lamps light up on the instrument panel. Static cornering lighting
If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or the
traffic conditions do not allow the main beam
headlamps to be lit:
– The dipped beam headlamps
remain lit. These indicator lamps
light up on the instrument panel.
This system is a driving aid. The function is deactivated if the foglamps
The driver remains responsible for are switched on or if the system detects poor
the vehicle's lighting, its correct use in the visibility conditions (e.g. fog, heavy rain,
prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions, snowfall).
and for compliance with driving and vehicle When the foglamps are switched off or when the
visibility conditions become favourable again, the With the dipped or main beam headlamps on,
regulations.
function is automatically reactivated. this function allows headlamps to illuminate
This indicator lamp goes out when the the inside of a bend using light-emitting diodes
The system becomes operational when (LEDs).
function is deactivated.
the vehicle exceeds 16 mph (25 km/h). The speed of the vehicle must be less than 56
When the speed falls below 9 mph (15 km/h),
Pause mph (90 km/h).
the function is no longer operational. This function is only available with the "Full LED"
If the situation requires a change of headlamp
beam, the driver can take over at any time. technology headlamps.

78
 Lighting and visibility

Activation / Deactivation
It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch
conditions are met, an alert is triggered if there is
a risk of collision.
not available (in "Night Vision"mode), the
indicator lamp comes on in grey. 4
The permanent display disappears upon If all operating conditions are met, the
screen menu.
switching off the ignition or if the conditions are indicator lamp comes on in green: the
Switching on / off not met. display on the instrument panel (with "Night
Vision" mode selected) and the triggering of
This system operates from a certain angle of This system is a driving aid system that
alerts are available.
rotation of the steering wheel. cannot, under any circumstances,
If certain operating conditions (speed or
The system does not operate: replace the driver's assessment of night-time
temperature) are not met, the indicator
– below a certain angle of rotation of the visibility and traffic conditions.
lamp comes on in orange: only the display on the
steering wheel. In some cases, the differences in temperature
instrument panel is available (in "Night Vision"
– above 56 mph (90 km/h), are insufficient and the system may not detect
mode).
– when reverse gear is engaged. all dangers or, conversely, it may give false
Whilst the exterior light is too bright or the dipped
warnings (e.g. engines of lorries parked by
beam headlamps have not been switched on,
Night Vision the side of the road).
the alerts are not available.

Activation/Deactivation
This function is set via the Driving/
Vehicle touch screen menu.

Conditions for operation

– With the engine running and in Stop mode
of Stop & Start.
– Very low light conditions with dipped beam
This system identifies and signals the presence headlamps on and in good working order.
of pedestrians and animals in the driver's field – Temperature between -30°C and +28°C.
of vision, in low exterior light conditions, using – Speed below 99 mph (160 km/h).
an infrared camera located at the front of the – Detection of animals taller than 0.50 m.
vehicle.
Select the "Night vision" display mode if you Operation
want the infrared camera image to be displayed If the function is selected but the display
constantly on the instrument panel. When the on the instrument panel and the alerts are

79
 Lighting and visibility

– Camera masked by snow, mud or dust.

– Camera scratched after going through roller
Wiper control stalk
car washes repeatedly. Before operating the wipers in wintry
– Very high outside temperature. conditions, clear any snow, ice or frost
– At the top or bottom of a steep slope. from the windscreen and around the wiper
– On a very winding road. arms and blades.
– In a bend.
– After an impact which may have impaired the
The camera detection range is between 15 m Do not operate the wipers on a dry
camera settings or damaged it.
(for pedestrians) and 200 m, depending on windscreen. In extremely hot or cold
– After repainting of the grille outside of the
visibility conditions. weather, check that the wiper blades are not
PEUGEOT dealer network or a qualified
The image provided by the camera is displayed stuck to the windscreen before operating the
workshop.
in shades of grey in the instrument panel; warm wipers.
objects appear brighter than cold objects.
If pedestrians or animals are detected, they
Maintenance
After using an automatic car wash, you
appear in yellow frames. recommendations may temporarily notice abnormal noises
If the system detects a risk of The infrared camera has a wash nozzle and poorer wiping performance. You do not
collision with pedestrians or connected to the vehicle’s front screenwash need to replace the wiper blades.
animals, it triggers an alert: one of these symbols system.
appears on the instrument panel. The This nozzle operates every 5th use of the
corresponding silhouette is framed in red. screenwash. Windscreen wipers
If the "Night Vision" display mode has not been Regularly check that the camera is clean.
selected, the alert is triggered in the form of a In bad weather, or in wintry conditions, ensure
temporary window. that the camera is not covered with mud, ice or
In the event of an alert, the driver may act by snow.
making an avoiding manoeuvre or by braking.
Malfunction
Operating limits If the event of a malfunction, this warning
The following situations may interfere with lamp comes on in orange on the
the operation of the system or prevent it from instrument panel, accompanied by the display of
working: a message. ► To select the wiping speed: raise or lower the
– Poor visibility conditions (falling snow, heavy Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a stalk to the desired position.
rain, thick fog). qualified workshop.

80
 Lighting and visibility

Fast wiping (heavy rain) Windscreen wash

► Pull the wiper control stalk towards you and
Off
4
Normal wiping (moderate rain) Intermittent wiping
hold.
A final wiping cycle is performed when
Intermittent wiping (proportional to the Screenwash-wipe
screenwashing ends.
vehicle’s speed)
Switching off The windscreen wash jets are
incorporated into the tip of each wiper Reverse gear
Automatic wiping arm. When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
Screenwash fluid is sprayed along the length will come into operation automatically if the front
Refer to the corresponding section. of the wiper blade. This improves visibility and windscreen wipers are operating.
reduces screenwash fluid consumption. The settings are changed via the Driving/
Single wipe Vehicle touch screen menu.
► Pull the stalk briefly towards you. To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do
In the event of accumulation of snow or
not operate the screenwash if the
In position 1 or 2, the wiping frequency is hard frost or if a bicycle carrier is fitted to
screenwash reservoir is empty.
automatically reduced when the speed of a towing device, deactivate the automatic rear
Only operate the screenwash if there is no
the vehicle drops below 3 mph (5 km/h). wiper via the vehicle configuration menu.
risk of the fluid freezing on the windscreen
When the speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h)
and hindering visibility. During the winter
again, the wiping frequency returns to the
original frequency (fast or normal).
period, use "very cold climate" rated products. Rear screenwash
Never top up with water. ► Turn the ring all the way towards the
dashboard and hold.
If the ignition has been switched off with
the windscreen wipers active, you must Rear wiper The screenwash and the wiper operate for as
long as the ring remains turned.
operate the control stalk again to reactivate
A final wiping cycle is performed when
wiping when the ignition is switched on again
screenwashing ends.
(unless the ignition was off for less than
a minute).
Automatic windscreen
After switching off the ignition, a slight wipers
► Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with
movement of the windscreen wipers to In AUTO mode, the windscreen wipers operate
the marking.
store them under the bonnet may occur. automatically and adapt to the intensity of the
rainfall.

81
 Lighting and visibility

Detection is via a rain/brightness sensor, located This indicator lamp goes off in the Before removing a windscreen wiper blade
at the top centre of the windscreen behind the instrument panel, accompanied by a
rear view mirror. message.

Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor. If the ignition has been off for more than
When using an automatic car wash, one minute, the automatic wipers must
switch off the automatic wipers and the be reactivated by pushing the control stalk
ignition. downwards.
In winter, wait until the windscreen is
completely clear of ice before activating the
Malfunction
automatic wipers.
If a fault occurs with the automatic wipers, the
wipers operate in intermittent mode.
Switching on Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
Operating the wiper control stalk within one
qualified workshop.
minute after switching off the ignition will place
the wiper blades in a vertical position.
Special position of the ► Proceed with the desired operation or the
windscreen wipers replacement of the wiper blades.
This maintenance position is used while cleaning After refitting a windscreen wiper blade
or replacing the wiper blades. It can also be
► To return the wiper blades to their initial
useful, in wintry weather (ice, snow), to release
position after the operation, switch on the ignition
► Give a short downwards push to the control the wiper blades from the windscreen.
and operate the wiper control stalk.
stalk.
To maintain the effectiveness of the flat
A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has
wiper blades, it is advisable to:
been accepted.
– handle them with care.
This indicator lamp lights up on the
– clean them regularly using soapy water.
instrument panel, accompanied by a
– avoid using them to hold cardboard on the
message.
windscreen.
– replace them at the first signs of wear.
Switching off
► Give the control stalk another brief push
downwards or place the control stalk in another
position (Int, 1 or 2).

82
 Lighting and visibility

Changing a wiper blade ► Unclip the worn wiper blade closest to you
and remove it.
4
Removing/Refitting at the front ► Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the
arm.
► Repeat the procedure for the other wiper
blade.
► Starting with the wiper blade closest to you,
once again hold each arm by the rigid section,
then guide it carefully onto the windscreen.

Removing/refitting at the rear

► Hold the arm by the rigid section and raise it
as far as possible.
► Clean the rear screen using screenwash
fluid.
► Carry out these wiper blade replacement ► Unclip the worn wiper blade and remove it.
operations from the driver's side. ► Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the
► Starting with the wiper blade farthest from arm.
you, hold each arm by the rigid section and raise ► Once again hold the arm by the rigid section,
it as far as possible. then guide it carefully onto the rear screen.
Take care not to hold the arms at the jet
locations.
Do not touch the wiper blades - risk of
irreparable deformation.
Do not release them while moving them. Risk
of damaging the windscreen!

► Clean the windscreen using screenwash

fluid.

Do not apply "Rain X" type water-

repellent products.

83
 Safety

General safety PEUGEOT dealers or qualified workshops,

equipped with the special tools required (risk
Hazard warning lamps
recommendations of malfunctions of the vehicle's electronic
systems that could cause breakdowns or
Do not remove the labels attached in serious accidents). The Manufacturer cannot
different places on your vehicle. They be held responsible if this advice is not
include safety warnings as well as followed.
identification information for the vehicle. – Any modification or adaptation not intended
or authorised by PEUGEOT or carried out
For all work on your vehicle, use a without meeting the technical requirements
qualified workshop that has the technical defined by the Manufacturer will result in the
► Pressing this red button causes all the
information, skills and equipment required, all suspension of the commercial warranty.
direction indicators to flash.
of which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to
They can work with the ignition switched off.
provide. Installation of accessory radio
communication transmitters Automatic operation of
Depending on country regulations, Before installing a radio communication
certain safety equipment may be transmitter with an external aerial, you must
hazard warning lamps
mandatory: high visibility safety vests, without fail contact a PEUGEOT dealer for When braking in an emergency, depending on
warning triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs, the specification of transmitters which can the rate of deceleration, the hazard warning
spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial lamps come on automatically. They switch off
flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc. position, specific installation requirements), automatically when you next accelerate.
in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic They can be turned off by pressing the button
Compatibility Directive (2004/104/EC). again.
Installing electrical accessories:
– The fitting of electrical equipment or
accessories not approved by PEUGEOT may Declarations of conformity for radio
cause excessive current consumption and equipment
faults and failures with the electrical system The relevant certificates are available on the
of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer brand website:
for information on the range of approved http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/APddb/
accessories.
– As a safety measure, access to the
diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's
electronic systems, is reserved strictly for

84
 Safety

Horn Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a

qualified workshop.
► To make an emergency call manually, press
button 1 for more than 2 seconds.
5
The lit indicator lamp and a voice message

Emergency or assistance confirm that the call has been made to the
emergency services*.
call The eCall (SOS) system immediately locates
your vehicle and puts you in contact with the
appropriate emergency services**.
► Pressing again immediately cancels the
request.
The indicator lamp flashes while the vehicle
data is being sent, and then remains lit when
communication is established.
► Press the central part of the steering wheel.
In the event that a serious accident is
detected by the sensors built into the
Pedestrian horn eCall (SOS) vehicle, such as the airbag control unit, an

(Rechargeable hybrid) Your vehicle may be fitted with the eCall (SOS)
emergency call is made automatically.

This system alerts pedestrians that the vehicle system either as standard or as an option.
The eCall (SOS) system is a public
is approaching, when driving in Electric mode The eCall (SOS) system provides direct contact
service of general interest and is
(100% electric driving). to the emergency services and is fully built
free-of-charge.
The pedestrian horn operates once the vehicle into the vehicle. This contact is made either
is moving and at speeds of up to 19 mph automatically via the sensors built into the
(30 km/h), in forward or reverse gear. vehicle, or by pressing button 1. System operation
This function cannot be deactivated. According to the country of sale, the eCall (SOS) – Upon switching on the ignition, if the indicator
system corresponds to the systems PE112, lamp lights up red, then green, and then goes
Malfunction
ERAGLONASS, 999, etc. out: the system is operating correctly.
In the event of a malfunction, this warning The eCall (SOS) system is activated by default.
lamp lights up on the instrument panel.

* In accordance with the general conditions of use of the service, available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations.
** Depending on the geographic coverage provided by the "eCall (SOS)" and "ASSISTANCE" systems.
The list of countries covered and the telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.

85
 Safety

– If the indicator lamp is fixed red: system data relating to the vehicle: chassis number, Access to data
malfunction type (passenger vehicle or light commercial You have the right to access the data
– If the indicator lamp flashes red: replace the vehicle), fuel type or power source, most and, if necessary, submit a request to
emergency battery. recent three locations and direction of travel, rectify, erase or restrict the processing of
In the latter two cases, emergency and and a timestamped log file recording the any personal information not processed in
assistance call services may not work. automatic activation of the system. accordance with the provisions of Regulation
Contact a dealer or a qualified repairer as soon The recipients of the processed data are the 2016/679 (GDPR). Third parties to which data
as possible. emergency call handling centres designated has been communicated shall be notified of
by the relevant national authorities in the any rectification, erasure or restriction carried
The system fault does not prevent the
territory in which they are located, enabling out in accordance with the aforementioned
vehicle from being driven.
priority reception and handling of calls to the Directive, unless doing so would be
“112” emergency number. impossible or require a disproportionate effort.
Data processing You also have the right to lodge a complaint
All processing of personal information by with the relevant data protection authority.
Data storage
the "Peugeot Connect SOS" system (PE112)
Data contained in the system’s memory
complies with the framework for protection
of personal information established by
is not accessible from outside the system until
a call is made. The system is not traceable
ASSISTANCE
Regulation 2016/679 (GDPR) and Directive ► If the vehicle breaks down, press button 2
and is not continuously monitored in its
2002/58/EC of the European Parliament for more than 2 seconds to request assistance
normal operating mode.
and the Council, and in particular, seeks to (confirmed by a voice message*).
The data in the system's internal memory is
protect the vital interests of the data subject, ► Pressing again immediately cancels the
automatically and continuously erased. Only
in accordance with Article 6.1, paragraph d) of request.
the vehicle’s three most recent locations are
Regulation 2016/679.
stored. Privacy mode allows you to manage the
Personal information processing is strictly
When an emergency call is triggered, the data level of sharing (data and/or position)
limited to the management of the "Peugeot
log is stored for no more than 13 hours. between your vehicle and the PEUGEOT
Connect SOS" system used with the “112”
brand.
European single emergency call number.
It can be configured in the Settings menu on
The "Peugeot Connect SOS" system is able
the touch screen.
to collect and process only the following

* Depending on the geographic coverage of the "eCall (SOS)" and "ASSISTANCE" systems and the official national language chosen by the owner of the
vehicle.
The list of countries covered and the telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.

86
 Safety

By default, depending on equipment,

deactivate/reactivate geolocation by
Electronic stability control The fixed illumination of this warning lamp
signals that there is a fault with the ABS.
5
simultaneously pressing the 2 buttons, then (ESC) The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive
press the "Peugeot Connect Assistance" The electronic stability control programme carefully at a moderate speed.
button to confirm. includes the following systems: Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
– Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Electronic qualified workshop.
If you purchased your vehicle outside the brake force distribution (EBFD). This warning lamp, when lit together with
PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you – Emergency braking assistance (EBA). the STOP and ABS warning lamps,
to have a dealer check the configuration of – Anti-slip regulation (ASR). accompanied by a message and an audible
these services and, if desired, modify them to – Dynamic stability control (DSC). signal, indicates an EBFD malfunction.
suit your wishes. In a multilingual country, – Trailer stability assist (TSA). You must stop the vehicle.
configuration is possible in the official national Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off
language of your choice. Anti-lock braking system the ignition.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
(ABS)/Electronic brake force workshop.
For technical reasons, in particular to
improve the quality of telematic services
distribution (EBFD) When changing wheels (tyres and rims),
for customers, the Manufacturer reserves the These systems enhance the vehicle’s stability
ensure that these are approved for your
right to carry out updates to the vehicle's and handling during braking, and enable greater
vehicle.
on-board telematic system at any time. control while cornering, particularly on poor or
slippery road surfaces.
After an impact
ABS prevents wheel locking in the event of
If you benefit from the Peugeot Connect Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer
emergency braking.
Packs offer with the SOS and Assistance or a qualified workshop.
Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)
Pack included, there are additional services
manages overall braking pressure on each
available to you in your personal space, via
the website for your country.
individual wheel. Emergency braking
► When braking in an emergency, depress
For information about the SOS and
the pedal very firmly and maintain this
assistance (EBA)
Assistance Pack, please refer to the general This system reduces the emergency stopping
pressure.
conditions for these services. distance, by optimising the braking pressure.
Normal operation of the ABS may make It is triggered in relation to the speed at which
itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake the brake pedal is depressed. The effect of this
pedal. is a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and
an increase in braking efficiency.

87
 Safety

Intelligent traction control These systems are activated in the event ASR/DSC
of a problem with grip or trajectory These systems enhance safety during
(Depending on version)
(confirmed by this warning lamp flashing on the normal driving, but should not encourage
The intelligent traction control system helps
instrument panel). the driver to take extra risks or drive at high
improve grip when driving on snow.
speed.
This system detects situations of poor surface
Deactivation/Reactivation It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, snow,
grip that could make it difficult to move off
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle ice) that the risk of loss of grip increases. It
or make progress on deep fresh snow or
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft is therefore important for your safety to keep
compacted snow.
ground, etc.), it may be advisable to deactivate these systems activated in all conditions, and
In these situations, the system limits the amount
the ASR system, so that the wheels can turn particularly in difficult conditions.
of wheel spin to provide the best traction and
freely and regain grip. Correct operation of these systems depends
trajectory control for the vehicle.
Reactivate the system as soon as the level of on compliance with the manufacturer's
The use of winter tyres is strongly grip permits. recommendations relating to the wheels
recommended on slippery surfaces. This function is set via the Driving/ (tyres and rims), braking and electronic
Vehicle touch screen menu. components, as well as the assembly and
Deactivation is confirmed by the lighting repair procedures provided by PEUGEOT
Anti-slip regulation (ASR) of this indicator lamp on the instrument dealers.
/ Dynamic stability control panel and the display of a message. In order to ensure that these systems remain
(DSC) The ASR system is reactivated automatically effective in wintry conditions, the use of snow
every time the ignition is switched off, or at or all-season tyres is recommended. All four
Anti-slip regulation (or traction control) optimises
speeds over 31 mph (50 km/h). wheels must be fitted with tyres approved for
traction by using engine braking and by applying
Reactivation is manual below 31 mph (50 km/h). your vehicle.
the brakes on the driving wheels to avoid one
All tyre specifications are listed on the
or more wheels spinning. It also enhances the Malfunction tyre/paint label. For more information
vehicle's directional stability.
In the event of a malfunction, this warning on Identification markings, refer to the
If there is a difference between the vehicle’s
lamp comes on on the instrument panel, corresponding section.
trajectory and the path desired by the driver, the
accompanied by the display of a message and
dynamic stability control system automatically
an audible signal.
uses engine braking and the brakes on one or
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
Trailer stability assist (TSA)
more wheels to return the vehicle to the desired When towing, this system reduces the risk of the
qualified workshop.
path, within the limits of the laws of physics. vehicle or trailer snaking.
These systems are activated automatically every
time the vehicle is started.

88
 Safety

Operation
The system is activated automatically when the
current legislation in force in your country. It
must not encourage the driver to take extra
pipe, fuel cooler) by obstacles or stones in
particular.
5
ignition is switched on. risks, such as using a trailer in unsuitable – Driving on terrain with steep gradients and
The electronic stability control system (ESC) conditions of operation (e.g. excessive load, poor grip.
must not have any faults. exceeded nose weight, worn or under-inflated – Crossing a waterway.
The vehicle speed must be between 37 and 99 tyres, faulty braking system) or driving at
excessive speed.
mph (60 and 160 km/h).
In certain cases, the system may not detect
Operating modes
If the system detects that the trailer is
snaking, it applies the brakes to stabilise trailer snaking, particularly with a light trailer. Snow
the trailer and reduces engine power, if When driving on slippery or poor surfaces, the This mode constantly adapts the level of wheel
necessary, to slow the vehicle (indicated by the system may not be able to prevent sudden spin to offer maximum traction according to the
flashing of this warning lamp on the instrument trailer snaking. snow conditions (a lot of wheel spin in thick
panel and the brake lamps coming on). snow; very little on ice). The wheel spin is also
For information on weights and towed loads, adapted to the conditions encountered when
refer to the Engine technical data and towed Advanced Grip Control driving uphill by optimising the acceleration of
loads section or your vehicle’s registration the vehicle.
This special patented traction control system
certificate. (mode active up to 50 mph (80 km/h))
improves grip on snow, mud and sand.
To ensure safe driving with a Towing device,
Mud
refer to the corresponding section. For optimum grip on snow, it is
recommended that you fit the vehicle This mode, when moving off, allows considerable
Malfunction with winter tyres. spin on the wheel with the least grip to optimise
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp lights For optimum system performance, contact a clearing of the mud and to regain grip. At the
up on the instrument panel, accompanied PEUGEOT dealer to choose the most suitable same time, the wheel with the most grip is
by a message and an audible signal. tyres. controlled in such a way as to transmit as much
To continue towing a trailer, reduce speed and traction torque as possible.
drive carefully! When moving, the system optimises wheel spin
Recommendations
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a to respond to the driver's requirements as fully
The vehicle is designed principally
qualified workshop. as possible.
to drive on tarmac roads, but it may
(mode active up to 31 mph (50 km/h))
occassionally drive on other less passable
The trailer stability control system
terrain. Sand
provides an extra safety feature under
However, it does not permit off-road driving: This mode allows little spin on the two driving
normal driving conditions, when following the
– Driving on terrain that can damage the wheels at the same time to allow the vehicle to
recommendations for use of trailers and
underbody or tear off elements (e.g. fuel

89
 Safety

move forward and limit the risks of getting stuck Snow ► Select “Snow”, “Mud” or “Sand” depending
in the sand. on the context.
(mode active up to 75 mph (120 km/h)) Mud The chosen mode continues to be displayed in
the instrument panel.
Do not use the other modes on sand as
Sand ► To deactivate, select “Normal” mode or any
the vehicle may become stuck.
other driving mode.
ESC OFF The system is automatically deactivated when
With manual gearbox Deactivation of the ASR and DSC the ignition is switched off.
systems.

The ASR and DSC systems will no Hill Assist Descent

longer act on the operation of the engine
or of the brakes in the event of a change of
Control
trajectory. Hill Assist Descent Control system for medium to
These systems are reactivated automatically steep slopes, on tarmac or other road surfaces
from 31 mph (50 km/h) or whenever the (e.g. gravel, mud).
ignition is switched back on. This system reduces the risk of slip or loss of
control of the vehicle when descending, whether
going forward or in reverse.
With automatic gearbox During a descent, the system assists the driver
in maintaining a constant speed, depending on
► Turn the selector to choose the mode the gear engaged, while progressively releasing
corresponding to the driving conditions the brakes.
encountered. For the system to activate, the gradient
An indicator lamp associated with each mode must be greater than 5%.
comes on, accompanied by the display of a The system can be used with the gearbox in
message to confirm your choice. neutral.
Standard (ESC) Otherwise, engage a gear corresponding to
the speed to prevent the engine stalling.
Whenever the ignition is switched off, the With an automatic gearbox, the system can
system automatically resets to this mode. ► Press the DRIVE MODE button; the various be used with the selector at N, D or R.
modes are displayed on the instrument panel.

90
 Safety

When the system is regulating, the Active

Safety Brake system is automatically
► When the vehicle begins its descent, the
driver can release the accelerator and brake
At speeds above 43 mph (70 km/h), the system
is automatically deactivated; the indicator lamp in 5
deactivated. pedals; the system regulates the speed: the button goes off.
– If the gearbox is in first or second gear,
The system is no longer available if the the speed decreases and the Malfunction
speed of the vehicle is: indicator lamp flashes rapidly. In the event of a malfunction, this warning
– above 43 mph (70 km/h). – If the gearbox is in neutral or if the clutch lamp comes on in green on the
– managed by the Adaptive cruise control, pedal is depressed, the speed decreases and instrument panel, accompanied by the display of
depending on the type of gearbox. the indicator lamp flashes slowly; in this case, a message.
the maintained descent speed is lower. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
On a descent, with the vehicle stationary, if the qualified workshop.
Switching on driver releases the accelerator and brake pedals,
By default, the system is not selected.
The state of the function is not saved when the
the system will release the brakes to set the
vehicle gradually in motion.
Seat belts
ignition is switched off. The brake lamps light up automatically when the Inertia reel
system is regulating. The seat belts are equipped with an inertia
If the speed exceeds 19 mph (30 km/h), reel which allows the strap length to adjust
regulation is paused automatically, the automatically to the shape of the user. The seat
indicator lamp goes back to grey in the belt returns to its storage automatically when it
instrument panel, but the green indicator lamp in is not used.
the button remains on. The inertia reels are fitted with a device which
Regulation resumes automatically when the automatically locks the strap in the event of a
speed falls below 19 mph (30 km/h) again, if the collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls
slope and pedal release conditions are met. over. It can be released by pulling the strap firmly
► To select the system, at speeds below You can depress the accelerator or brake pedal and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly.
31 mph (50 km/h), press this button until again at any time. Pyrotechnic pretensioning
its green indicator lamp lights up; this lamp This system improves safety in the event of a
appears in grey on the instrument panel. Switching off frontal or side impact.
► The system becomes active at speeds Depending on the severity of the impact, the
► Press the button until its indicator lamp goes
below 19 mph (30 km/h); this lamp lights pyrotechnic pretensioning system instantly
off; the indicator lamp on the instrument panel
up in green on the instrument panel. tightens the seat belts against the body of the
goes off.
occupants.

91
 Safety

The pyrotechnic pretensioning seat belts are Unfastening

enabled when the ignition is on. ► Press the red button on the buckle.
Force limiting system ► Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in.
This system reduces the pressure of the seat
belt on the chest of the occupant, thus improving Height adjustment
their protection.

In the event of an impact

Depending on the nature and
seriousness of the impacts, the pyrotechnic
device may trigger before and independently
of airbag deployment. Deployment of the
pretensioners is accompanied by a slight Each of the rear seats has a three-point seat belt
discharge of harmless smoke and a noise, with inertia reel.
due to the activation of the pyrotechnic The outer seats are fitted with a pyrotechnic
cartridge incorporated in the system. pretensioning and force limiting system.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes For the centre seat, the buckle is held
on. horizontally by an elastic strap if the centre seat
► To adjust the height of the anchorage point, belt is not being used.
Following an impact, have the seat belt
squeeze control A and slide it to the notch
system checked, and if necessary replaced,
by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
desired. Rear second row seat belts
workshop.
Rear seat belts
Front seat belts Each of the rear second row seats is fitted with a
The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic three-point selt belt with an inertia reel.
pretensioning system and a force limiting The outer seats are fitted with a pyrotechnic
system. pretensioning and force limiting system.
Fastening
► Pull the strap, then insert the tongue into the
buckle.
► Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly
by pulling on the strap.

92
 Safety

Installation Rear third row seat belts 5

Installation
► Pull the strap, then insert the tongue into the
buckle.
► Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly
by pulling on the strap.

Before performing any operations on the Removal and storage

rear seats, to avoid damage to the seat
► Pull the strap and insert the tongue A into the
belts, check that:
left buckle (located on the passenger’s right side
– the outer seat belts are properly tensioned.
when seated in the vehicle).
– the central seat belt is completely reeled in.
► Insert the tongue B into the right buckle
(located on the passenger’s left side when
Rear second row central seated in the vehicle).
► Check that each buckle is fastened correctly
seat belt by pulling the strap.

Removal and storage

► Press the red button on buckle B, then the
The seat belt for the rear central seat is built into black button on buckle A. ► Press the red button on the buckle.
the roof. ► Guide the strap as it reels in and offer up ► Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in.
tongue B, then A to the magnet at the anchoring ► Flatten the seat belt strap against the boot
point on the roof. side trim using the magnetic retaining system.

Ensure that seat belts are always fixed

when not in use.

93
 Safety

Seat belt not fastened/ At a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h), Do not invert the seat belt buckles, as they
these warning lamps flash, accompanied by an will not fulfil their role properly.
unfastened alerts increasing audible signal for approximately two To ensure the proper functioning of the belt
minutes. After two minutes, these warning lamps buckles, make sure that there are no foreign
remain on as long as the front seatbelts are not bodies present (e.g. a coin) before fastening.
fastened. Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt
Not fastened at the rear is reeled in correctly.
After folding or moving a seat or rear bench
When the ignition is switched on and with the
seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned
engine running or the vehicle moving at a speed
and reeled in correctly.
below 12 mph (20 km/h), the warning lamp and
the corresponding indicator lamps light up for
1 minute, if one or more rear seat belts are not Installation
fastened. The lower part of the strap must be
positioned as low as possible over the pelvis.
Unfastened The upper part must be positioned in the
After the ignition is switched on, the warning hollow of the shoulder.
Not fastened/unfastened warning lamp
lamp and the corresponding indicator lamps light At the front, adjusting the position of the
It comes on in red on both the instrument panel
up if the driver and/or one or more passengers seat belt may require the seat height to be
and the front passenger airbag and seat belts
unfasten their seat belts. adjusted.
warning lamps display, once the system detects
At a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h), these In order to be effective, a seat belt must:
that a seat belt is not fastened or has been
warning lamps flash, accompanied by an audible – be tightened as close to the body as
unfastened.
signal for approximately two minutes. After this possible.
Seat belts not fastened/unfastened
time, these warning lamps remain on as long as – be pulled in front of you with a smooth
identification indicator lamp
the seatbelts are not refastened. movement, checking that it is not twisted.
The red indicator lamps on the display indicate
– must only be used to secure one person.
the location of the seat belts which are not Advice – not show signs of tearing or fraying.
fastened or have been unfastened.
– not be changed or modified, in order to
Not fastened at the front The driver must ensure that passengers
avoid affecting its performance.
use the seat belts correctly and that they
When the ignition is switched on, the warning
are all fastened before setting off.
lamp and the corresponding indicator lamps light
Wherever seated in the vehicle, you must
up if the driver and/or the front passenger have
always fasten the seat belt, even for short
not fastened their seat belts.
journeys.

94
 Safety

Recommendations for children

Use a suitable child seat if the passenger
airbags supplement the action of the seat belts
equipped with a force limiting system.
Impact detection zones
5
is less than 12 years old or shorter than 1.5 Electronic detectors record and analyse the
metres. front and side impacts sustained in the impact
Never use the same seat belt to secure more detection zones:
than one child. – In the event of violent impact, the airbags
Never carry a child on your lap. deploy instantly and help better protect the
For more information on Child seats, refer to occupants of the vehicle; immediately after the
the corresponding section. impact, the airbags deflate rapidly in order not A. Front impact zone
to hinder the visibility or the possible exit of the B. Side impact zone
Maintenance occupants.
In accordance with current safety – In the event of a slight impact, a rear impact When one or more airbags are deployed,
regulations, for all work on your vehicle's and under certain rollover conditions, the airbags the detonation of the pyrotechnic charge
seat belts, contact a qualified workshop with may not deploy; only the seat belt helps to incorporated in the system makes a noise and
the skills and equipment needed, which a protect you in these situations. releases a small quantity of smoke.
PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. The seriousness of the impact depends on the This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
Have the seat belts checked regularly by a nature of the obstacle and the speed of the individuals may experience irritation.
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, vehicle at the moment of collision. The detonation noise associated with the
particularly if the straps show signs of deployment of one or more airbags may result
The airbags do not operate when the in a slight loss of hearing for a short time.
damage. ignition is switched off.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or This equipment will only deploy once. If a
a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEOT second impact occurs (during the same or a
dealers. subsequent accident), the airbag will not be
deployed again.

Airbags
General information
This system is designed to improve the safety
of the occupants of the front seats and the rear
outer seats in the event of a violent collision. The

95
 Safety

Front airbags steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, Curtain airbags
passenger's side, to cushion their forward
This system helps provide greater protection for
movement.
the driver and passengers (with the exception
of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a
Lateral airbags serious side impact, in order to limit the risk of
injury to the side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
the upper passenger compartment area.

Deployment
It deploys simultaneously with the corresponding
lateral airbag in the event of a serious side
System that protects the driver and front impact applied to all or part of the side impact
passenger in the event of a serious front impact, zone B.
limiting the risk of head and chest injury. The curtain airbag inflates between the front
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the and rear occupants of the vehicle and the
steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is corresponding windows.
This system protects the driver and front
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box. passenger in the event of a serious side impact, Malfunction
The front airbags are adaptive. In limiting the risk of injury to the chest, between
In the event of a malfunction, this warning
particular, they inflate less firmly in the the hip and the shoulder.
lamp lights up on the instrument panel.
presence of a smaller occupant, with the seat Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
set in a forward longitudinal position. frame, on the door side.
workshop to have the system checked.
Deployment The airbags may not be deployed in the event of
Deployment a serious impact.
The lateral airbags are deployed on one side in
They deploy, except the front passenger airbag the event of a serious side impact applied to all In the event of a minor impact or bump at
if it is deactivated*, in the event of a serious front or part of the side impact zone B. the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle
impact to all or part of the front impact zone A. The lateral airbag inflates between the chest of rolls over, the airbags may not be deployed.
The front airbag inflates between the thorax and the vehicle's occupant and the corresponding In the event of a rear or front collision, none of
head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the door panel. the lateral airbags are deployed.

* For more information on Deactivating the front passenger airbag, refer to the corresponding section.

96
 Safety

Advice Passengers must not place their feet on the

dashboard.
Curtain airbags
Do not fix or attach anything to the roof,
5
For the airbags to be fully effective, Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags as this could cause head injuries when the
observe the safety recommendations can cause burns or the risk of injury from a curtain airbag is deployed.
below. cigarette or pipe. Do not remove the grab handles installed on
Adopt a normal and upright sitting position. Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or the roof, as these help to secure the curtain
Fasten your seat belt and position it correctly. hit it violently. airbags.
Do not place anything between the occupants Do not fix or attach anything to the steering
and the airbags (e.g. child, animal, object), do wheel or dashboard, as this could cause
not fix or attach anything near or in the path of
the airbags, as this could cause injuries when
injuries when the airbags are deployed. Child seats
they are deployed. Lateral airbags The legislation on carrying children is
Never modify the original definition of the Use only approved seat covers specific to each country. Refer to the
vehicle, particularly in the area directly around compatible with the deployment of these legislation in force in your country.
the airbags. airbags. For information on the range of seat
Even if all of the precautions mentioned are For maximum safety, please observe the
covers suitable for your vehicle, contact a
observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to following recommendations:
PEUGEOT dealer.
the head, chest or arms cannot be ruled out – In accordance with European regulations, all
Do not fix or attach anything to the seat
when an airbag is deployed. The bag inflates children under the age of 12 or less than one
backrests (e.g. clothing) as this could cause
almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) and a half metres tall must travel in approved
injuries to the chest or arm when the airbag is
then deflates within the same time, child seats suited to their weight, on seats
deployed.
discharging the hot gas via openings provided fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
for this purpose. – Statistically, the safest seats in your
nearer to the door than necessary.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been vehicle for carrying children are the rear
The vehicle's front door panels include side
stolen, have the airbag systems checked. seats.
impact sensors.
All work must be carried out only by a – A child weighing less than 9 kg must travel
A damaged door or any unauthorised or
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop in the "rearward facing" position both in the
incorrectly executed work (modification or
front and in the rear.
repair) on the front doors or their interior trim
Front airbags could compromise the operation of these It is recommended that children travel
Do not drive holding the steering wheel sensors - risk of malfunction of the lateral on the rear seats of the vehicle:
by its spokes or resting your hands on the airbags! – "rearward facing" up to the age of 3,
centre part of the wheel. All work must be carried out only by a – "forward facing" over the age of 3.
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop

97
 Safety

Make sure that the seat belt is correctly Installing a booster seat
positioned and tightened. The chest part of the seat belt must be
For child seats with a support leg, ensure that positioned on the child's shoulder without
the support leg is in firm and steady contact touching the neck.
with the floor. Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt ► Move the vehicle's front seat forward and
passes correctly over the child's thighs. straighten the backrest so that the legs of the
An incorrectly installed child seat in a Use a booster seat with a backrest, equipped child in the forward-facing or rearward-facing
vehicle compromises the child's safety in with a belt guide at shoulder level. child seat itself do not touch the vehicle's front
the event of an accident. seat.
Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt Additional protections ► Check that the backrest of the forward-facing
buckle under the child seat, as this could To prevent accidental opening of the child seat is as close as possible to the backrest
destabilise it. doors and rear windows, use the "Child lock". of the vehicle's rear seat, and ideally in contact
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the Take care not to open the rear windows by with it.
child seat harness keeping the slack relative more than one third. In the presence of a dog guard, it
to the child's body to a minimum, even for To protect young children from the sun's rays, is essential that booster seat type
short journeys. fit side blinds on the rear windows. child seats with backrest be installed in the
When installing a child seat using the seat As a safety measure, do not leave: second row.
belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened – A child alone and unsupervised inside a
correctly on the child seat and that it secures vehicle.
the child seat firmly on the vehicle seat. If – A child or an animal in a vehicle which is
the passenger seat is adjustable, move it exposed to the sun, with the windows closed.
forwards if necessary. – The keys within reach of children inside the
Remove the head restraint before vehicle.
installing a child seat with a backrest on a
passenger seat.
Ensure that the head restraint is stored or
Child seat at the rear
attached securely to prevent it from being
thrown around the vehicle in the event of
Forward-facing or rearward-facing
sharp braking. Refit the head restraint once
the child seat has been removed.

98
 Safety

Centre rear seat "Rearward facing"

5
A child seat with a support leg must never be
installed on the centre rear passenger seat.

Child seat at the front

You must comply with the following instruction,
The front passenger airbag must be as reminded by the warning label on both sides
deactivated before installing a rearward of the passenger sun visor:
facing child seat. Otherwise, the child risks
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint
being seriously injured or killed if the
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in
airbag is deployed.
front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
► Adjust the front passenger seat to the
CHILD can occur.
highest and fully back longitudinal position,
with the backrest straightened.
Deactivating the front
"Forward facing"
passenger airbag

Warning label - Front passenger airbag

Passenger airbag OFF

To ensure the safety of the child, the front

You must leave the front passenger passenger airbag MUST be deactivated
airbag active. when a "rearward facing" child seat is
installed on the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously
injured or killed in the event of deployment of
the airbag.

99
 Safety

Vehicles not equipped with a Recommended child seats Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
deactivation/reactivation control
Range of child seats secured using a three-
Installing a "rearward facing" child seat on
point seat belt.
the front passenger seat is strictly prohibited
- risk of death or serious injury in the event of Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
airbag deployment!

Deactivating/Reactivating the front L6

"GRACO Booster"
passenger airbag
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
For vehicles on which it is fitted, the switch is
L1 Only suitable for installation on the front
located inside the glove box.
"RÖMER Baby-Safe" passenger seat or on the rear side seats.
Installed in the "rearward facing" position.

Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg

L5
With the ignition off: "RÖMER KIDFIX 2R"
► To deactivate the airbag, turn the key in the Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX
switch to the "OFF" position. mountings.
► To reactivate it, turn the key to the "ON" The child is restrained by the seat belt.
position. Only suitable for installation on the side rear
When the ignition is switched on: seats.
This warning lamp comes on and remains The head restraint on the vehicle seat must
lit to signal deactivation. be removed.
Or
This warning lamp comes on for about 1
minute to signal activation.

100
 Safety

Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt

In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing universally approved (a) child seats secured using the seat belt,
5
based on the child’s weight and the seat position in the vehicle.
Weight of the child/indicative age
Seat Front passenger Under 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg
airbag (groups 0 (b) and (group 1) (group 2) (group 3)
0+) From about 1 to 3 From about 3 to 6 From about 6 to
Up to about 1 years old years old 10 years old
year old
Row 1 (c) Passenger seat Deactivated: U U U U
with height adjustment "OFF"
(d)
Activated: "ON" X UF UF UF
without height
adjustment (e)

Row 2 (f) Rear seats (c) (g) U U U U

Rear side seats X X X X

Row 3 (f)

101
 Safety

U: Seat position suitable for the installation of (e) Backrest straightened.

a child seat secured using the seat belt and
(f) To install a "rearward facing" or "forward
universally approved for "rearward facing"
facing" child seat at the rear, move the front
and/or "forward facing" use.
seat forward, then straighten the backrest to
UF: Seat position suitable for the installation a allow enough room for the child seat and the
child seat secured using the seat belt and child's legs.
universally approved for "forward facing"
(g)
use.

X: Seat position not suitable for the installation

of a child seat for the specified weight group. A child seat with a support leg must never
(a) Universal child seat: child seat that can be be installed on the centre rear seat.
installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.

(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. "ISOFIX" mountings * Depending on version.

The mountings comprise three rings for each
The seats shown below are fitted with ISOFIX seat, indicated by a marking:
compliant mountings: – Two rings A, located between the vehicle seat
backrest and cushion.
Carrycots and "car" infant carriers cannot be
installed on the front passenger seat.

Carrycots and "car" infant carriers cannot be

installed on the front passenger seat or in
the 3rd row.

(c) Refer to the current legislation in your

country before installing your child on this
seat.

(d) Maximum height position

102
 Safety

* Depending on country of sale.

Rear seats
Front seat This system prevents the child seat from tipping
forwards in the event of a front impact.
This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast,
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in the
vehicle.
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER:
► Remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat on this seat (refit it once
the child seat has been removed).
► Pass the strap of the child seat behind the
seat backrest, centring it between the openings
for the head restraint rods.
► Secure the upper strap hook to ring B.
The 2 latches on ISOFIX child seats are ► Tighten the upper strap.
secured to them. When fitting an ISOFIX child seat
– One ring B, located behind the seat, called the to the left-hand rear seat of the
TOP TETHER, for attaching seats fitted with an bench seat, before fitting the seat, first move
upper strap. the centre rear seat belt towards the middle of

103
 Safety

the vehicle, so as to avoid the seat interfering

"RÖMER Baby-Safe and its ISOFIX base" "RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX"
with the operation of the seat belt.
(size category: E) (size category: B1)

An incorrectly installed child seat in a Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
vehicle compromises the child's safety in Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX Suitable for forward-facing installation only.
the event of an accident. base which is attached to rings A. Attached to rings A and ring B, referred to as
Strictly observe the fitting instructions The base has a support leg, height- TOP TETHER, using an upper strap.
provided in the user guide supplied with the adjustable, which rests on the vehicle's floor. Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining,
child seat. This child seat can also be secured with a lying down.
seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used This child seat can also be used in seat
For information about the options for and attached to the vehicle seat using the positions not equipped with ISOFIX
fitting ISOFIX child seats in your vehicle, three-point seat belt. mountings. In this case, it must be secured to
refer to the summary table. the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt.
Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the
"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX" child's feet do not touch the backrest.
Recommended ISOFIX child (size category: B1)
seats Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Also consult the user guide from the child
seat’s manufacturer to find out how to
install and remove the seat.

"RÖMER Baby-Safe and its ISOFIX base"

(size category: E)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg

104
 Safety

Locations for ISOFIX child seats

In accordance with European regulations, this table shows the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on vehicle seats fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
5
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, as determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child
seat next to the i-Size logo.
Weight of the child/indicative age
Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg
(group 0) Under 13 kg (group 1)
Up to about 6 (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old
months old (group 0+)
Up to about 1 year old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot "Rearward facing" "Rearward "Forward facing"
facing"
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 B2 B3
Seat Front
passenger
airbag
Row Passenger Deactivated: X IL IL IUF/IL
1 (a) seat "OFF"
with or
Activated: X X X IUF/IL
without
"ON"
height
adjustment
Row Outer rear IL (b) IL IL IUF/IL
2 seats
Centre rear Not ISOFIX
seat

105
 Safety

Weight of the child/indicative age

Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg
(group 0) Under 13 kg (group 1)
Up to about 6 (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old
months old (group 0+)
Up to about 1 year old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot "Rearward facing" "Rearward "Forward facing"
facing"
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 B2 B3
Seat Front
passenger
airbag
Row 1 Passenger Deactivated: Not ISOFIX
(a) seat "OFF"
with or
Activated:
without
"ON"
height
adjustment
Row 2 Rear seat X IL (b) IL IL IUF/IL
behind the
driver's seat
Rear seat IL (b) X IL IL IUF/IL
behind the
passenger
seat
Centre rear X IL IL IUF/IL
seat

106
 Safety

Weight of the child/indicative age 5

Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg
(group 0) Under 13 kg (group 1)
Up to about 6 (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old
months old (group 0+)
Up to about 1 year old
Type of ISOFIX child seat Carrycot "Rearward facing" "Rearward "Forward facing"
facing"
ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 B2 B3
Seat Front
passenger
airbag
Row 3 Outer rear Not ISOFIX
seats
IUF: Seat position suitable for the installation of an Isofix Universal seat, "Forward facing", secured using the upper strap.
IL: Seat position suitable for the installation of an Isofix Semi-Universal seat, either:
– "rearward facing" fitted with an upper strap or a support leg.
– "forward facing" fitted with a support leg.
– a carrycot fitted with an upper strap or a support leg.
For securing the upper strap using the ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section.
X: Seat position not suitable for the installation of an ISOFIX seat or carrycot for the specified weight group.
(a) Refer to the current legislation in your country before placing a child in this seat position.
(b) The installation of a carrycot on this seat may prevent the use of one or more of the other seats in this row.

107
 Safety

i-Size child seats

i-Size child seats have two latches that are anchored to the two rings A.
These i-Size child seats also have:
– either an upper strap that is attached to ring B.
– or a support leg that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat position.
Their role is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision.
For more information on the ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section.
In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing i-Size child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX
mountings approved for i-Size.

Seat Front passenger airbag i-Size restraint system i-Size restraint system
Row 1 (a) Passenger seat Deactivated: "OFF" i-U Not i-Size
with or without height adjustment
Activated: "ON" i-UF Not i-Size

Row 2 Rear side seats i-U i-U

Rear central seat Not i-Size i-U

108
 Safety

5
Seat Front passenger airbag i-Size restraint system i-Size restraint system
Row 3 Rear side seats - Not i-Size

i-U: Suitable for i-Size restraint systems in the Activation/Deactivation

"Universal" category, "forward facing" and
"rearward facing".

i-UF: Only suitable for i-Size restraint systems

in the "Universal" category which are
"forward facing".

X: Seat position not suitable for i-Size restraint

systems in the "Universal" category. ► To activate the child lock, turn the built-in key Electric child lock
(a) Refer to the current legislation in your in the red control as far as possible:
• To the right on the left-hand rear door. This control prevents the opening of the rear
country before installing a child at this seat
• To the left on the right-hand rear door. doors using their interior handles and the use of
position.
► To deactivate the child lock, turn the key in the rear electric windows.
the opposite direction.
Activation/Deactivation
Manual child lock Do not confuse the child lock control,
The system prevents a rear door from being which is red, with the back-up locking
opened using its interior handle. control, which is black.
The red control is located on the edge of each
rear door (marked by a label).

► With the ignition on, press this button to

activate/deactivate the child lock.

109
 Safety

When the indicator lamp is on, the child lock is

activated.

This system is independent and in no

circumstances does it take the place of
the central locking control.
Check the status of the child lock each time
you switch on the ignition.
Always keep the electronic key with you when
leaving the vehicle, even for a short time.
In the event of a serious impact, the electric
child lock is switched off automatically to
permit the exit of the rear passengers.

110
 Driving

Driving recommendations
► Observe the driving regulations and remain
Never park the vehicle and never
leave the engine running on a
On flooded roads
We strongly advise against driving on flooded
6
flammable surface (e.g. dry grass, dead
vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. roads, as this could cause serious damage to
leaves).The vehicle exhaust system is very
► Monitor your environment and keep your the internal combustion engine or electric motor,
hot, even several minutes after the engine
hands on the wheel to be able to react to the gearbox and the electrical systems of the
stops. Risk of fire!
anything that may happen any time. vehicle.
► Drive smoothly, anticipate the need for
Never drive on surfaces covered with
braking and maintain a longer safety distance,
vegetation (e.g. tall grass,
especially in bad weather.
accumulated dead leaves, crops, debris)
► Stop the vehicle before performing operations
such as a field, a country lane overgrown
that require sustained attention (e.g. settings).
with bushes or a grassy verge.
► During long trips, take a break every 2 hours.
This vegetation could come into contact with
Important! the vehicle's exhaust system or other systems
which are very hot. Risk of fire! If the vehicle absolutely must drive through a
flooded section of road:
Never leave the engine running in a
► Check that the depth of the water does not
closed space without sufficient Make sure you do not leave any item in
exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that
ventilation. Internal combustion engines emit the passenger compartment which could
might be generated by other users.
toxic exhaust gases such as carbon act like a magnifying glass under the effect of
► Deactivate the Stop & Start function.
monoxide. Danger of poisoning and death! the sun's rays and cause a fire. Risk of fire or
► For rechargeable hybrid engines, place the
damage to interior surfaces!
mode selector in 4WD position (depending on
In very severe wintry conditions version).
(temperature below -23°C), let the engine Never leave the vehicle unattended, ► Drive as slowly as possible without stalling. In
run for 4 minutes before moving off, to ensure with the engine running. If you have to all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h).
the correct operation and durability of the leave your vehicle with the engine running, ► Do not stop and do not switch off the engine.
mechanical components of your vehicle apply the parking brake and put the gearbox On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety
(engine and gearbox). into neutral or position N or P (depending on conditions allow, make several light brake
the type of gearbox). applications to dry the brake discs and pads.
Never drive with the parking brake If in doubt about the state of your vehicle,
applied. Risk of overheating and Never leave children inside the vehicle contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
damaging the braking system! unsupervised. workshop.

111
 Driving

Towing Tyres Brakes

► Check the tyre pressures of the towing Using the engine brake is recommended to limit
Driving with a trailer places greater
vehicle and of the trailer, observing the the overheating of the brakes. Braking distances
demands on the towing vehicle and
recommended pressures. are increased when towing a trailer.
particular care must be taken.
Lighting Side wind
Do not exceed the maximum towable ► Check the electrical signalling on the trailer Bear in mind that the vehicle will be more
weights. and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle. susceptible to wind when towing.
At altitude: reduce the maximum load by If a genuine PEUGEOT towing device is
10% per 1,000 metres of altitude; the lower used, the rear parking sensors will be Anti-theft protection
air density at high altitudes decreases engine deactivated automatically to avoid activating
performance. the audible signal. Electronic immobiliser
The keys contain a code, which must be
New vehicle: do not tow a trailer until the
vehicle has driven at least 620 miles
When driving recognised by the vehicle before starting is
possible.
(1,000 kilometres). Cooling
If the system malfunctions, indicated by the
Towing a trailer uphill causes the coolant display of a message, the engine will not start.
If the outside temperature is high, let the temperature to increase. The maximum towable Contact a PEUGEOT dealer.
engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the load depends on the gradient and the exterior
vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to cool. temperature. The fan’s cooling capacity does not
increase with engine speed. Starting/Switching off the
Before setting off ► Reduce speed and lower the engine speed to engine
limit the amount of heating produced.
Nose weight ► Pay constant attention to the coolant The electronic key must be present in the
► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the temperature. passenger compartment.
heaviest items are located as close as possible If this warning lamp and the STOP If the electronic key is not detected, a
to the axle, and the nose weight (at the point warning lamp come on, stop the message is displayed.
where it joins your vehicle) approaches the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as Move the electronic key so that the engine
maximum permitted, without exceeding it. possible. can be started or switched off.
If there is still a problem, refer to the "Key
not detected - Back-up starting or Back-up
switch-off" section.

112
 Driving

Starting while pressing the "START/STOP" button to

assist unlocking of the steering column.
When the vehicle starts in electric mode,
it makes no noise.
6
Pay particular attention to pedestrians and
Petrol engines
cyclists who may not hear the vehicle coming
With Petrol engines, after a cold start,
despite the pedestrian horn.
pre-heating the catalytic converter can cause
noticeable engine vibrations, for anything up
to 2 minutes (accelerated idle speed). Switching off
► Immobilise the vehicle using the parking
If the engine stalls, release the clutch brake.
pedal and fully depress it again, the ► With a manual gearbox, ideally put the gear
engine will restart automatically. lever into neutral.
► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever ► With an automatic gearbox, ideally select
mode P or N.
in neutral and fully depress the clutch pedal.
► With an automatic gearbox, select mode P
Starting rechargeable hybrid ► Press the "START/STOP" button.
or N and press the brake pedal. vehicles ► For rechargeable hybrid vehicles, before
► Press the "START/STOP" button while ► Fully depress the brake pedal and press leaving the vehicle, check that the READY
maintaining pressure on the pedal until the the START/STOP button for approximately 2 indicator lamp is switched off.
engine starts. seconds. In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn
Diesel engines ► Keep your foot on the pedal until this the steering wheel to lock the steering column.
In negative temperatures and/or when the indicator lamp comes on, indicating the On certain versions with an automatic gearbox
engine is cold, starting takes place only after the activation of the rechargeable hybrid system (EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not lock,
preheating warning lamp goes out. (confirmed by an audible signal). but the gearbox locks in mode P.
If this warning lamp comes on after
To exit Park mode, wait for the READY If the vehicle is not immobilised, the
pressing the "START/STOP" button:
indicator lamp to come on. engine will not stop.
► Keep the pedal fully depressed and do not
press the "START/STOP" button again until the By default, the system starts in Electric mode.
engine is running. With the engine off, the braking and
Depending on certain parameters (battery
In all circumstances, if one of the starting steering assistance systems are also cut
charge level or outside temperature), the system
conditions is not met, a message is displayed. off - risk of loss of control of the vehicle!
determines whether it is necessary to start the
In some circumstances, a message indicates petrol engine.
that it is necessary to turn the steering wheel Never leave your vehicle with the
It is possible to change the driving mode at any
electronic key still inside.
time using the mode selector.

113
 Driving

Switching on the ignition Back-up switch-off

without starting the engine

► Place and hold the remote control against the

reader. If the electronic key is not detected or is no
With the electronic key in the passenger ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever longer in the recognition zone, a message
compartment, pressing the "START/STOP" in neutral, then fully depress the clutch pedal. appears in the instrument panel when closing a
button, without depressing any of the pedals, ► With an automatic gearbox, select mode P, door or trying to switch off the engine.
allows the ignition to be switched on without then depress the brake pedal. ► To confirm the instruction to switch off the
starting the engine (the instrument panel and engine, press the "START/STOP" button for
accessories such as the audio system and the approximately 5 seconds.
lighting will come on). In the event of a fault with the electronic key,
► Press this button again to switch off the contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked. workshop.
► Press the "START/STOP" button.
Key not detected The engine starts. Emergency switch-off
In case of emergency only, the engine can be
Back-up starting
switched off without conditions (even when
A back-up reader is fitted to the steering column, driving).
to enable the engine to be started if the system ► Press the "START/STOP" button for about
fails to detect the key in the recognition zone, or 5 seconds.
if the battery in the electronic key is flat. In this case, the steering column locks as soon
as the vehicle stops.

114
 Driving

On certain versions with automatic gearbox

(EAT6/EAT8), the steering column does not lock.
The indicator lamp goes out to confirm the
release of the parking brake, accompanied by
brake indicator lamps on the instrument panel
and the control must be on fixed.
6
the display of the message "Parking brake If the parking brake is not applied, there is an

Electric parking brake released".

The indicator lamp flashes in response to a
audible signal and a message is displayed on
opening the driver's door.
In automatic mode, this system applies the manual request to apply or release the brake.
parking brake when the engine is switched off Never leave a child alone inside the
In the event of a battery failure, the
and releases it when the vehicle moves off. vehicle, as they could release the parking
electric parking brake will not operate.
As a safety measure, with a manual gearbox, brake.
if the parking brake is not applied, immobilise
the vehicle by engaging a gear. When the vehicle is parked: on a
As a safety measure, with an automatic steep slope, heavily loaded or during
gearbox, if the parking brake is not applied, towing
immobilise the vehicle by placing the supplied With a manual gearbox, turn the wheels
chocks against one of the wheels. toward the pavement and engage a gear.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified With an automatic gearbox, turn the wheels
At any time, with the engine running: workshop. toward the pavement and select mode P.
► To apply the parking brake, briefly pull the When towing, the vehicle is approved for
control. parking on slopes of up to 12%.
► To release it, briefly push the control while
pressing the brake pedal.
Manual operation
Automatic mode is activated by default.
This automatic operation can be deactivated in
Manual release
certain situations.
With the ignition on or engine running:
Indicator lamp ► Press the brake pedal.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that the ► While maintaining pressure on the brake
This indicator lamp comes on both on the
parking brake is applied: the parking pedal, briefly push the control.
instrument panel and on the control to
confirm that the parking brake has been applied, If the brake pedal is not depressed, the
accompanied by display of the message parking brake is not released and a
"Parking brake applied". message is displayed.

115
 Driving

Manual application Automatic application With an automatic gearbox, mode P is

With the vehicle stationary: With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake automatically selected when the ignition
► Briefly pull the control. is applied automatically when the engine is is switched off. The wheels are blocked.
The control indicator lamp flashes to confirm the switched off. For more information on Free-wheeling, refer
application request. to the corresponding section.
It is not applied automatically if the
Automatic operation engine stalls or enters STOP mode with
Stop & Start.
With an automatic gearbox, while mode
N is selected, opening the driver’s door
Automatic release triggers an audible signal. It stops when the
In automatic mode, the parking brake driver's door closes again.
First ensure that the engine is running and that
can be manually applied or released at
the driver's door is closed.
any time using the control.
The electric parking brake gradually releases
automatically as the vehicle moves off.
Deactivating automatic
With a manual gearbox Special cases operation
► Fully depress the clutch pedal and engage In some situations, for example when it is
first gear or reverse. Immobilising the vehicle with the extremely cold or when towing (e.g. caravan,
► Depress the accelerator pedal and release engine running breakdown), it may be necessary to deactivate
the clutch pedal. automatic operation of the system.
To immobilise the vehicle with the engine
With an automatic gearbox
running, briefly pull the control.
► Depress the brake pedal.
► Select mode D, M or R. Parking the vehicle with the brake
► Release the brake pedal and depress the
released
accelerator pedal.
In very cold conditions (ice), applying the
If the brake does not release
parking brake is not recommended.
automatically, check that the front doors
To immobilise the vehicle, engage a gear or
are fully closed.
place the chocks against one of the wheels.
► Start the engine.
When stationary with the engine running, ► Use the control to apply the parking brake, if
do not depress the accelerator pedal it is released.
unnecessarily. Risk of parking brake release. ► Take your foot fully off the brake pedal.
► Keep the control pushed in the release
direction for 10 to a maximum of 15 seconds.

116
 Driving

► Release the control.

► Depress and hold the brake pedal.
► In this case, ensure the vehicle's stability by
successive and repeated "pull-release" actions
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
starting of the engine, always select
6
► Pull the control in the application direction for on the electric parking brake control until the neutral and depress the clutch pedal.
2 seconds. vehicle comes to a complete stop.
This indicator lamp on the instrument
panel comes on to confirm deactivation of
6-speed manual gearbox Automatic gearbox
the automatic functions.
► Release the control and the brake pedal. (type 1)
From this point onwards, only the manual Engaging 5th or 6th gear
functions, using the control, allow the parking ► Move the gear selector fully to the right to With petrol / Diesel engines
brake to be applied and released. engage 5th or 6th gear. Automatic 6-speed or 8-speed gearbox with push
► Follow this procedure again to reactivate selector. It also offers a manual mode with gear
Failure to follow this instruction could
automatic operation (confirmed by the indicator changes via control paddles located behind the
cause permanent damage to the gearbox
lamp on the instrument panel going out). steering wheel.
(inadvertent engagement of 3rd or 4th gear).
Emergency braking With rechargeable hybrid
If depressing the brake pedal fails to provide Engaging reverse gear engines
effective braking or in exceptional circumstances
Automatic 8-speed gearbox with push selector
(e.g. driver unwell, assisted driving), the vehicle
and regenerative braking function.
can be braked by sustained pulling on the
With the exception of the manual mode and
electric parking brake control. Braking continues
regenerative braking function, its operation is
for as long as the control is kept pulled, and
identical to that of other EAT8 gearboxes.
ceases when the control is released.
The ABS and DSC systems stabilise the vehicle
during emergency braking.
If emergency braking malfunctions, the message ► Raise the trigger under the knob and move
"Parking brake fault" will be displayed on the the gear lever to the left, then forwards.
instrument panel.
Only engage reverse gear when the
If the ABS and DSC systems
vehicle is stationary with the engine at
malfunction, indicated by lighting
idle.
one or both warning lamps on the instrument
panel, the vehicle’s stability is no longer ensured.

117
 Driving

Push selector B. Driving in automatic mode with regenerative

braking function (Rechargeable hybrid)
Press this button to activate the regenerative
braking function.
The gearbox also manages braking when the
accelerator pedal is released.
► In mode N, with your foot on the brake pedal,
push without passing the point of resistance:
• Forwards, mode R is selected.
• Backwards, mode D is selected.
Release the selector fully after each push; it
► Pull the "+" or "-" paddle towards you and
will then return to its initial position.
release to shift up or down a gear, respectively.
P. Auto Park Special cases
Press this button to switch to Parking mode.
For parking the vehicle: the front wheels are To avoid mode N (quick change from D to R and Information displayed on
blocked. back again): the instrument panel
R. Reverse ► In mode R, push backwards past the point of
When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox
N. Neutral resistance, mode D is selected.
status is displayed on the instrument panel:
To free-wheel and move the vehicle, with the ► In mode D, push forwards past the point of
P Parking
ignition off. resistance, mode R is selected.
R Reverse
For more information on Free-wheeling, refer ► To return to mode N, push without passing
N Neutral
to the corresponding section. the point of resistance.
D1...6 / 8 Automatic forward gear
D. Driving in automatic mode
The gearbox manages gear changes
Steering-mounted controls B1...8 Automatic forward gear with
regenerative braking function
according to the style of driving, the road (Depending on equipment) activated
profile and the vehicle load. In mode M or D, the steering-mounted control M1...6 / 8 Manual forward gear
M. Driving in manual mode (Petrol / Diesel) paddles can be used to change gear manually.
They cannot be used to select neutral or to In all-electric driving, the gear engaged is not
Press this button to switch to manual mode.
engage or disengage reverse gear. indicated.
The driver changes gear using the steering-
The state of the gearbox remains displayed on
mounted controls.
the instrument panel for a few seconds after
switching off the ignition.

118
 Driving

Operation
Only appropriate mode change instructions are
Special aspects of automatic mode
The gearbox selects the gear that provides
The resulting deceleration of the vehicle
does not cause the brake lamps to come
6
optimal performance based on ambient on.
validated.
With the engine running, if it is necessary to temperature, road profile, vehicle loading and
► From mode D, press button B to activate/
depress the brake pedal to change modes, driving style.
deactivate the function.
an alert message will be displayed on the For maximum acceleration, press the accelerator
D on the instrument panel is replaced with B.
instrument panel. fully down (kick-down). The gearbox changes
The state of the function is not saved when the
down automatically or holds the selected gear
With the engine running and the brakes ignition is switched off.
until the maximum engine speed is reached.
released, if R, D or M is selected, the Steering mounted controls allow the driver to In some situations (e.g. battery full,
vehicle moves off, even without pressing the temporarily select a gear, if the vehicle speed extreme temperatures), the amount of
accelerator pedal. and engine speed conditions permit. regenerative braking may be temporarily
Never depress the accelerator and brake limited, resulting in less deceleration.
pedals at the same time - risk of damage to Special aspects of manual mode The driver must remain alert to traffic
the gearbox! The gearbox only changes from one gear to conditions and must always be ready to use
another if the vehicle speed and engine speed the brake pedal.
If you open the driver's door while mode conditions permit.
N is engaged, an audible signal will Regenerative braking using the brake
sound and mode P will be engaged. The Regenerative braking (Brake function) pedal
audible signal stops when the driver's door is The regenerative braking function emulates Energy recovery can also be produced
closed. engine braking, slowing the vehicle with no need by depressing the brake pedal in order to
to depress the brake pedal. When the driver partially recharge the traction battery, without
At speeds below 3 mph (5 km/h), releases the accelerator pedal, the vehicle slows affecting the charge level indicator.
opening the driver’s door will engage down more quickly.
mode P - risk of sudden braking! The energy recovered when the accelerator
pedal is released is used to partially recharge the Starting the vehicle
In the event of battery failure, it is traction battery. ► Fully depress the brake pedal.
essential to place the chock(s) supplied ► Start the engine.
This partial recharging has no effect on
with the tool kit against one of the wheels to ► With your foot on the brake pedal, push once
the charge level indicator.
immobilise the vehicle. or twice backwards to select automatic mode D,
or forwards to shift into reverse gear R.
► Release the brake pedal.

119
 Driving

► Accelerate gradually to automatically release

the electric parking brake.
Switching of the gearbox to back-up mode Automatic gearbox
The vehicle moves off immediately.
Mode D locks in third gear.
The paddles on the steering wheel do not work
(type 2)
Automatic gearbox and mode M is no longer accessible.
Never try to start the engine by pushing You may feel a significant jolt on engaging With petrol / Diesel engines
the vehicle. reverse gear. This will not damage the gearbox. Automatic 6-speed or 8-speed gearbox with push
selector. It also offers a manual mode with gear
Selector malfunction changes via control paddles located behind the
Switching the vehicle off Minor malfunction steering wheel.
Regardless of the current gearbox mode, mode
P is immediately engaged automatically when This warning lamp comes on, With rechargeable hybrid
accompanied by the display of a message
the ignition is switched off.
and an audible signal. engines
However, in mode N, mode P will be engaged
Drive carefully. Automatic 8-speed gearbox with push selector
after a delay of 5 seconds (time to enable free-
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified and regenerative braking function.
wheeling mode).
workshop. With the exception of the manual mode and
Check that mode P has been engaged and
In some cases, the selector indicator lamps may regenerative braking function, its operation is
that the electric parking brake was applied
no longer come on, but the gearbox state is still identical to that of other EAT8 gearboxes.
automatically; if not, apply it manually.
The corresponding indicator lamps on the displayed on the instrument panel.
gear selector and the electric parking Major malfunction
brake control must be on, as well as the This warning lamp comes on,
indicator lamps on the instrument panel. accompanied by the display of a
message.
Gearbox malfunction
You must stop the vehicle.
This warning lamp comes on,
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and
accompanied by an audible signal and
switch off the ignition.
the display of a message.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
workshop.
Do not drive faster than 62 mph (100 km/h),
keeping to the speed limit.

120
 Driving

Push selector D/B Driving in automatic mode (D) or driving

in automatic mode with regenerative
► Move the selector by pressing it forwards
(N or R) or rearwards (N or D) once or twice,
6
braking (B) (Rechargeable hybrid) passing the point of resistance if necessary.
The gearbox manages gear changes The push selector returns to its initial position
according to the style of driving, the road when released.
profile and the vehicle load. With the For example, to change from P to R, while
regenerative braking function activated, pressing Unlock, push forward twice without
the gearbox also controls braking when crossing the point of resistance or push once
the accelerator pedal is released. crossing the point of resistance:
M Driving in manual mode (Petrol / Diesel) – In the first case, the gearbox goes from P to N,
The driver changes gear using the then from N to R.
steering-mounted controls. – In the second case, the gearbox goes directly
Unlock To unlock the gearbox and come out from P to R.
of P or to change to R, with the foot on
the brake pedal. Steering-mounted controls
Press and hold this button before (Depending on equipment)
P Parking pushing the selector. In mode M or D, the steering-mounted control
To park the vehicle: the front wheels are paddles can be used to change gear manually.
blocked. They cannot be used to select neutral or to
R Reverse gear engage or disengage reverse gear.
N Neutral
To move the vehicle with the ignition off,
or to allow it to free-wheel.
For more information on Changing
to free-wheeling, refer to the
corresponding section.
D Driving in automatic mode (Petrol /
Diesel)
The gearbox manages gear changes
according to the style of driving, the road
profile and the vehicle load.

121
 Driving

► Pull the "+" or "-" paddle towards you and vehicle moves off, even without pressing the ► Press button M; the green indicator lamp in
release to shift up or down a gear, respectively. accelerator pedal. the button comes on.
Exiting the mode:
Information displayed on Never press the accelerator and brake ► Push forwards once to return to D.
the instrument panel pedals at the same time - risk of damage or
to the gearbox! ► Press button M; the indicator lamp in the
When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox
In the event of a battery failure, you must button goes off.
status is displayed on the instrument panel:
P Parking place the chocks supplied with the vehicle Switching off the ignition
R Reverse tools against one of the wheels to immobilise To switch off the ignition, the vehicle must be
N Neutral the vehicle. stationary.
D1...6 / 8 Automatic forward gear Free-wheeling
B1...8 Automatic forward gear with
Unlocking the gearbox
– From mode P: For more information on Free-wheeling, refer to
regenerative braking function
► Fully depress the brake pedal. the corresponding section.
activated
M1...6 / 8 Manual forward gear ► Press the Unlock button. If you open the driver's door while mode
► While continuing to press the brake pedal N is engaged, an audible signal will
In all-electric driving, the gear engaged is not
and the Unlock button, select another mode. sound. It will stop when you close the driver's
indicated.
– From neutral N, at a speed below 3 mph door again.
The state of the gearbox remains displayed on
(5 km/h):
the instrument panel for a few seconds after
► Fully depress the brake pedal.
switching off the ignition.
► While continuing to depress the brake Special aspects of automatic mode
The gearbox selects the gear that provides
Operation pedal, select another mode.
optimal performance based on ambient
Engaging reverse gear
With the engine running, if it is necessary to temperature, road profile, vehicle loading and
press the brake pedal and/or the Unlock button ► Slow down until you come to a stop. driving style.
in order to change mode, an alert message is ► Depress the brake pedal, then press the For maximum acceleration, press the accelerator
displayed in the instrument panel. Unlock button. fully down (kick-down). The gearbox changes
Only appropriate attempted changes of mode ► While continuing to press, select mode R. down automatically or holds the selected gear
are accepted. Manual mode until the maximum engine speed is reached.
With the engine running and the brakes Entering the mode: Steering mounted controls allow the driver to
released, if R, D or M is selected, the ► With mode D initially selected. temporarily select a gear, if the vehicle speed
and engine speed conditions permit.

122
 Driving

Special aspects of manual mode

The gearbox only changes from one gear to
regenerative braking may be temporarily
limited, resulting in less deceleration.
► Accelerate gradually to automatically release
the electric parking brake.
6
another if the vehicle speed and engine speed The driver must remain alert to traffic The vehicle moves off immediately.
conditions permit. conditions and must always be ready to use
Automatic gearbox
the brake pedal.
Never try to start the engine by pushing
Regenerative braking (Brake function)
the vehicle.
The regenerative braking function emulates Regenerative braking using the brake
engine braking, slowing the vehicle with no need pedal
to depress the brake pedal. When the driver Energy recovery can also be produced Switching the vehicle off
releases the accelerator pedal, the vehicle slows by depressing the brake pedal in order to Regardless of the current gearbox mode, mode
down more quickly. partially recharge the traction battery, without P is immediately engaged automatically when
The energy recovered when the accelerator affecting the charge level indicator. the ignition is switched off.
pedal is released is used to partially recharge the However, in mode N, mode P will be engaged
traction battery. after a delay of 5 seconds (time to enable free-
Starting the vehicle
wheeling mode).
This partial recharging has no effect on From mode P: Check that mode P has been engaged and
the charge level indicator. ► Fully depress the brake pedal. that the electric parking brake was applied
► Start the engine. automatically; if not, apply it manually.
The resulting deceleration of the vehicle ► Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, The corresponding indicator lamps on the
does not cause the brake lamps to come press the Unlock button. gear selector and the electric parking
on. ► Push once or twice rearwards to select brake control must be on, as well as the
the automatic mode D, or forwards to engage indicator lamps on the instrument panel.
► From mode D/B, move the push selector reverse R.
backwards to activate/deactivate the function.
D on the instrument panel is replaced with B.
From neutral N: Gearbox malfunction
► Fully depress the brake pedal.
The state of the function is not saved when the This warning lamp comes on,
► Start the engine.
ignition is switched off. accompanied by an audible signal and
► Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal,
the display of a message.
In some situations (e.g. battery full, push rearwards to select the automatic mode D,
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
extreme temperatures), the amount of or forwards, while pressing the Unlock button to
workshop.
engage reverse R.
Do not drive faster than 62 mph (100 km/h),
Then, from D or R:
keeping to the speed limit.
► Release the brake pedal.

123
 Driving

Switching of the gearbox to back-up mode Hill start assist Operation

Mode D locks in third gear.
This system keeps the vehicle briefly stationary
The paddles on the steering wheel do not work
(for approximately 2 seconds) when making a hill
and mode M is no longer accessible.
start, while you transfer your foot from the brake
You may feel a significant jolt on engaging
pedal to the accelerator pedal.
reverse gear. This will not damage the gearbox.
The system is only active when:
– The vehicle is completely stationary, with your
Selector malfunction foot on the brake pedal.
Minor malfunction – Certain slope conditions are met. Facing uphill, with the vehicle stationary,
This warning lamp comes on, – The driver’s door is closed. the vehicle is held for a short time when the
accompanied by the display of a message driver releases the brake pedal:
Do not leave the vehicle while it is being
and an audible signal. – If first gear or neutral is engaged on a manual
held temporarily by hill start assist.
Drive carefully. gearbox.
If someone needs to get out of the vehicle
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified – If mode D or M is selected on an automatic
with the engine running, apply the parking
workshop. gearbox.
brake manually. Then check that the parking
In some cases, the selector indicator lamps may brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp
no longer come on, but the gearbox state is still in the electric parking brake control are on
displayed on the instrument panel. fixed.
Major malfunction
This warning lamp comes on, The hill start assist function cannot be
accompanied by the display of a deactivated. However, using the parking
message. brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts its
operation. Facing downhill, with the vehicle stationary
You must stop the vehicle. and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and for a short time when the driver releases the
switch off the ignition. brake pedal.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop. Malfunction
If the event of a malfunction, these
warning lamps light up on the
instrument panel, accompanied by the display of
a message.

124
 Driving

Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a

qualified workshop.
With petrol/Diesel engines
Whenever the ignition is switched on,
With rechargeable hybrid
engines
6
Normal driving mode is selected by default.
Whenever the ignition is switched on, Electric
Driving modes Normal driving mode is selected by default.
The driving modes available depend on the To restore the default settings. Electric
engine and equipment of the vehicle. Eco Allows driving using 100% electrical energy.
Driving modes are selected using one of the
To reduce energy consumption by reducing the The maximum speed is approximately 84 mph
following controls, depending on version:
performance of the heating and air conditioning, (135 km/h).
without deactivating them. When starting the vehicle, if the conditions do
not allow the activation or retention of Electric
Sport
mode, the message "Electric mode currently
With a manual gearbox: to obtain more dynamic unavailable" is displayed on the instrument
driving with action on the power steering, panel. The vehicle automatically changes to
accelerator and the possibility of displaying the Hybrid mode.
vehicle’s dynamic settings on the instrument If an LED comes on under the interior rear view
panel. mirror, visible from outside the vehicle, this
With an automatic gearbox: to obtain more confirms that you are driving in Electric mode
dynamic driving with action on the power (depending on country of sale).
steering, accelerator, gear changes and
1. Pressing the control activates Eco mode. The possibility of displaying the vehicle’s dynamic The LED can be deactivated by inserting
indicator lamp comes on. settings on the instrument panel. the tip of a paper clip or other similar
2. Pressing the control activates Sport mode. object into the hole located underneath the
The indicator lamp comes on. Coasting mode interior rear view mirror.
3. Pressing the control displays the modes on Depending on version or engine, with an
the instrument panel. EAT8 gearbox and the gear selector in mode Conditions of activation
D, except in Sport mode, gradually and fully – Adequate battery charge level. Charging
When the message disappears, the selected releasing the accelerator pedal allows free- the vehicle after each drive is therefore
mode is activated and remains indicated on the wheeling which can save fuel. recommended. Electric mode is available as
instrument panel (except Normal mode). A drop in engine speed is normal (rev counter long as there is power left in the battery.
at idle, drop in engine noise). – Outside temperature between approximately
-5°C and 45°C.
Manually exiting the mode

125
 Driving

► Fully depress the accelerator pedal, or

► Select another mode.
sufficient and acceleration requirements are
moderate.
Gear shift indicator
(Depending on engine)
In case of non-use of the vehicle for a Sport
This system is designed to reduce fuel
long period (several months), a restart of To obtain more dynamic driving in order to consumption by recommending the most suitable
the petrol engine may occur even if the benefit from the maximum performance of the gear.
battery is charged. vehicle.
Electric power is used to supplement the petrol Operation
In the event of multiple starts of the engine as long as there is energy left in the Depending on the driving situation and
internal combustion engine without a battery. the vehicle's equipment, the system may
sufficient rise in 4WD (4-wheel drive) recommend skipping one or more gears.
temperature, Electric mode may be Gear engagement recommendations are
(Depending on version)
temporarily unavailable (natural phenomenon not to be considered mandatory. Indeed, the
Improves the vehicle's grip at low and moderate
of dilution of fuel in oil). The message configuration of the road, the traffic density and
speeds by driving all 4 wheels continuously.
"Electric mode unavailable: automatic safety remain determining factors when choosing
4WD mode (4-wheel drive) is especially
operation in progress" then appears on the the best gear. Therefore, the driver remains
suited to driving on snow-covered roads and
instrument panel. responsible for deciding whether or not to follow
difficult terrain (e.g. mud, sand) as well as ford
To regain normal electrical operation, drive the system’s advice.
crossings, at moderate speed.
approximately 50 miles (80 km) in "motorway" The system cannot be deactivated.
Depending on the driving conditions and the
conditions or approximately 125 miles (200
battery charge level, 4WD mode may be 100% With an automatic gearbox, the system is
km) in urban conditions.
electric. only active in manual operation.
This phenomenon does not cause any
If the system does not detect a situation of wheel
mechanical or electrical damage. It can occur The information appears on the
slipping or poor grip after 300 metres of driving, it
several times in the life of the vehicle. instrument panel, in the form of an arrow
switches to Hybrid mode.
and the recommended gear.
Hybrid This mode will be even more effective if
the vehicle is fitted with suitable tyres, The system adapts the gear change
To optimise the vehicle's fuel consumption by
such as winter tyres. instructions according to the driving
managing the alternating or simultaneous
conditions (e.g. slope, load) and driving style
operation of the two types of engine, The grip can be improved up to 84 mph (e.g. power demand, acceleration, braking).
depending on driving conditions and driving (135 km/h) using the electric motors; above this The system never suggests:
style. speed, the vehicle is driven by the front wheels – engaging first gear;
In Hybrid mode, it is possible to drive in 100% only. – engaging reverse gear.
electric mode if the battery charge level is

126
 Driving

Stop & Start

The Stop & Start function puts the engine
any risk of injury caused by the engine
restarting automatically.
– With a manual gearbox, at speeds below 2
mph (3 km/h) on 1.5 BlueHDi versions, or with 6
the vehicle stationary on 1.2 PureTech versions,
temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during when you place the gear lever in neutral and
phases when the vehicle is stationary (e.g. red release the clutch pedal.
lights, traffic jams). The engine automatically – With an automatic gearbox, at speeds below
restarts - START mode - as soon as the driver 12 mph (20 km/h) on BlueHDi versions, or with
indicates the intention of moving off again. Driving on flooded roads the vehicle stationary on other versions, when
Primarily designed for urban use, the function Before entering into a flooded area, it is you depress the brake pedal or place the gear
is intended to reduce fuel consumption and strongly recommended that you deactivate selector in mode N.
exhaust emissions as well as the noise level the Stop & Start system. Time counter
when stationary. For more information on Driving
The function does not affect the functionalities of recommendations, particularly on flooded A time counter adds up the time spent in standby
the vehicle, in particular the braking. roads, refer to the corresponding section. during the journey. It is reset to zero every time
the ignition is switched on.
Deactivation/Reactivation
Special cases
The function is activated by default when the Operation
ignition is switched on. The engine will not go into standby if the
Main conditions for operation
The settings are changed via the conditions for operation are not met and in the
– The driver’s door must be closed. following cases:
Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu.
– The driver's seat belt must be fastened. – Steep slope (ascending or descending).
A message on the instrument panel confirms the
– The level of charge in the battery must be – Vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h)
change of status.
sufficient. since the last engine start.
When the function is deactivated, if the engine
– The temperature of the engine must be within – Sport mode selected (depending on
was in standby, it restarts immediately.
its nominal operating range. equipment).
Associated indicator lamps – The outside temperature must be between – Electric parking brake applied or being
Function activated. 0°C and 35°C. applied.
– Needed to maintain a comfortable temperature
Function deactivated or malfunction. Putting the engine into standby
in the passenger compartment.
(STOP mode) – Demisting active.
The engine automatically enters standby mode In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes
Opening the bonnet
as soon as the driver indicates their intention to for a few seconds, then goes off.
Before doing anything under the bonnet,
stop:
deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid

127
 Driving

After the engine has restarted, STOP – Deselecting the Sport mode (depending on It compares the information given by the wheel
mode is not available until the vehicle equipment). speed sensors with reference values, which
has reached a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes must be reinitialised every time the tyre
for a few seconds, then goes off. pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed.
During parking manoeuvres, STOP mode It takes into account the last values stored
is not available for a few seconds after Malfunctions during the reinitialisation request. It is therefore
coming out of reverse gear or turning the In the event of a fault with the system, this essential that the tyre pressure is correct during
steering wheel. warning lamp flashes for a few moments the operation. This operation is the driver’s
on the instrument panel, then remains on, responsibility.
accompanied by the display of a message.
Restarting the engine (START mode) The tyre under-inflation detection cannot,
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
in any circumstances, replace the need
The engine automatically restarts as soon as the qualified workshop.
for vigilance on the part of the driver.
driver indicates the intention of moving off again:
The vehicle stalls in STOP mode This system does not avoid the need to
With a manual gearbox: with the clutch pedal
All of the instrument panel warning lamps come regularly check the tyre pressures (including
fully depressed.
on if there is a fault. the spare wheel), especially before a long
With an automatic gearbox:
► Switch off the ignition then start the engine journey.
– With the selector in mode D or M: with the
again with the key or the "START/STOP" button. Driving with under-inflated tyres, particularly
brake pedal released.
in adverse conditions (heavy load, high
– With the selector in mode N and the brake 12 V battery speed, long journey):
pedal released: with the selector at D or M. The Stop & Start system requires a – worsens road-holding.
– With the selector in mode P and the brake 12 V battery of specific technology and – lengthens braking distances.
pedal depressed: with the selector at R, N, D specification. – causes premature wear of the tyres.
or M. All work must be carried out only by a – increases energy consumption.
– With reverse gear engaged. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop
Special cases The inflation pressures defined for the
The engine will restart automatically if the
conditions for operation are met again and in the
Tyre under-inflation vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure
label.
following cases: detection For more information on the Identification
– Vehicle speed exceeds 16 mph (25 km/h) with markings, refer to the corresponding section.
This system alerts the driver if one or more tyres
2.0 BlueHDi versions with automatic gearbox in suffer a drop in pressure.
mode D, or 2 mph (3 km/h) with other versions. The alert is raised when the vehicle is moving,
– The electric parking brake is being applied. not when stationary.

128
 Driving

Checking tyre pressures

This check should be done monthly
► In the event of a puncture, use the
temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel
The system does not advise if a pressure is
incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.
6
when the tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for (depending on equipment).
1 hour or after a journey of less than 6 miles
Driving too slowly may not ensure
(10 km) at moderate speeds).
optimum monitoring.
Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures
The alert is not immediately triggered in the With the vehicle stationary, the system is
shown on the label.
event of a sudden loss of pressure or tyre reinitialised via the Driving/Vehicle touch
blow-out. This is because analysis of the screen menu.
Snow chains values read by the wheel's speed sensors
The system does not have to be ► In this menu, select the “Vehicle settings”
can take several minutes. tab.
reinitialised after fitting or removing snow The alert may be delayed at speeds below
chains. ► On this page, select the "​Under-inflation
25 mph (40 km/h), or when adopting a sporty initialisation" function.
driving mode. ► Select "Yes" to confirm.
Under-inflation alert The reinitialisation is confirmed by the display of
This is signalled by the fixed illumination The alert is kept active until the system is a message and an audible signal.
of this warning lamp, accompanied by an reinitialised.
audible signal and, depending on equipment, the Malfunction
display of a message. Reinitialisation In the event of a malfunction,
► Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive these warning lamps light up on
The system must be reinitialised after any
steering movements and avoid sudden braking. the instrument panel.
adjustment to the pressure of one or more tyres,
► Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do A message appears, accompanied by an audible
and after changing one or more wheels.
so. signal.
Before reinitialising the system, make In this case, the tyre under-inflation monitoring
The loss of pressure detected may not
sure that the pressures of the four tyres function is no longer performed.
always cause visible deformation of the
are correct for the conditions of use of the Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
tyre.
vehicle and conform to the values written on qualified workshop.
Do not rely on just a visual check.
the tyre pressure label.
Non-standard or 'space-saver' spare
► Using a compressor, such as the one in Check the pressures of the four tyres before
wheel
the temporary puncture repair kit, check the performing the reinitialisation.
The use of this type of spare wheel may
pressures of all four tyres when cold. suspend tyre pressure monitoring.
► If it is not possible to carry out this check
immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed.

129
 Driving

In this case, the malfunction warning lamp mirrors, always leave your feet close to the In humid and cold weather, demist the
comes on and disappears once the wheel pedals and take a break every 2 hours. windscreen regularly.
has been replaced by one of uniform size (the Poor visibility (e.g. inadequate street lighting,
same as the others), the pressure readjusted Manoeuvring aids heavy rain, thick fog, snowfall), dazzle
and the reinitialisation carried out. The driver must always check the (e.g. headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low
surroundings of the vehicle before and during sun, reflections on a damp road, leaving a
the whole manoeuvre, in particular using the tunnel, alternating shade and light) can also
Driving and manoeuvring mirrors. impair detection performance.
In the event of a windscreen replacement,
aids - General contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
Radar(s)
recommendations The operation of the radar(s), along with
workshop to recalibrate the camera;
otherwise, the operation of the associated
any associated functions, may be affected
Driving and manoeuvring aids cannot, in driving aids may be disrupted.
by the accumulation of dirt (e.g. mud, ice),
any circumstances, replace the need for in poor weather conditions (e.g. heavy rain,
vigilance on the part of the driver. snow), or if the bumpers are damaged. Other cameras
The driver must comply with the Highway If the front bumper is to be repainted, contact The images from the camera(s)
Code, must remain in control of the vehicle in a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop; displayed on the touch screen or on the
all circumstances and must be able to retake certain types of paint could interfere with the instrument panel may be distorted by the
control of it at all times. The driver must adapt operation of the radar(s). terrain.
the speed to climatic conditions, traffic and In the presence of areas in shade, or in
the state of the road. conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate
It is the driver's responsibility to constantly lighting, the image may be darkened and with
monitor traffic conditions, assess the distance lower contrast.
and relative speed of other vehicles, and Obstacles may appear further away than they
anticipate their manoeuvres before using the actually are.
direction indicator and changing lanes. Driving aids camera
These systems do not make it possible to This camera and its associated functions Sensors
exceed the laws of physics. may be impaired or not work if the windscreen The operation of the sensors, as well as
area in front of the camera is dirty, misty, any associated functions, may be disrupted
Driving aids frosty, covered with snow, damaged or by noise pollution such as that emitted by
You should hold the steering wheel with masked by a sticker. noisy vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries,
both hands, always use the door and interior pneumatic drills), by the accumulation of

130
 Driving

snow or dead leaves on the road or in the

event of damaged bumpers and mirrors.
– Never fit one mat on top of another. "MEM" button 6
When reverse gear is engaged, an audible Units of speed
signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors Ensure that the units of speed displayed
may be dirty. on the instrument panel (mph or km/h) are
A front or rear impact to the vehicle can those for the country you are driving in.
upset the sensors’ settings, which is not If this is not the case, when the vehicle is
always detected by the system: distance stationary, set the display to the required
measurements may be distorted. units of speed so that it complies with what is
The sensors do not systematically detect authorised locally. With this button, you can select a memorised
obstacles that are too low (pavements, studs) In case of doubt, contact a PEUGEOT dealer speed setting to use with the speed limiter or the
or too thin (trees, posts, wire fences). or a qualified workshop. programmable cruise control.
Certain obstacles located in the sensors’ blind
For more information on the Speed limiter
spots may not be detected or may no longer
or Cruise control, refer to the corresponding
be detected during the manoeuvre.
Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound
Memorising speeds section.
waves: pedestrians may not be detected. This function, used only for the speed limiter
and programmable cruise control, lets you Road signs recognition
save speed settings that will subsequently be
Maintenance
proposed for the purpose of configuring these For more information, refer to the
Clean the bumpers and door mirrors and
two systems. General recommendations on the use
the field of vision of the cameras regularly.
You can memorise multiple speed settings for of driving and manoeuvring aids.
When washing your vehicle at high pressure,
each of the two systems.
direct the spray from at least 30 cm away
By default, some speed settings are already
from the radar, sensors and cameras.
memorised.

Mats/Pedal trims As a safety measure, the driver must only

The use of mats or pedal trims not change speed settings when stationary.
approved by PEUGEOT may interfere with
the operation of the speed limiter or cruise
control.
Changing a speed setting
To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: Speed settings can be activated,
– Ensure that the mat is secured correctly. deactivated, selected and changed in the
Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu.

131
 Driving

This system displays the maximum speed

Supplementary Display of Supplementary Display of
authorised locally on the instrument panel, using:
traffic sign detected the speed traffic sign detected the speed
– Speed limit signs detected by the camera.
associated with associated with
– Speed limit information from the navigation
the supplementary the supplementary
system’s mapping.
traffic sign traffic sign
– Signs indicating a shared traffic zone detected
by the camera. Speed limit when If the wiper control Speed limit for 56 mph (90 km/h)
raining stalk is in the vehicles with a (for example)
Sign detected Suggested speed
Examples: "intermittent wipe" gross vehicle
(calculated)
or "automatic wipe" weight or gross
Entry into a shared Without PEUGEOT position (in order train weight less
traffic zone Connect Nav to activate the rain than 3.5 tonnes
Example: 10 mph or 20 km/h sensor):
(depending on 68 mph (110 km/h)
the units on the (for example) Speed limit in case If the outside
instrument panel)
Speed limit when If an approved towing of snow temperature is below
With PEUGEOT
towing device is fixed to the Example: 3°C:
Connect Nav
vehicle: 19 mph (30 km/h)
Display of the speed
56 mph (90 km/h) (for example)
in force in the country
(for example) with a "snowflake"
you are driving in.
symbol
Speed limit 43 mph (70 km/h)
– Some supplementary traffic signs detected by
applicable over a (for example) Speed limit at 19 mph (30 km/h)
the camera.
certain distance certain times of the (for example)
Example: day with a "clock" symbol
Example:

Navigation mapping should be regularly

updated in order to receive accurate
speed limit information from the system.

132
 Driving

The units for the speed limit (mph or

km/h) depend on the country you are
Information displayed on
the instrument panel
6
driving in.
This should be taken into account to ensure
you observe the speed limit. For a suggested maximum speed, the first time
For the system to work properly when that the vehicle exceeds it by more than 3 mph
changing countries, the speed unit of the (5 km/h) (e.g. 59 mph (95 km/h)), the speed is
instrument panel must match that of the displayed and flashes for 10 seconds (depending
country you are driving in. on version).

Automatic sign reading is a driving aid Operating limits

system and does not always display the The system does not take account of reduced
correct speed limits. speed limits, especially those imposed in the
The speed limit signs present on the road following cases:
always take priority over those displayed by 1. Detected speed limit indication – Poor weather (rain, snow).
the system. or – Atmospheric pollution.
The system is designed to detect signs that 2. End of speed limit indication – Towing.
conform to the Vienna Convention on road – Driving with a space-saver type spare wheel
signs. or snow chains fitted.
– Tyre repaired using the temporary puncture
Specific speed limits, such as those for repair kit.
heavy goods vehicles, are not displayed. – Young drivers.
The display of the speed limit on the The system is active but is not detecting speed The system may not display the speed limit if it
instrument panel is updated when passing limit information. does not detect a speed limit sign within a preset
a speed limit sign intended for cars (light period and in the following situations:
vehicles). – Road signs that are obstructed, non-standard,
damaged or bent.
– Obsolete or incorrect maps.
Activation/Deactivation
By default, the system is automatically activated On detecting speed limit information, the system
at every engine start. displays the value.
The settings are changed via the
Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu.

133
 Driving

Recommendation Information displayed on the

instrument panel

3. Speed limit indication

In addition to Road signs recognition, the
4. Speed memorisation prompt
driver can select the speed displayed as a speed
5. Current speed setting
setting for the speed limiter or cruise control
using the speed limiter or cruise control 'store'
button. Storing the speed setting ► Press button 2once to save the suggested
For more information on the Speed speed value.
limiter, Cruise control or Adaptive A message is displayed, confirming the request.
cruise control, refer to the corresponding
sections.
► Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control.
Steering-mounted controls The speed limiter/cruise control information is
displayed.
Upon detecting a sign suggesting a new speed
setting, the system displays the value and
"MEM" flashes for a few seconds, prompting you
to save it as a new speed setting.

If there is a difference of less than 6 mph

(9 km/h) between the speed setting and ► Press button 2again to confirm and save the
1. Speed limiter/cruise control mode selection
the speed displayed by the Road signs new speed setting.
2. Memorise the speed setting
recognition, the "MEM" symbol is not The display then reverts to its previous state.
displayed.

Depending on the road conditions, several

speeds may be displayed.

134
 Driving

Extended Traffic Sign

Recognition
This system prevents the vehicle from
exceeding the speed programmed by the
5. Depending on version:
Display the speed thresholds saved using the
6
driver (speed setting). Memorising speeds function
For more information, refer to the The speed limiter is switched on manually. or
General recommendations on the use The minimum speed setting is 19 mph (30 km/h). Use the speed suggested by the Road signs
of driving and manoeuvring aids. The speed setting remains in the system recognition (MEM display)
memory when the ignition is switched off.
For more information on Memorising speeds
Steering-mounted control or the Road signs recognition, refer to the
corresponding sections.

Information displayed on
This additional system recognises these road
signs and displays them on the instrument panel.
the instrument panel
As you approach it, the symbol of the
corresponding sign is displayed on the
instrument panel.

The actual road signs always take priority

over those displayed by the system.
The signs must comply with the Vienna
Convention on road signs.
6. Speed limiter on/pause status indication
7. Speed limiter mode selection indication
Activation/Deactivation
8. Speed setting value
The settings are changed via 1. ON (LIMIT position)/OFF 9. Speed suggested by the Road signs
the Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu. 2. Reduce the speed setting recognition function (depending on version)
3. Increase the speed setting
Speed limiter 4. Pause/resume speed limiter with the speed
setting previously stored
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids.

135
 Driving

Switching on/Pausing ► Press and hold button 2 or 3 to change the When exceeding the speed is not due to the
value in steps of + or - 5 mph (8 km/h). driver's action (e.g. in case of a steep slope), an
To change the limit speed setting using audible signal is triggered immediately.
memorised speeds, via the touch screen:
On a steep descent or in the event of
► Press button 5 to display the memorised
sharp acceleration, the speed limiter will
speed settings.
not be able to prevent the vehicle from
► Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "LIMIT" position ► Press the touch screen button for the desired
exceeding the speed setting.
to select speed limiter mode; the function is speed setting.
If necessary, apply the brakes to control your
paused. The selection screen closes after a few
vehicle’s speed.
moments.
This setting becomes the new limit speed.
To modify the cruise speed setting based on the
speed suggested by the Road signs recognition,
as shown on the instrument panel:
► If the limit speed setting is suitable (most ► Press button 5 once; a message is displayed
recent speed setting programmed in the system), to confirm the memorisation request. When the vehicle speed returns to the speed
press button 4 to switch the speed limiter on. ► Press button 5 again to save the suggested setting level, the speed limiter operates again:
► Pressing button 4 again temporarily pauses speed. the speed setting display becomes fixed again.
the function. The speed is immediately shown on the
When the speed setting remains below
instrument panel as the new speed setting. Switching off
► Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "OFF" position:
the vehicle's speed for a prolonged
period of time, an audible warning is emitted.
Temporarily exceeding the speed limiter information is no longer displayed.
speed setting
► Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
Malfunction
Adjusting the limit speed
setting
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in
order to set the speed.
To modify the limit speed setting based on the In the event of a malfunction, dashes are
The speed limiter is temporarily deactivated and
vehicle’s current speed: displayed flashing and then fixed instead of the
the displayed speed setting flashes.
► Briefly press button 2 or 3 to change the speed setting.
► Release the accelerator pedal to return to
value in steps of + or - 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
below the speed setting.

136
 Driving

Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a

qualified workshop.
To return to the speed setting, release the
accelerator pedal (when the set speed is
This system automatically maintains the
vehicle’s speed at the value programmed
6
reached again, the displayed speed stops by the driver (speed setting), without the use of

Cruise control - Specific flashing). the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control is switched on manually.
recommendations Operating limits It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph
Never use the system in the following (40 km/h).
The cruise control function does not situations: With a manual gearbox, third gear or higher must
guarantee compliance with the maximum – In an urban area with the risk of be engaged.
authorised speed and the safety distance pedestrians crossing the road. With an automatic gearbox, mode D or second
between vehicles, the driver remains – In heavy traffic (except versions with the gear or higher in mode M must be engaged.
responsible for their driving. Stop & Go function). Cruise control remains active after
In the interest of public safety, only use cruise – On winding or steep roads. changing gear on engines fitted with a
control if the traffic conditions enable vehicles – On slippery or flooded roads. manual gearbox and Stop & Start.
to drive at a steady speed and maintain an – In poor weather conditions.
adequate safety distance. – In the event of restricted visibility for the
Remain vigilant while cruise control is Switching off the ignition cancels any
driver.
activated. If you press and hold one of the speed setting.
– Driving on a speed circuit.
speed setting modification buttons, your – Driving on a rolling road.
vehicle may change speed very abruptly.
When descending a steep hill, the cruise
– When using a ‘space-saver’ type spare Steering-mounted control
wheel.
control system cannot prevent the vehicle – When using snow chains, non-slip covers
from exceeding the set speed. Brake if or studded tyres.
necessary to control the vehicle speed.
On steep climbs or when towing, the set
speed may not be reached or maintained.
Cruise control
Exceeding the programmed speed For more information, refer to the
setting General recommendations on the use
You can temporarily exceed the speed of driving and manoeuvring aids and the
setting by pressing the accelerator pedal (the Cruise control - particular 1. ON (CRUISE position)/OFF
programmed speed flashes). recommendations.

137
 Driving

2. Activate cruise control at the current speed/ 9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit Cruise control can also be paused
decrease speed setting recognition and recommendation system temporarily:
3. Activate cruise control at the current speed/ (depending on version) – by pressing the brake pedal.
increase speed setting – automatically, if the electronic stability
control (ESC) system is triggered.
4. Pause/resume cruise control with the speed Switching on/pausing
setting previously saved
5. Depending on version: Modifying the cruise speed
Display the speed thresholds saved using the
Memorising speeds function setting
or Cruise control must be active.
Use the speed suggested by the Road signs To modify the cruise speed setting, based on the
► Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position
recognition (MEM display) current speed of the vehicle:
to select cruise control mode; the function is
► Briefly press button 2 or 3 to change the
For more information on Memorising speeds paused.
value in steps of + or - 1 mph (km/h).
or the Road signs recognition, refer to the
► Press and hold button 2 or 3 to change the
corresponding sections.
value in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h).
Information displayed on Pressing and holding button 2 or
the instrument panel ► Press button 2 or 3 to activate cruise control
3 results in a rapid change in the speed
of the vehicle.
and save a speed setting when the vehicle has
reached the desired speed; the vehicle’s current
As a precaution, we recommend setting
speed is saved as the speed setting.
a cruise speed fairly close to the current
► Release the accelerator pedal.
speed of your vehicle, to avoid any sudden
acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle.

To change the cruise speed setting using

memorised speed settings and from the touch
6. Cruise control pause/resume
screen:
7. Cruise control mode selection ► Pressing button 4 temporarily pauses the
► Press button 5 to display the memorised
8. Speed setting value function.
speed settings.
► Pressing button 4 again restores operation of
► Press the touch screen button for the desired
the cruise control (ON).
speed setting.

138
 Driving

The selection screen closes after a few

moments.
This system automatically adjusts the speed
and corrects the trajectory of the vehicle, using
Cruise control - Specific
recommendations.
6
This setting becomes the new cruise speed. Adaptive cruise control with Stop&Go function in
To modify the cruise speed setting using the conjunction with Lane Positioning Assist. This system automatically maintains the vehicle
speed suggested by the Road signs recognition These two functions must be activated and in speed at a value set by the driver (speed
shown on the instrument panel: operation. setting), while respecting a safety distance from
► Press button 5 once; a message is displayed For more information on Adaptive cruise the vehicle in front (target vehicle) previously set
to confirm the memorisation request. control and Lane Positioning Assist, refer to by the driver. The system automatically manages
► Press button 5 again to save the suggested the corresponding sections. the acceleration and deceleration of the vehicle.
speed. With a manual gearbox, the system slows the
The system assists the driver by acting vehicle down as far as a speed of 19 mph (30
The speed is immediately shown on the
on the steering, acceleration and braking km/h).
instrument panel as the new speed setting.
within the physical limits and capacities of the With the Stop function (with the EAT6 automatic
Switching off vehicle. Certain road infrastructure elements
or vehicles in the surroundings may not be
gearbox), the system manages braking until the
vehicle comes to a complete stop.
► Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "OFF" position:
properly seen or may be poorly interpreted by With the Stop & Go function (with the EAT8
the cruise control information disappears from
the camera and radar, resulting in an automatic gearbox), the system manages
the screen.
unexpected change in direction, a lack of braking until the vehicle comes to a complete
steering correction and/or inappropriate
Malfunction management of acceleration or braking.
stop and restarts the vehicle.

The brake lamps come on if the vehicle

is slowed down by the system.
Primarily designed for driving on main
It can be dangerous to drive if the brake
Dashes are displayed (flashing, initially, then roads and motorways, this system only
lamps are not in perfect working order.
fixed) in the event of a cruise control system works with moving vehicles driving in the
malfunction. same direction as your vehicle.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Adaptive cruise control
Drive Assist Plus For more information, refer to the
To do this, the system uses a camera fitted at
the top of the windscreen and, depending on
Only available on versions with EAT8 automatic General recommendations on the use
version, a radar fitted in the front bumper.
gearbox. of driving and manoeuvring aids and the

139
 Driving

Primarily designed for driving on main 5. Depending on version: Pressing and holding button 2 or
roads and motorways, this system only Display the speed thresholds saved using the 3 results in a rapid change in the speed
works with moving vehicles driving in the Memorising speeds function of the vehicle.
same direction as your vehicle. or
Use the speed suggested by the Road signs Pausing/resumption of cruise control
If the driver activates the direction recognition (MEM display) ► Press 4 or depress the brake pedal. To
indicator to overtake a slower vehicle, 6. Display and adjustment of the distance pause cruise control, it is also possible to:
cruise control may temporarily reduce the setting to the vehicle in front • shift from mode D to N;
distance to the target vehicle to facilitate • depress the clutch pedal for more than 10
overtaking, without exceeding the speed
setting.
Use seconds;
• press the electric parking brake control.
Activating the system (pause) ► Press 4 to restart cruise control. Cruise
control may have been paused automatically:
Steering-mounted controls ► With the engine running, turn the thumbwheel
1 downwards to the CRUISE position. Cruise • when the speed of the vehicle goes below 19
control is ready to operate (grey display). mph (30 km/h) with a manual gearbox.
Switching on cruise control and setting • when the speed of the engine goes below
the speed 1100 rpm with a manual gearbox.
• by triggering of the ESC system.
With a manual gearbox, your speed must be With a manual gearbox, the driver should
between 19 and 112 mph (30 and 180 km/h). depress the accelerator pedal to move off, then,
With an automatic EAT6 gearbox, your speed when above 19 mph (30 km/h), reactivate the
must be between 1 and 112 mph (2 and system by pressing one of the buttons 2, 3 or 4.
180 km/h). With an EAT6 gearbox, following braking that
With an automatic EAT8 gearbox, your speed has brought the vehicle to a complete stop,
1. ON (CRUISE position)/OFF
must be between 0 and 112 mph (0 and the system holds the vehicle stationary; cruise
2. Activation of cruise control at the current
180 km/h). control is paused. The driver should depress
speed/decrease speed setting
► Press button 2 or 3: the current speed the accelerator pedal to move off, then, when
3. Activation of cruise control at the current
becomes the speed setting (minimum 19 mph above 1 mph (2 km/h), reactivate the system by
speed/increase speed setting
(30 km/h)) and cruise control is immediately pressing one of the buttons 2, 3 or 4.
4. Pause/resume cruise control with the speed
activated (green display). With an EAT8 gearbox, following braking that
setting previously saved
► Press 3 to increase or 2 to decrease the has brought the vehicle to a complete stop, if the
Confirmation of vehicle restart after automatic
speed setting (steps of 5 mph (km/h) if held traffic conditions do not allow the vehicle to begin
stop (versions with Stop & Go function)
pressed). moving again within 3 seconds of stopping,

140
 Driving

press button 4 or the accelerator pedal to move

off.
After a few seconds, the option is accepted and
will be memorised when the ignition is switched
11. Vehicle held stationary (versions with
automatic gearbox)
6
If the driver takes no action after the vehicle off.
has been stopped, the electric parking brake is Temporarily exceeding the speed setting
applied automatically after about 5 minutes.
► Press the accelerator pedal fully. Distance
Cruise control remains active after monitoring and cruise control are deactivated
changing gear, regardless of the gearbox while acceleration is maintained. "Cruise control
type. suspended" is displayed. 12. Inter-vehicle distance setting
13. Position of the vehicle detected by the
Deactivating the system
When the driver attempts to reactivate system
► Turn the thumbwheel 1 upwards to the OFF
cruise control, after the function has been
position.
paused, the message "Activation not possible, Messages and alerts
unsuitable conditions" is briefly displayed if Information displayed on To display the following information on the
reactivation is not possible (safety conditions instrument panel, select the "Driving" display
not met). the instrument panel mode.
The following information can be seen on the
Changing the programmed speed setting instrument panel in "DRIVING" display mode. The actual order in which these
with the Road signs recognition function messages or alerts are displayed may
vary.
► Press 5 to accept the speed suggested by
the function on the instrument panel, then press "Cruise paused" or "Cruise control on
again to confirm. hold" following brief acceleration by the
To prevent sudden acceleration or driver.
deceleration of the vehicle, select a "Active cruise control", no vehicle
speed setting relatively close to the vehicle's detected.
current speed. "Cruise paused", vehicle detected.
7. Vehicle detected by the system (full symbol)
Changing the inter-vehicle distance 8. Cruise control active (colour not grey) "Active cruise control", vehicle detected.
9. Speed setting value
► Press 6 to display the distance setting
10. Speed suggested by the Road signs (orange)
thresholds ("Distant", "Normal" or "Close"), then
recognition "Take back control".
press again to select a threshold.
► Brake or accelerate, depending on the
context.

141
 Driving

(red) – Do not engage reverse gear.

"Take back control".
► Take back control of the vehicle When moving off again, watch out for
immediately: the system cannot manage the cyclists, pedestrians and animals, as
current driving situation. they may not be detected properly.
"Activation refused, conditions
unsuitable".
The system refuses to activate cruise control, as Operating limits – Vehicles in a tight bend.
the necessary conditions are not fulfilled. Cruise control operates by day and night, in dry – When approaching a roundabout.
Stop function weather or moderate rainfall.
Certain situations cannot be managed by the
"Cruise paused" (for a few
system and require driver intervention.
seconds).
Cases not taken into account by the system:
The system has brought the vehicle to a
– Pedestrians, cyclists, animals.
complete stop and is keeping it immobilised:
– Stationary vehicles (e.g. traffic jams,
cruise control is paused.
breakdown). – When following a narrow vehicle.
The driver must accelerate to move off again,
Reactivate the system when conditions allow.
then reactivate cruise control.
Situations in which the driver is prompted to
Stop & Go function immediately resume control:
"To pick up again: accelerate or – Excessively sharp deceleration by the vehicle
press the II button". in front of you.
The system has brought the vehicle to a
complete stop. – Vehicles crossing your lane.
Within 3 seconds, the vehicle gradually and – Vehicles driving in the opposite direction.
automatically begins moving again. Situations where the driver must suspend the
Beyond 3 seconds, the driver must accelerate or system:
press 4-II to move off again.

While the vehicle is immobilised, the – When a vehicle cuts in sharply between your
following recommendations apply: vehicle and the one in front.
– The driver should not leave the vehicle. Some vehicles on the road may be
– Do not open the boot. poorly perceived or interpreted by the
– Do not drop off or pick up passengers. camera and/or the radar (e.g. truck), which

142
 Driving

can lead to an incorrect evaluation of

distances and result in inappropriate
Malfunction Operating conditions
– Adaptive cruise control active.
6
acceleration or braking of the vehicle. In the event of a malfunction,
– Traffic lane marked out by lines on both sides.
dashes are displayed instead of
– ESC system operational.
Pay particular attention: the speed setting.
– ASR/CDS systems activated.
– When motorcycles are present and This warning lamp comes on, – No trailer detected.
when there are vehicles staggered across the accompanied by a message and an – No 'space-saver' spare wheel in use.
traffic lane. audible signal, to confirm the malfunction. – Vehicle not subject to strong lateral g-forces.
– When entering a tunnel or crossing a Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a – Direction indicators not activated.
bridge. qualified workshop.
Activation/Deactivation
If any of the following malfunctions
occurs, do not use the system:
Lane positioning assist
– Following an impact on the windscreen For more information, refer to the
close to the camera or on the front bumper General recommendations on the use
(versions with radar). of driving and manoeuvring aids.
– Brake lamps not working.

If the vehicle has undergone any of the

following modifications, do not use the
► With the Adaptive cruise control with Stop &
system:
Go function activated, press this button.
– Carrying long objects on roof bars.
The action is confirmed by:
– Towing.
– The indicator lamp in the button lighting up
– Use of the "space-saver" type spare wheel The system identifies the edges of the traffic lane
green.
(depending on version). and steers the vehicle to keep it inside this lane
– The following symbol being displayed on the
– Front end of the vehicle modified (for and maintain the lateral position chosen by the
instrument panel.
example by adding long-range headlamps or driver.
The colour of the symbol on the instrument panel
painting the front bumper). To do this, the system uses a camera placed on
depends on the operating status of the system:
– Obstructed radar. the upper part of the windscreen.
(grey colour)
This system is particularly suited to driving on
One or more operating conditions is not
motorways and main roads.
met; the system is paused.
(green colour)

143
 Driving

All operating conditions are met; the system is Pausing/Suspending the In response to action by the driver:
active. suspension
(orange colour)
system
– Activation of the direction indicators.
System malfunction. The driver must act promptly if they – Travelling outside the lane limits.
If the driver no longer wishes to use the system believe that the traffic conditions or the – Too tight a grip on the steering wheel or
for a while, they can deactivate it by pressing the state of the road surface require their dynamic action on the steering wheel.
button again. intervention, by moving the steering wheel to – Action on the brake pedal (resulting in a pause
The indicator lamp in the button goes off and the temporarily suspend system operation. Any until cruise control is reactivated) or accelerator
symbol disappears from the instrument panel. intervention on the brake pedal that causes pedal (suspension for as long as the pedal is
The system status is saved when the the Adaptive cruise control to pause will also depressed).
ignition is switched off. cause the system to pause. – Pausing of Adaptive cruise control.
– Deactivation of the DSC/ASR systems.
If the system detects that the driver is not
Cruise control holding the wheel firmly enough, it
The driver must hold the steering wheel properly. triggers a series of gradual alerts and then
When cruise control is activated, the symbol is deactivates itself if there is no response from
displayed in green: by small steering actions, the driver.
the system directs the vehicle and keeps it in the
position chosen by the driver, in the traffic lane.
If the function is suspended due to the
This position is not necessarily the centre of the
prolonged release of the force holding
lane.
the steering wheel, the function must be
The driver can feel movements in the steering
reactivated by pressing the button again.
wheel.
The driver can change the position of the vehicle Automatic pause
at any time, by turning the steering wheel, which
suspends the function. The driver positions the – Triggering of the ESC.
vehicle where they wish to in the lane. When – Prolonged failure to detect one of the lane
the driver feels that the vehicle’s position is limit markings. In this case, the Lane keeping
appropriate, they maintain it until the function assist function can take over, and the system will
is reactivated. The system regains control by reactivate itself once the operating conditions are
regulating on the new defined position. met again.

144
 Driving

Driving situations and related alerts

The tables below describe the displays associated with the main driving situations.
6
The actual order of display of these alerts may be different.
Button indicator lamp Cruise control Symbols Display Comments
thumbwheel
Off CRUISE Cruise paused.
Lane positioning assist not activated.
(grey)
(grey)
Off CRUISE Active cruise control.
Lane positioning assist not activated.

(green)
(grey)
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus activated.
The system is operating normally
(correction is made at the steering wheel).
(green)
(green)
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus paused.
70
(grey)
(grey)
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus activated.
All the operating conditions for lane
positioning assist have not been met.
(green)/(grey)
(grey)
Green OFF or LIMIT Cruise control deactivated.
All the operating conditions for lane
positioning assist have not been met.
(grey)
(grey)

145
 Driving

Button indicator lamp Cruise control Symbols Display Comments

thumbwheel
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus suspended.
Cruise control and lane positioning assist
are suspended.
(green)/(grey)
(grey)

Messages Driving situations

"Activate cruise control to use lane positioning assist" Activation of lane positioning assist while cruise control is not active.
"Conditions unsuitable - Awaiting activation" Activation of lane positioning assist while not all conditions are met.
"Keep your hands on the steering wheel" Prolonged driving without holding the steering wheel, holding it improperly or
without applying any force.
"Hold the steering wheel" Actual or imminent loss of lane positioning assist.
"Take back control" Simultaneous loss of cruise control and lane positioning assist.

Operating limits – Dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle,

low sun, reflections on a wet road surface,
Risk of undesirable operation

The system may issue an alert when the leaving a tunnel, alternating light and shade). The system should be deactivated in the
vehicle is travelling on a long, straight – Windscreen area in front of the camera following situations:
road with smooth road surface even if the dirty, misted up, frost-covered, snow-covered, – Driving with a "space-saver" type spare
driver thinks they are holding the steering damaged or covered by a sticker. wheel.
wheel correctly. – Lane markings eroded, partially hidden (snow, – When towing or with a bicycle carrier
mud) or multiple (roadworks, surface joints). attached to a towing device, particularly when
The system may not operate or may produce – Travelling in a tight bend. a trailer is not connected or the trailer is not
unsuitable corrections to the steering in the – Winding roads. an approved type.
following situations: – Presence of a tarmac joint on the road. – Adverse weather conditions.
– Poor visibility (insufficient road lighting, – Driving on slippery road surfaces (risk of
snowfall, rain, fog). aquaplaning, snow, ice).
– In roadworks or toll booth areas.
– Driving on racing circuits.

146
 Driving

– Driving on a rolling road. Operating conditions

– Vehicle speed between 43 and 112 mph (70
The driver can prevent the correction by
firmly holding the steering wheel
6
(e.g. during an emergency manoeuvre).
Malfunction and 180 km/h).
The correction is interrupted immediately if
– Road marked with a central dividing line.
In the event of a malfunction, the the direction indicators are operated.
– Steering wheel held with both hands.
Service warning lamp comes on
– Direction indicators off upon activation of the While the direction indicators are activated and
and this (orange) symbol appears on the
system. for a few seconds after switching them off, the
instrument panel, accompanied by the display of
– ESC system activated and operational. system considers that a change of trajectory is
a message and an audible signal.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a The system helps the driver only if there intentional and no correction is triggered during
qualified workshop. is a risk of the vehicle unintentionally this period.
wandering from the lane it is being driven in. It
Lane keeping assist does not manage the safe driving distance,
vehicle speed or braking.
For more information, refer to the The driver must hold the steering wheel with
General recommendations on the use both hands so that they can maintain control
of driving and manoeuvring aids. when the conditions no longer allow the
system to intervene (e.g. in the event that
The system corrects the vehicle's trajectory by the central dividing line marking on the road
alerting the driver as soon as it detects a risk of surface disappears).
involuntary lane departure or crossing of a verge
or hard shoulder (depending on version).
To do this, the system uses a camera, placed on
Operation
the upper part of the windscreen, identifying the As soon as the system identifies a risk of
lane markings on the ground and the side of the involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings
road (depending on version). detected on the ground or a lane boundary
This system is particularly useful on (e.g. grass verge), it performs the trajectory
motorways and main roads. correction necessary to restore the vehicle to its
original lane.
The driver will notice a turning movement of the
steering wheel.
This warning lamp flashes during
trajectory correction.

147
 Driving

Driving situations and related alerts

To receive all the necessary information on the instrument panel, first select the "Driving" display mode.
The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed in different driving situations.
The actual order of display of these alerts may be different.
Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated Comments
message
ON System active, conditions not met:
– Speed below 43 mph (70 km/h).
– No lane marking recognised.
(grey) – ASR/DSC systems deactivated or operation of ESC
system triggered.
– "Sporty" driving.
ON Automatic standby of the function (e.g. detection of a
trailer, use of the "space-saver" type spare wheel supplied
with the vehicle).
(grey)
ON Lane marking detected.
Speed above 43 mph (70 km/h).

(green)
ON The system corrects the trajectory on the side where the
risk of unintentional crossing is detected (orange line).

(orange)/(green)

148
 Driving

Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated

message
Comments 6
ON – If, during the correction, the system detects that the
driver has not held the steering wheel for a few seconds, it
stops the correction and returns control to the driver.
(orange)/(green) – During the trajectory correction, the system determines
"Put your hands back on that the correction will not be enough: the driver is warned
the steering wheel" that they must provide additional trajectory correction.
The duration of audible warnings will increase if multiple
corrections are performed in quick succession. The
warning will become continuous, persisting until the driver
responds.
This message may also be displayed with your hands on
the steering wheel.

Operating limits – Inactivity by the driver detected during

correction.
Risk of undesirable operation
The system goes into standby automatically in The system should be deactivated in the
the following cases: The following situations may interfere following situations:
– ESC deactivated or operation triggered. with the operation of the system or – When changing a wheel or working near a
– Speed below 43 mph (70 km/h) or greater prevent it from working: wheel.
than 112 mph (180 km/h). – Insufficient contrast between the road – Towing or with a bicycle carrier on a towing
– Electrical connection to a trailer. surface and the verge or hard shoulder device, especially with trailer not plugged in or
– Use of a "space-saver" spare wheel detected (e.g. shade). not approved.
(as detection is not immediate, deactivation of – Lane markings worn, hidden (e.g. snow, – Road in poor condition, unstable or with very
the system is recommended). mud) or multiple (e.g. roadworks). poor grip (risk of aquaplaning, snow, ice).
– Dynamic driving style detected, pressure on – Close proximity to the vehicle in front (lane – Adverse weather conditions.
the brake or accelerator pedal. markings may not be detected). – Driving on racing circuits.
– Driving over lane markings. – Roads that are narrow, winding. – Driving on a rolling road.
– Activation of the direction indicators.
– Crossing the inside line on a bend.
– Driving on a tight bend.

149
 Driving

Activation/Deactivation Active Safety Brake with This system includes three functions:
– Collision Risk Alert.
Collision Risk Alert and – Intelligent emergency braking assistance
Intelligent emergency (iEBA).
– Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency
braking assistance braking).

For more information, refer to the

General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
► Press and hold this button to deactivate or
press briefly to reactivate the system at any time.
Deactivation is signalled by the lighting of the
indicator lamp in the button.
The state of the system is stored when the This system:
ignition is switched off. – warns the driver that their vehicle is at risk of
collision with the preceding vehicle, a pedestrian
Malfunction or a cyclist. The vehicle has a camera located at the top of
In the event of a malfunction, – reduces the vehicle's speed to avoid a the windscreen and, depending on version, a
these warning lamps light up on collision or to limit its severity. radar located in the front bumper.
the instrument panel, accompanied by the
The speed will be reduced by a This system does not replace the need
display of a message and an audible signal.
maximum of 16 mph (25 km/h) (versions for driver vigilance.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
with camera only) or by a maximum of 31 This system is designed to assist the driver
qualified workshop.
mph (50 km/h) (versions with camera and and improve road safety.
radar). It is the driver's responsibility to continuously
monitor traffic conditions in accordance with
The system also takes motorcyclists into applicable driving regulations.
account.
It may also react on animals. Animals As soon as the system detects a
(especially animals smaller than 0.5 m) potential collision, it prepares the braking
and objects on the road are not necessarily circuit. This may cause a slight noise and a
detected. slight sensation of deceleration.

150
 Driving

Deactivation/Activation
By default, the system is automatically activated
– Using an automatic car wash.
– Performing any maintenance (e.g. changing a
Following an impact (e.g. a collision), the
system is automatically deactivated.
6
wheel, working inside the engine compartment). Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
at every engine start.
– Placing the vehicle on a rolling bench in a qualified workshop.
The settings are changed via the
workshop.
Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu.
– Towing the vehicle.
Deactivation of the system is signalled by
– Following a front bumper deformation (version
Collision Risk Alert
the illumination of this warning lamp,
with radar). This function warns the driver if there is a risk
accompanied by the display of a message.
– Following an impact to the windscreen close to of collision with the preceding vehicle, or with a
pedestrian or cyclist.
Operating conditions and the detection camera.

limits The system is automatically deactivated Modifying the alert trigger threshold
once the use of a different diameter This trigger threshold determines the sensitivity
Vehicle moving forward without trailer.
"space-saver" type spare wheel is detected, with which the function warns of the risk of
Brake system operational.
or if a fault with the two lateral brake lamps is collision.
DSC/ASR systems activated.
detected. The threshold is set via the
Seat belts fastened for all passengers.
Stabilised speed on roads with no or low Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu.
curvature. The system diagnoses permanently its ► Select one of the three pre-defined
This warning lamp lights up on the capability and may inhibit itself without thresholds: "Far", "Normal" or "Close".
instrument panel without any additional specific driver indication, if the system is The last threshold selected is memorised when
message, to indicate that the automatic braking outside of the regular operating conditions the ignition is switched off.
system is not available. (e.g. sensor initialization, board voltage out of
This is a normal behavior indicating that a regular range, activation of stability system). Operation
condition is not fulfilled and which does not Therefore, the system may not be available Depending on the collision risk detected by the
request the support of a workshop. just after starting the vehicle. system and the alert trigger threshold chosen
In any situations with ignition on where automatic by the driver, different levels of alert may be
braking presents a risk, deactivating the It can be dangerous to drive if the brake triggered and displayed on the instrument panel.
system via the vehicle's configuration menu is lamps are not in perfect working order. The system takes into account the vehicle
recommended, for instance: dynamics, the difference speed of the own
– Towing a trailer (particularly a trailer without its The driver must not overload the vehicle vehicle and the object identified for the
own braking system). (keep within the GVW limit and load collision risk, and the operation of the vehicle
– Carrying long objects on roof bars. height limits for roof bars). (e.g. actions on the pedals, steering wheel) to
– Driving with snow chains. trigger the alert at the most relevant moment.

151
 Driving

(orange) Active Safety Brake Operation

Level 1: visual alert only, warning that the The system operates subject to the following
preceding vehicle is very close. conditions:
The message "Vehicle close" is displayed. – At reduced speed in an urban environment,
(red) when a stationary vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist
Level 2: visual and audible alert, warning is detected.
that a collision is imminent. – The vehicle's speed is between 6 mph and
The message "Brake!" is displayed. 53 mph (10 km/h and 85 km/h) (versions with
While approaching a vehicle too quickly, camera only) or 87 mph (140 km/h) (versions
the level 2 alert may be displayed with camera and radar) when a moving vehicle
directly. is detected.
Important: the level 1 alert depends on the This warning lamp flashes (for
trigger threshold selected. It reacts only on approximately 10 seconds) as soon as
moving vehicles. It is disabled automatically the function applies the vehicle’s brakes.
at lower speed. During the flashing time, the function is not
available.
With an automatic gearbox, in the event of
It is possible that collision warnings are
automatic emergency braking, keep the brake
not given, are given too late or seem This function, also called "automatic emergency
pedal depressed, also after a complete stop is
unjustified. braking", intervenes after the acoustic alert if the
reached, to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
The driver must always stay in control of the driver does not operate the brake pedal quickly
With a manual gearbox, in the event of automatic
vehicle and be prepared to react at any time enough.
emergency braking bringing the vehicle to a
to avoid an accident. The system aims at reducing the speed of
complete stop, the engine may stall.
impact or avoiding a collision if the driver fails to
react. The driver can override the automatic
Intelligent emergency emergency braking at any time by firmly
The speed will be reduced by a
braking assistance (iEBA) maximum of 16 mph (25 km/h) (versions
turning the steering wheel and/or firmly
This function increases vehicle deceleration depressing the accelerator pedal.
with camera only) or by a maximum of 31
if the driver does not brake enough to avoid a mph (50 km/h) (versions with camera and
collision. radar).
This assistance is only provided if the driver
presses the brake pedal.

152
 Driving

The brake pedal may feel hard and

vibrate slightly while the function is
(depending on version). The automatic braking
system is deactivated until the seat belts are
break after two hours of driving at a speed above
43 mph (70 km/h).
6
operating. fastened. This alert is issued via the display of a message
If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, encouraging the driver to take a break,
automatic braking is maintained for 1 to 2
seconds.
Distraction detection accompanied by an audible signal.
If the driver does not follow this advice, the alert
is repeated hourly until the vehicle is stopped.
For more information, refer to the
The system resets itself if one of the following
Malfunction General recommendations on the use
conditions is met:
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
This warning lamp lights up on the – With the engine running, the vehicle has been
instrument panel with the message Depending on version, the function consists of stationary for more than 15 minutes.
"Sensor blind" in certain cases. either the "Driver Attention Warning" system – The ignition has been switched off for a few
Version with camera only: the system is alone or combined with the "Driver Attention minutes.
deactivated. Warning by Camera" system. – The driver's seat belt is unfastened and their
Version with camera and radar: the system door is opened.
may continue to operate in a degraded mode. These systems are in no way designed
This may be caused by a reduced visibility to keep the driver awake or to prevent As soon as the speed of the vehicle
(e.g. rain, fog, snow, blinding by low sun) or by the driver from falling asleep at the wheel. drops below 43 mph (70 km/h), the
a real sensor blockage. In this case, stop the It is the driver’s responsibility to stop if feeling system goes into standby.
vehicle and verify if the front camera or the front tired. Driving time starts being counted again once
radar is covered by dirt, snow, ice or anything Take a break if you are feeling tired or at least the speed reaches above 43 mph (70 km/h).
preventing the sensing. every 2 hours.
In the event of a malfunction, this warning Driver Attention Warning by
lamp lights up on the instrument panel,
accompanied by the display of a message and
Activation/Deactivation Camera
This function is set via the touch screen Depending on version, the Driver Attention
an audible signal.
Driving/Vehicle menu. Warning system may be combined with the
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
The state of the system is memorised when the Driver Attention Warning by Camera system.
qualified workshop.
ignition is switched off.
These warning lamps light up on
the instrument panel and/or in the
warning lamp display for seat belts and front
Driver Attention Warning
passenger airbag to indicate that the driver's The system triggers an alert when it
and/or front passenger's seat belt is not fastened detects that the driver has not taken a

153
 Driving

The following situations may interfere

with the operation of the system or
prevent it from working:
– lane markings absent, worn, hidden (snow,
mud) or multiple (roadworks);
– close to the vehicle ahead (lane markings
not detected);
– roads that are narrow, winding, etc. A warning lamp appears in the door mirror on the
side in question:
– fixed, immediately, when being overtaken.

The system assesses the driver's level of

Blind spot monitoring – flashing, after a delay of about one second,
when overtaking a vehicle slowly, and when the
alertness, fatigue and distraction by direction indicator is used.
For more information, refer to the
identifying trajectory changes in relation to the
General recommendations on the use
lane markings.
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
Activation/Deactivation
To do this, the system uses a camera, placed on It is set via the Driving/Vehicle touch
the upper part of the windscreen. screen menu.
This system is particularly suited to fast roads When the function is activated, this
(speed higher than 43 mph (70 km/h)). indicator lamp comes on in the instrument
At a first alert level, the driver is warned by the panel.
message "Be vigilant!", accompanied by an When starting the vehicle, the warning lamp
audible signal. comes on in each mirror to indicate that the
After three first-level alerts, the system triggers system is activated.
a further alert with the message "Dangerous The status of the system is memorised when the
driving: take a break", accompanied by a more ignition is switched off.
pronounced audible signal.
This system warns the driver of a potential The system is automatically deactivated
In certain driving conditions (poor road danger posed by the presence of another vehicle when towing with a towing device
surface or strong winds), the system may (car, lorry, motorcycle) in the vehicle's blind approved by PEUGEOT.
give alerts independent of the driver's level of spots (areas hidden from the driver's field of
vigilance. vision) using sensors located on the sides of the
bumpers. Operating conditions
– All vehicles are moving in the same direction
and in adjacent lanes.

154
 Driving

– The speed of your vehicle must be between 7

and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h).
by the Service warning lamp coming on and the
display of a message.
6
– When overtaking a vehicle, the speed Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
difference is less than 6 mph (10 km/h). qualified workshop.
– When overtaken by a vehicle, the speed
The system may be temporarily disturbed
difference is less than 16 mph (25 km/h).
by certain climatic conditions (e.g. rain,
– Traffic is flowing normally.
hail).
– Overtaking a vehicle over a certain period of
In particular, driving on a wet road or going
time and the vehicle being overtaken remains in
from a dry to a wet area can cause false
the blind spot.
alerts (e.g. presence of a cloud of water
– You are driving on a straight or slightly curved
droplets in the blind spot interpreted as a
road.
vehicle).
– Your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a caravan,
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the
etc.
sensors are not covered by mud, ice or snow.
No alert is triggered in the following conditions:
Operating limits – presence of stationary objects (e.g. parked
Take care not to cover the warning zone in
the door mirrors, or the detection zones on
vehicles, safety rails, lampposts, signs).
the front and rear bumpers with adhesive
– vehicles travelling in the opposite direction.
labels or other objects; they may hamper
– on winding roads or in case of sharp turns.
correct operation of the system.
– when overtaking or being overtaken by a
very long vehicle (e.g. truck, bus), which is both
detected in a blind spot from behind and present
in the driver's field of vision from the front. Parking sensors
– quick overtaking manoeuvre.
For more information, refer to the
– very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in front
General recommendations on the use
and behind are confused with a lorry or a
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
stationary object.
– activation of the Park Assist function.

Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, this
warning lamp flashes for a few
moments in the instrument panel, accompanied

155
 Driving

centimetres, the audible signal becomes obstacle is detected in front and the speed of the
continuous. vehicle is below 6 mph (10 km/h).
The sound emitted by the speaker (right or Front parking sensor operation is suspended if
left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in
located. forward gear, if an obstacle is no longer detected
or the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
Adjusting the audible signal
Depending on version, with The sound emitted by the speaker (front
This system detects and signals the proximity of
PEUGEOT Connect Radio or or rear) locates the obstacle relative to
obstacles (e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier)
PEUGEOT Connect Nav, pressing this button the vehicle, whether in front of or behind it on
using sensors located in the bumper.
opens the window for adjusting the volume of its path.
Rear parking sensors the audible signal.
► Engage reverse gear to start the system Deactivation/Activation
(confirmed by an audible signal). Visual assistance The settings are changed via
The system is switched off when reverse gear is the Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu.
disengaged. The system status is memorised when the
ignition is switched off.
Audible assistance
The rear parking sensors system will be
deactivated automatically if a trailer or
bicycle carrier is connected to a towing device
installed in accordance with the
This supplements the audible signal by manufacturer's recommendations.
displaying bars on the screen that represent the
The system signals the presence of obstacles distance between the obstacle and the vehicle The parking sensors are deactivated while the
within the sensors’ detection zone. (white: more distant, orange: close, red: very Park Assist function is measuring a space.
The proximity information is given by an close). For more information on the Park
intermittent audible signal, the frequency of When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger" Assist function, refer to the corresponding
which increases as the vehicle approaches the symbol is displayed on the screen. section.
obstacle.
When the distance between the vehicle and Front parking sensors Operating limits
the obstacle becomes less than about thirty Supplementing the rear parking sensors, the If the boot is heavily loaded, the vehicle may tilt,
front parking sensors are triggered when an affecting distance measurements.

156
 Driving

Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction when
• "Zoom view".
• "AUTO view". 6
The display is immediately updated with the type
changing into reverse gear, this warning
of view selected.
lamp lights up on the instrument panel,
The system status is not saved when the ignition
accompanied by the display of a message and
is switched off.
an audible signal (short beep).
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Operating principle

Visiopark 1 - Visiopark 2
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
The screen is divided into two parts with a
contextual view and a view from above the
vehicle in its close surroundings.
The parking sensors supplement the information Using one or two cameras, the close
on the view from above the vehicle. surroundings of the vehicle are recorded whilst
Various contextual views may be displayed: manoeuvring at low speed.
– Standard view. An image from above your vehicle in its close
– 180° view. surroundings is reconstructed (represented
– Zoom view. between the brackets) in real time and as the
AUTO mode is activated by default. manoeuvre progresses.
In this mode, the system chooses the best It facilitates the alignment of your vehicle when
view to display (standard or zoom). parking and allows obstacles close to the vehicle
You can change the type of view at any time to be seen. It is automatically deleted if the
With the engine running, these systems allow vehicle remains stationary for too long.
during a manoeuvre.
views of your vehicle’s close surroundings to be With Visiopark 2, the image is created using
► Press the button in the bottom left-hand
displayed on the touch screen using one camera both cameras, when going forward and when
corner of the touch screen.
for Visiopark 1 and two cameras for Visiopark 2. reversing.
► Select the type of view:
• "Standard view". When the function is activated, it is possible
• "180° view". that the view from above is not displayed. If

157
 Driving

the system is activated when the vehicle has AUTO mode The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm
already moved, the view from above can be fully from the rear bumper; the two blue lines 3 and 4
displayed. represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively.
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the
Visiopark 1 view selection menu.

Rear view Zoom view

This mode is activated by default.

Using sensors in the rear bumper, the automatic
view changes from the rear view (standard) to
the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is
approached at the level of the red line (less than
30 cm) during a manoeuvre.

Standard view

To activate the camera located on the tailgate,

engage reverse gear and do not exceed a speed The camera records the vehicle's surroundings
of 6 mph (10 km/h). during the manoeuvre in order to create a
The system is deactivated: view from above the rear of the vehicle in its
– Automatically, at speeds above approximately near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be
6 mph (10 km/h), manoeuvred around nearby obstacles.
– Automatically, if the tailgate is opened. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the
– Upon changing out of reverse gear (the image view selection menu.
remains displayed for 7 seconds). Obstacles may appear further away than
– By pressing the white arrow in the upper-left they actually are.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the
corner of the touch screen. It is important to monitor the sides of the
screen.
The blue lines 1 represent the width of your vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the
vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their direction mirrors.
changes according to the position of the steering Parking sensors also provide additional
wheel. information about the area around the vehicle.

158
 Driving

180° view offering views from the rear of the vehicle (rear
vision) when reverse gear is engaged and views
The rear vision views are similar to those for the
Visiopark 1 function. 6
from the front of the vehicle (front vision) when For more information on the Visiopark
the gearbox is in neutral or a gear is engaged. 1 function, refer to the corresponding section.

Rear vision Front and rear vision

The system activates automatically when With the engine running and the speed
The 180° view facilitates reversing out of a reverse gear is engaged. below 12 mph (20 km/h), the system is
parking space, making it possible to see the The system is deactivated: activated via the Driving/Vehicle touch screen
approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists. – Automatically, at speeds above approximately menu:
This view is not recommended for carrying out a 12 mph (20 km/h). ► Select "Visual parking assistance".
complete manoeuvre. – When shifting out of reverse (the front vision AUTO mode is displayed by default, with front
It features 3 areas: left A, centre B and right C. image replaces the rear vision image for 7 vision, if the gearbox is in neutral or with a
This view is only available via the view selection seconds). gear engaged, or with rear vision, if reverse is
menu. – By pressing the white arrow in the upper-left engaged.
corner of the touch screen. The system is deactivated:
Visiopark 2 – Automatically above about 19 mph (30 km/h)
If a trailer or a bicycle carrier is fitted to
The vehicle has a camera at the front, fitted in (the image disappears temporarily from 12 mph
the towball, the area behind the vehicle
the grille, and a camera at the rear, located close (20 km/h)).
on the view from above goes dark.
to the tailgate opening control. – By pressing the white arrow in the upper-left
The surroundings are reconstructed by the
Using these cameras, the system displays the corner of the touch screen.
front camera only.
vehicle's near surroundings on the touch screen,

159
 Driving

AUTO mode The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm 180° view

from the front bumper; the two orange lines 3
and 4 represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively.
This view is available with AUTO mode or by
selecting it in the view change menu.

Zoom view

This mode is activated by default.

Using sensors in the front bumper, the automatic
view changes from the front view (standard) to
the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is
approached during a manoeuvre.

Standard view

The 180° view assists with exiting from a parking

The camera records the vehicle's surroundings space in forward gear, making it possible to
during the manoeuvre in order to create a see the approach of vehicles, pedestrians and
view from above the front of the vehicle in its cyclists.
near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be This view is not recommended for carrying out a
manoeuvred around obstacles nearby. complete manoeuvre.
This view is available with AUTO mode or in the It consists of 3 areas: left A, centre B and right
view selection menu. C.
This view is available only from the view
The area in front of your vehicle is displayed on Obstacles may appear further away than
selection menu.
the screen. they actually are.
The orange lines 1 represent the width of your It is important to check the sides of the
vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their direction vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the
changes according to the position of the steering mirrors.
wheel. The parking sensors also supplement the
information on the vehicle's surroundings.

160
 Driving

Park Assist B. Exit from a "parallel" parking space

C. Entry into a "bay" parking space
The Parking sensors function is not
available during parking space
6
For more information, refer to the measurement. It intervenes later when
General recommendations on the use The Park Assist system cannot operate manoeuvring to warn that the vehicle is
of driving and manoeuvring aids. with the engine switched off. approaching an obstacle: the audible signal
When Park Assist is activated, it prevents becomes continuous when the obstacle is
This system provides active parking assistance: Stop & Start from going into STOP mode. In less than 30 centimetres away.
it detects a parking space then operates the STOP mode, activation of Park Assist restarts If the Parking sensors function has
steering system to park in this space. the engine. been deactivated, it will be automatically
With a manual gearbox, the driver manages the reactivated during the assisted manoeuvring
accelerator, brakes, gears and clutch. phases.
The Park Assist system takes control of
With an automatic gearbox (EAT6/EAT8), the
the steering for a maximum of 4
driver manages the accelerator, brakes and During parking and exit from parking
manoeuvring cycles. It is deactivated after
gears. manoeuvres, the Visiopark 1 - Visiopark
these 4 cycles. If the vehicle is not positioned
During phases of entry into and exit from a 2 functions may come into operation. They
correctly, take back control to complete the
parking space, the system provides visual and allow better monitoring of the surroundings of
manoeuvre.
audible information to the driver in order to make the vehicle, by displaying additional
the manoeuvres safe. Several forward and information in the touch screen.
reverse manoeuvres may be required. The sequence of manoeuvres and the
For more information on the Visiopark
At any time, the driver can take back control by driving instructions are displayed in the
1 - Visiopark 2 functions, refer to the
holding the steering wheel. instrument panel.
corresponding section.
The assistance is activated: the display
of this symbol and a speed limit
indicate that the steering manoeuvres are In some circumstances, the sensors may
controlled by the system: do not touch the not detect small obstacles located in their
steering wheel. blind spots.
The assistance is deactivated: the Any object exceeding the size of the vehicle
display of this symbol indicates that the (e.g. roof ladder, towball) is not taken
steering manoeuvres are no longer controlled into account by the Park Assist during a
by the system: take over the steering. manoeuvre.
The Park Assist system provides assistance for
the following manoeuvres:
Activation of Park Assist deactivates the
A. Entry into a "parallel" parking space
Blind spot monitoring.

161
 Driving

Always check the surroundings of the ► Drive at a speed below 12 mph (20 at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from
vehicle before starting a manoeuvre. 20 km/h) following the instructions until the the row of parked vehicles.
If the lateral distance between the vehicle and system finds an available space. ► Drive at a speed below 12 mph (20
the space is too great, the system may not be ► Move forwards slowly until a message 20 km/h) following the instructions until the
able to measure the space. is displayed, accompanied by an audible system finds an available space.
signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
When several successive spaces are
During manoeuvring phases, the steering ► Engage reverse gear, release the
found, the vehicle will be directed
wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold steering wheel and move without
towards the last one.
the steering wheel or put your hands between exceeding a speed of 4 mph (7 km/h).
the spokes of the steering wheel. The assisted parking manoeuvre is in ► Move forwards slowly until a message
Beware of any object likely to block the progress. is displayed, accompanied by an audible
manoeuvre (e.g. loose clothing, scarves, ties) ► Without exceeding 5 mph (7 km/h), signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
7 move forwards and backwards, aided by
- risk of injury! ► Engage reverse gear, release the
the warnings from the "Parking sensors" system, steering wheel and move without
until the end of the manoeuvre is indicated. exceeding the speed of 5 mph (7 km/h).
Assistance with "parallel" The end of the manoeuvre is confirmed The assisted parking manoeuvre is in
parking manoeuvres by a message and an audible signal. progress.
Parking assistance is deactivated: you can take ► Without exceeding 5 mph (7 km/h),
► When parking, select "Park Assist" in
over the controls again. 7 follow the instructions and the warnings
the Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu
to activate the function. from the "Parking sensors" system, until the end
► Limit the vehicle speed to a maximum
Assistance with "bay" of the manoeuvre is indicated.
of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select "Enter parking manoeuvres The end of the manoeuvre is confirmed
parallel parking space" on the touch screen. ► When parking, select “Park Assist” in by a message and an audible signal.
the Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu The system is deactivated: it is possible to retake
To enter a "parallel" parking space, the control.
to activate the function.
system does not identify spaces that are
► Limit the vehicle speed to a maximum During a "bay" parking manoeuvre, the
clearly smaller or larger than the vehicle.
of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select “Enter Park Assist system is automatically
► Operate the direction indicator on the bay parking space” on the touch screen. deactivated once the rear of the vehicle is
side you have chosen to park in order to ► Operate the direction indicator on the within 50 cm of an obstacle.
activate the measurement function. The vehicle parking side chosen to activate the
must drive at a distance of between 0.5 m and measurement function. The vehicle should drive
1.5 m from the row of parked vehicles.

162
 Driving

Assistance with "parallel"

parking exit manoeuvres
– if the engine stalls.
– if the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
In the event of a malfunction, have the system
checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified 6
– on opening the driver's door. workshop.
► To leave a "parallel" parking space, switch – if no manoeuvre is performed within 5 minutes In the event of a power steering
the engine on. of selecting the type of manoeuvre. malfunction, this warning lamp is
► With the vehicle stationary, select – after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during a displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied
"Park Assist" in the Driving/Vehicle manoeuvre. by a warning message.
touch screen menu to activate the function. – if the wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) is You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
► Press "Exit parking slot" on the touch triggered. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
screen. – if the speed of the vehicle is above 43 mph workshop.
► Operate the direction indicator for the (70 km/h).
exit side chosen. – when the driver interrupts the rotation of the
► Engage reverse or forward steering wheel.
gear and release the steering – after 4 manoeuvring cycles.
wheel. – if one of the front wheels encounters an
The assisted parking manoeuvre is in obstacle.
progress. – when towing a trailer, connected electrically.
► Without exceeding 3 mph (5 km/h), Deactivation is confirmed by a message and an
5 move forwards and backwards, aided by
audible signal.
the warnings from the "Parking sensors" system, The driver should then take back control of the
until the end of the manoeuvre is indicated. vehicle's steering.
The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's
front wheels are clear of the parking space. If the system is deactivated during a
The end of the manoeuvre is confirmed manoeuvre, the driver should reactivate
by a message and an audible signal. it to repeat the measurement.
The system is deactivated: it is possible to retake
To switch the system off for a prolonged period,
control.
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated via the Driving / Malfunctions
Vehicle touch screen menu.
If the parking sensor malfunction occurs
The system is automatically deactivated:
during use, indicated by this warning lamp
– when the ignition is switched off.
coming on, it causes the function to deactivate.

163
 Peugeot & TotalEnergies,
a partnership in performance !
For more than 25 years of partnership, TotalEnergies and Peugeot have
pushed the limits of performance in sports competition with historic
victories, in endurance races or in rallies. Today, the two brands continue
their common motorsport adventure by setting out to conquer the 24h
of Le Mans and the FIA World Endurance Championship in the Hybrid
Hypercar category. So many challenges for which Peugeot exclusively
recommends high-tech Quartz lubricants for the protection of its
engines throughout their life. TotalEnergies therefore equips Peugeot
vehicles with Quartz lubricants from their first filling in the factory to the
approved maintenance networks to guarantee them optimal day-to-
day operation. Peugeot & TotalEnergies: official partners in performance !

Keep your engine younger for longer !

Quartz Ineo Xtra First 0W-20 is a very high performance lubricant

resulting from the joint work of the Peugeot and TotalEnergies R&D
teams. Its innovative technology extends your engine’s life while
reaching significant fuel savings and thus limiting CO2 emissions. The
product is now available in new packaging* made of 50% recycled
material and 100% recyclable.

* 1L & 5L produced in Europe

 Practical information

Compatibility of fuels fuels could prevent the engine from operating

correctly. In these temperature conditions, use
panel, accompanied by the display of a message
and an audible signal. When it first comes on,
7
winter-type Diesel fuel and keep the fuel tank about 6 litres of fuel remain.
more than 50 % full. Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp
Petrol fuels conforming to the EN228 standard At temperatures below -15 °C (+5 °F) to avoid appears every time the ignition is switched on,
containing up to 5% and 10% ethanol problems starting, it is best to park the vehicle accompanied by the message and the audible
respectively. under shelter (heated garage). signal. When driving, this message and audible
signal are repeated with increasing frequency as
Travelling abroad the fuel level drops towards 0.
Diesel fuels conforming to the EN590, EN16734 Certain fuels could damage your vehicle’s You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid
and EN16709 standards and containing up to engine. running out of fuel.
7%, 10%, 20% and 30% fatty acid methyl ester In certain countries, the use of a particular For more information on Running out of fuel
respectively. The use of B20 or B30 fuels, even fuel may be required (specific octane rating, (Diesel), refer to the corresponding section.
occasionally, imposes special maintenance specific trade name, etc.) to ensure correct
A small arrow by the warning lamp
conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions". operation of the engine.
indicates on which side of the vehicle the
For all additional information, consult a dealer.
fuel filler flap is located.

Paraffinic Diesel fuel conforming to the EN15940 Refuelling Stop & Start
standard. Never refuel with the engine in STOP
The use of any other type of (bio) fuel mode; you must switch off the ignition.
Fuel tank capacity:
(e.g. pure or diluted vegetable or animal
approximately 53 litres
oils, domestic fuel) is strictly prohibited - risk
of damaging the engine and fuel system!
(Petrol or Diesel) or 43 litres Refuelling
(Rechargeable hybrid). Any addition of fuel must be in quantities of at
Fuel tank capacity: least 10 litres, in order to be registered by the
The only fuel additives authorised for use
approximately 56 litres. fuel gauge.
are those that meet the B715001 (Petrol)
Opening the filler flap may create a noise caused
or B715000 (Diesel) standards.
Reserve level: approximately 6 litres. by an inrush of air. This vacuum is entirely
normal, resulting from the sealing of the fuel
Diesel at low temperature Low fuel level system.
When the low fuel level is reached, this The filler cap is built into the filler flap or must be
At temperatures below 0 °C (+32 °F), the
warning lamp lights up on the instrument unscrewed (depending on version).
formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel

165
 Practical information

To refuel in complete safety: Misfuel prevention (Diesel)

► Always switch off the engine.
(Depending on country of sale.)
This mechanical device prevents filling the tank
of a Diesel vehicle with petrol.
Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention
device is visible when the filler cap is removed.

► Turn the filler cap to the left, remove it Operation

and place it on its support on the filler flap
► To open the filler flap, press the flap opening (depending on version).
button for more than 2 seconds or, with the ► Insert the filler nozzle and push it in as far as
vehicle unlocked, press the rear of the filler flap possible before starting to refuel (to minimise the
(depending on version). risk of splashing).
► Fill the tank.
Rechargeable hybrid vehicles
Do not continue after the nozzle’s third cut-
After pressing the button on the
out. Doing so may cause malfunctions.
dashboard, the filler flap may not open for
► Put the filler cap back in place and turn it to
several minutes. A sound is emitted when the
the right (depending on version).
filler flap opens.
► Push the fuel filler flap to close it.
If the flap becomes stuck, press and hold
The vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter,
the button on the dashboard for more than
which helps to reduce the level of harmful When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the
3 seconds.
emissions in the exhaust gases. fuel filler neck of a Diesel vehicle, it comes into
► Select a pump that delivers the correct fuel For petrol engines, you must use unleaded contact with the flap. The system remains closed
type for the vehicle's engine (see a reminder fuel. and prevents filling.
label on the inside of the filler flap). The filler neck is narrower, allowing only Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
unleaded petrol nozzles to be inserted. filler nozzle.

If you have put in the wrong fuel for The misfuel prevention device does not
the vehicle, you must have the fuel prevent filling with a jerrycan, regardless
tank drained and filled with the correct fuel of the fuel type.
before starting the engine.

166
 Practical information

Travelling abroad
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be
High voltage system voltage is
dangerous and can cause burns or other
Damage to the vehicle or the traction battery
could result in the leakage of toxic gases or
7
different in other countries, the presence injuries or even fatal electric shock. fluids either immediately or later. PEUGEOT
of the misfuel prevention device may make Since damage to high voltage components is recommends that you:
refuelling impossible. not visible, PEUGEOT recommends that you: – Always inform the fire and emergency
Before travelling abroad, it is advisable to – Never touch the components, damaged services in the event of an incident, warning
check with a PEUGEOT dealer if the vehicle or not, and never let your jewelry or other that the vehicle is equipped with a traction
is suitable for the distribution equipment of the metallic objects come into contact with these battery.
countries visited. components. – Never touch the liquids leaking from the
– Never work on the orange high voltage traction battery.
cables or on any other high voltage – Do not inhale the gases emitted by the
Rechargeable hybrid component marked with the Electric risk label. traction battery which are toxic.
Any intervention on the high voltage system – Move away from the vehicle in the event of
system must be carried out by qualified persons in incident or accident, the gases emitted being
workshops qualified and approved to carry flammable and could cause a fire.
Electrical system out this type of work.
The electrical circuit of the rechargeable hybrid – Never damage, modify or remove the
system is identified by orange cables and its orange high voltage cables or disconnect
components are marked with this symbol: them from the high voltage network.
– Never open, modify or remove the cover of
the traction battery.
– Never work with cutting and forming
tools or heat sources near high voltage This label is intended solely for use by
components and cables. firefighters and maintenance services in
In case of low level of fluid in the cooling the event of any work on the vehicle.
tank, the refilling shall only be performed in a No other person must touch the device shown
The rechargeable hybrid powertrain uses qualified and trained workshop to verify that on this label.
a voltage of between 240 V and 400 V. the leakage is not in the traction battery.
This system may be hot both when the Any intervention on the high voltage system In the event of an accident or impact
ignition is on and after switching it off. must be carried out by qualified persons in to the vehicle’s underbody
Comply with the warning messages shown workshops qualified and approved to carry In these situations, the electrical circuit or the
on the labels, particularly inside the charging out this type of work. traction battery can be seriously damaged.
flap.

167
 Practical information

Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch It is located under the rear seats. In the event of damage to the traction
off the ignition. The traction battery's range varies depending battery
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified on the type of driving, the route, the use of It is strictly prohibited to work on the vehicle
workshop. thermal comfort equipment and the ageing of its yourself.
components. Do not touch liquids coming from the battery,
When washing and in the event of skin contact with these
The traction battery ageing depends on
Before washing the vehicle, always products, wash abundantly with water and
several factors, such as climatic
check that the charging flap is closed contact a doctor as soon as possible.
conditions and the distance travelled.
correctly. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
Never wash the vehicle while the battery is workshop to have the system checked.
To preserve the mileage of your vehicle
on charge.
and the durability of your traction battery,
PEUGEOT recommends that you: Disposal of the traction battery
High-pressure washing – Do not fully charge the battery of your The traction battery is designed for the life of the
To avoid damaging the electrical electric vehicle daily (charge the traction vehicle if the recommendations of PEUGEOT
components, it is expressly prohibited to battery below 80% as often as possible). are followed.
use high-pressure washing in the engine – Do not completely discharge the battery. If it becomes necessary to replace the battery,
compartment or under the body. – Do not store the vehicle for a long period contact the PEUGEOT dealer for instructions on
Do not use a pressure greater than 80 bar of non-use (more than 12 hours) when the its disposal. Improper disposal carries the risk of
when washing the bodywork. traction battery has a low or high charge level. severe burns, electric shock, and damage to the
Prefer a charge level between 20 and 40%. environment.
Never allow water or dust to enter the – Limit the use of fast charging. In accordance with regulations, PEUGEOT
connector or charging nozzle - risk of – Do not expose the vehicle to temperatures ensures a second life or recycling of this
electrocution or fire! below -30°C and above +60°C for more than component in collaboration with qualified
Never connect / disconnect the charging 24 hours. operators.
nozzle or cable with wet hands - risk of – Avoid charging the vehicle at negative
electrocution! temperatures (except if the vehicle ran more Charging flap
than 20 minutes) or above +30°C. The charging flap is located on the rear left-hand
– Do not use the vehicle's traction battery as
Traction battery a generator of energy.
side of the vehicle.

The Li-ion (Lithium-ion) traction battery stores – Do not use a generator to recharge your
the electrical energy needed to propel the vehicle's traction battery.
vehicle.

168
 Practical information

of local electrical installations with the charging

cable. 7
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to obtain the appropriate charging
cable(s).
Status of light Meaning
► Press the top rear of the flap to open it. Identification labels on charging
guides
sockets/connectors
Fixed white Welcome lighting when flap Identification labels are affixed to the vehicle,
is opened charging cable and charger to inform the user
Fixed blue Deferred charging about which device needs to be used.
Flashing green Charging
Fixed green Charging complete
Fixed red Malfunction

In case of impact, even light, against the

charging flap, do not use it.
Do not dismantle or modify the charging
1. Deferred charging activation button connector - risk of electrocution and/or fire!
2. Indicator lamp confirming that the nozzle is Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
locked into the charging connector. workshop.
Fixed red: nozzle correctly positioned and
locked.
Flashing red: nozzle incorrectly positioned or Charging cables, sockets The meaning of each identification label is as
follows:
locking not possible. and chargers
3. Charging connector
The traction battery can be charged using
4. Light guides
several different types of cables.
The charging cable supplied with the vehicle is
compatible with the electrical installations of the
country of sale. If you are travelling abroad, refer
to the following tables to check the compatibility

169
 Practical information

Identification label Location Configuration Power type/Voltage range

Charging connector (vehicle side) TYPE 2 AC
C < 480 Vrms

Charging socket (charger side) TYPE 2 AC

C < 480 Vrms

Types of charging
Cable type Compatibility Specifications
Mode 2 charging cable with integrated control Conventional electrical socket (depending on Charge limited to a maximum of 10 A.
unit country).

"Green'Up" type socket. Charge limited to a maximum of 16 A.

Identification label C on the charging connector

(vehicle side).

170
 Practical information

Cable type Compatibility Specifications 7

Mode 3 charging cable Accelerated charging unit socket. Charge limited to a maximum of 32 A.

Wallbox accelerated charging unit.

Identification labels C on the charging connector

(vehicle side) and on the socket (charger side).

The estimated charging time is indicated

on the instrument panel when the vehicle
Domestic charging cable (mode 2)
It is essential to avoid damaging the
Control unit (mode 2)
is connected. It may vary depending on cable and to keep it intact.
various factors such as the outside In the event of damage, do not use it and
temperature or the quality of the electricity contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
supply. workshop to replace it.
If the outside temperature is below -10°C, it
is recommended to connect the vehicle as Accelerated charging unit (mode 3)
soon as possible as the charging time may Do not dismantle or modify the
increase significantly. The traction battery accelerated charging unit - risk of
may not charge fully. electrocution and/or fire!
To find out how it is used, please refer to the
accelerated charging unit's user instructions.
Type 1

171
 Practical information

– If the circuit-breaker has tripped, contact a 6. Never use this charging cable if it is
professional to check that your electricity supply defective or in any way damaged.
is compatible and carry out any necessary 7. Never attempt to repair or open this
repairs. charging cable. It contains no repairable
– If the circuit-breaker has not tripped, stop parts - replace the charging cable if it is
using the charging cable and contact a damaged.
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. 8. Never immerse this charging cable in water.
Type 1 control unit label 9. Never use this charging cable with an
- Recommendations extension cable, a multi-plug socket, a
conversion adaptor or on a damaged
electrical socket.
10. Do not unplug the plug from the wall as a
Type 2
means of stopping charging.
POWER
11. Do not force the connector if it is locked into
Green: electrical connection established;
the vehicle.
charging can begin.
12. Immediately stop charging, by locking and
CHARGE
then unlocking the vehicle using the remote
Flashing green: charging in progress or
control key, if the charging cable or wall
temperature pre-conditioning activated.
1. Refer to the handbook before use. socket feel burning hot to the touch.
Fixed green: charging complete.
2. Incorrect use of this charging cable may 13. This charging cable includes components
FAULT
result in fire, property damage and serious liable to cause electrical arcing or sparks.
Red: fault; charging not permitted or must
injury or death by electrocution! Do not expose to flammable vapours.
be stopped immediately. Check that everything
3. Always use a correctly earthed power 14. Only use this charging cable with PEUGEOT
is connected correctly and that the electrical
socket, protected by a 30 mA residual vehicles.
system is not faulty.
current device. 15. Never plug the cable into the wall socket (or
If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact a
4. Always use an electrical socket protected unplug it) with wet hands.
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
by a circuit-breaker appropriate for the
Upon plugging the charging cable into a Type 2 control unit label
electrical circuit’s current rating.
domestic socket, all of the indicator lamps come - Recommendations
5. The weight of the control unit must not be
on briefly.
borne by the electrical socket, plug and Refer to the handbook before use.
If no indicator lamps come on, check the
cables.
domestic socket's circuit-breaker.

172
 Practical information

6. Never attempt to repair or open this

charging cable. It contains no repairable
13. Never plug the cable into the wall socket (or
unplug it) with wet hands.
7
parts - replace the charging cable if it is 14. Do not force the connector if it is locked into
damaged. the vehicle.
1. Incorrect use of this charging cable may 7. Never immerse this charging cable in water.
result in fire, property damage and serious 8. Never use this charging cable with an Type 2 control unit label - State of
injury or death by electrocution! extension cable, a multi-plug socket, a indicator lamps
2. Always use a correctly earthed power conversion adaptor or on a damaged
State of the
socket, protected by a 30 mA residual electrical socket.
indicator lamp
current device. 9. Do not unplug the plug from the wall as a
3. Always use an electrical socket protected means of stopping charging. Off
by a circuit-breaker appropriate for the 10. Immediately stop charging, by locking and
electrical circuit’s current rating. then unlocking the vehicle using the remote
4. The weight of the control unit must not be control key, if the charging cable or wall On
borne by the electrical socket, plug and socket feel burning hot to the touch.
cables. 11. This charging cable includes components
5. Never use this charging cable if it is liable to cause electrical arcing or sparks. Flashing
defective or in any way damaged. Do not expose to flammable vapours.
12. Only use this charging cable with PEUGEOT
vehicles.

POWER CHARGE FAULT Symbol Description

Not connected to the power supply or power is not
available from the infrastructure.

The control unit is currently performing a self-test.

(green) (green) (red)

173
 Practical information

POWER CHARGE FAULT Symbol Description

Connected only to the infrastructure or to the
infrastructure and to the Electric Vehicle (EV) but
no charging in progress.
(green)
Connected to the power supply and to the Electric
Vehicle (EV).
The EV is on charge or in a temperature pre-
(green) (green)
conditioning sequence.

Connected to the power supply and to the Electric

Vehicle (EV).
The EV is waiting for charging or the charging of
(green) (green)
the EV is completed.

Control unit malfunction. No charging allowed.

If an error indicator reappears after a manual reset,
the control unit must be checked by a PEUGEOT
(red)
dealer before the next charge.

The control unit is in diagnostic mode.

(green) (green) (red)

Manual reset procedure
The control unit can be reset by simultaneously disconnecting the charging connector and the wall socket.
Then, reconnect the wall socket first. For more information, refer to the handbook.

174
 Practical information

Charging the traction accidents or serious injuries. ALWAYS make

sure the traction battery has a sufficient
Precautions 7
battery (Rechargeable charge level.
Rechargeable hybrid vehicles have
been developed in accordance with the
hybrid) recommendations for maximum electromagnetic
Low load / Parking field limits established by the ICNIRP
For a full charge, follow the charging procedure
If the outside temperature is negative, (International Commission on Non-Ionizing
without interrupting it, until it stops automatically.
it is recommended not to park your vehicle Radiation Protection - 1998 Guidelines).
Charging may be performed either immediately
outside for several hours at a low load (less Wearers of pacemakers or equivalent
(by default) or deferred.
than 20%). devices should consult a doctor to
Deferred charging is set via the touch
screen or the MYPEUGEOT APP enquire about any applicable precautionary
application. Vehicle in storage for more than measures, or contact the manufacturer of their
When the vehicle is connected, the following 1 month implanted electronic medical device to check that
information is displayed on the instrument panel: In the event of a long period of non-use of it is guaranteed to operate in an environment
– Traction battery charge status (%). the vehicle (beyond 4 weeks) without the compliant with the ICNIRP guidelines.
– Remaining range (miles or km). possibility of charging when restarting, the If in doubt, during charging, do not remain
– Estimated charging time (calculation may take self-discharge may make it impossible to inside or near the vehicle, near the charging
a few seconds). restart if the traction battery charge level cable or the charging unit, even for a short time.
– Charging speed (miles or km gained per hour). is a low or very low, especially at negative
Before charging
After the instrument panel has been put into ambient temperatures. ALWAYS make sure
Depending on the context:
standby mode, this information can be displayed that the traction battery has a charge between
► Have a professional check that the
again by unlocking the vehicle or opening a door. 20% and 40% if you do not plan to use your
electrical system to be used complies with
vehicle for several weeks.
It is also possible to monitor the charging applicable standards and is compatible with
Do not connect the charging cable.
progress using the MYPEUGEOT APP the vehicle.
Always park the vehicle in a place with
application. ► Have a professional electrician install
temperatures between -10°C and 30°C
For more information on Remote functions, a dedicated domestic power socket or
(parking in a place with extreme temperatures
refer to the corresponding section. accelerated charging unit (Wallbox)
can damage the traction battery).
compatible with the vehicle.
Refer to the Accessory battery
Use the charging cable supplied with the
Low load / Driving (Rechargeable hybrid) section for the
vehicle.
Driving when the charge level of the battery disconnection procedure.
For more information, contact a PEUGEOT
traction battery is too low can lead to the
dealer or a qualified workshop.
vehicle breaking down and can lead to

175
 Practical information

During charging ► Press on the rear of the charging flap to open If this is not the case, charging has not started;
As a safety measure, the engine will it and check that there are no foreign bodies on restart the procedure, ensuring that all of the
not start if the charging cable is plugged into the vehicle's charging connector. connections are properly established.
the connector on the vehicle. A warning is The light guides in the flap come on white. The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to
displayed on the instrument panel. Domestic charging (mode 2) indicate that the nozzle is locked.
While charging is in progress, unlocking the Accelerated charging (mode 3)
vehicle will cause the charging to stop.
If no action is taken on one of the openings
(door or boot) or on the charging nozzle, the
vehicle will lock again after 30 seconds and
charging will resume automatically.
Never work under the bonnet:
– Some areas remain very hot, even an hour
after charging ends - risk of burns! ► Follow the accelerated charging unit
– The fan may start at any time - risk of cuts (Wallbox) user instructions.
or strangulation! ► Remove the protective cover from the
charging nozzle.
After charging ► Insert the nozzle into the vehicle's charging
Check that the charging flap is closed. ► First, connect the charging cable from the connector.
Do not leave the cable connected to the control unit to the domestic socket. The start of charging is confirmed by the flashing
domestic power socket - risk of short-circuit When the connection is made, all of the indicator of the green light guides in the flap.
or electrocution in the event of contact with or lamps on the control unit light up, then only the If this is not the case, charging has not
immersion in water! POWER indicator lamp remains on in green. started; restart the procedure ensuring that all
► Remove the protective cover from the connections are properly established.
The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to
Charging procedure charging nozzle.
indicate that the nozzle is locked.
► Insert the nozzle into the vehicle's charging
connector.
Connection Deferred charging
The start of charging is confirmed by the flashing
► Before charging, check that the gear selector By default, the deferred charging start time is set
of the green light guides in the flap and the
is in mode P and the ignition is off, otherwise to midnight.
flashing of the CHARGE indicator lamp in green
charging is impossible. Depending on equipment, this time can be
on the control unit.
changed.

176
 Practical information

Settings
With PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Before disconnecting the nozzle from the
charging connector:
Towing device
Load distribution
7
► In the Energy touch screen menu, ► If the vehicle is locked, unlock it.
► If the vehicle is unlocked, lock it and then ► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
select the Charge page.
unlock it. heaviest items are as close as possible to the
► Set the charging start time.
axle, and the nose weight approaches the
► Press OK. If selective unlocking of the doors is maximum permitted without exceeding it.
The setting is saved in the system. activated, press the unlocking button on Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing
With PEUGEOT Connect Radio or PEUGEOT the remote control twice to disconnect the engine performance. The maximum towable load
Connect Nav nozzle. must be reduced by 10% per 1,000 metres of
You can also programme the deferred
altitude.
charging function at any time from a The red indicator lamp in the flap goes out to
smartphone via the MYPEUGEOT APP confirm that the nozzle is unlocked. Use genuine towing devices and wiring
application. ► Within 30 seconds, remove the charging harnesses approved by PEUGEOT. We
For more information on Remotely operable nozzle. recommend having them fitted by a
additional functions, refer to the corresponding Domestic charging (mode 2) PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
section. If not fitted by a PEUGEOT dealer, they must
The end of charging is confirmed when the
Activation still be fitted in accordance with the vehicle
green CHARGE indicator lamp on the control
manufacturer's instructions.
► After programming the deferred charging, unit comes on fixed and the green light guides in
Important: if the vehicle has a motorised
connect the vehicle to the desired charging the flap come on fixed.
tailgate and Hands-Free Tailgate Access
equipment. ► After disconnection, replace the protective
function, and a towing device has been fitted
► Press this button in the flap within one cover over the nozzle and close the charging
outside the PEUGEOT dealer network, it
minute to activate the deferred charging flap.
is essential to visit a PEUGEOT dealer or
(confirmed by the light guides coming on in ► Disconnect the control unit's charging cable
a qualified workshop to have the detection
blue). from the domestic socket.
system recalibrated - risk of malfunction of the
Accelerated charging (mode 3) Hands-Free Tailgate Access function.
Disconnection
The end of charging is confirmed by the Certain driving or manoeuvring aid functions
accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) and when are automatically deactivated while an
the green light guides in the flap come on fixed. approved towing system is in use.
► After disconnection, replace the nozzle on to For more information about driving with a
the charging unit and close the charging flap. towing device fitted to a trailer and associated
with the Trailer stability assist, refer to the
corresponding section.

177
 Practical information

Comply with the maximum authorised

towable weight, as indicated on your
Towing device with quickly
vehicle's registration certificate, on the detachable towball
manufacturer's label and in the Technical
data section of this guide. Presentation
No tools are required to install or remove this
If using accessories attached to the genuine towing device.
towing device (e.g. bicycle carriers, tow
boxes):
– Comply with the maximum authorised nose
weight.
A. Locked position (the green marks are
– Do not transport more than 4 conventional
opposite each other); the wheel is in contact
bicycles or 2 electric bicycles.
with the towball (no gap).
When loading bicycles onto a bicycle carrier
B. Unlocked position (red mark opposite
on a towball, be sure to place the heaviest
the green mark); the wheel is no longer
bicycles as close as possible to the vehicle.
in contact with the towball (gap of around
5 mm).
Observe the legislation in force in the
country where you are driving. 1. Carrier Affix the enclosed label in a clearly visible
2. Protective plug location, close to the carrier or in the
Vehicle equipped with motorised 3. Connection socket boot.
tailgate with hands-free function 4. Safety eye
(Hands-Free Tailgate Access) 5. Detachable towball Trailers with LED lamps are not
To avoid unintentionally opening the 6. Locking/unlocking wheel compatible with the wiring harness of this
motorised tailgate when operating the towing 7. Security key lock device.
device: 8. Label to note the key references
– Deactivate this function in advance in the
To ensure complete safety while driving
vehicle's configuration menu.
with a Towing device, refer to the
– Or remove the electronic key from the
corresponding section.
recognition zone, with the tailgate closed.

178
 Practical information

Before each use

Verify that the towball is correctly fitted,
After use
When travelling without a trailer or
7
checking the follow points: load carrier, remove the towball and fit the
– The green mark on the wheel is in line with protective plug into the carrier, to provide
the green mark on the towball. clear visibility of the number plate and/or its
– The wheel is in contact with the towball lighting.
(position A).
– The security key lock is closed and the
key removed; the wheel can no longer be
Fitting the towball
operated.
– The towball must not be able to move in
► The wheel 6 rotates a quarter turn anti-
its carrier; test by attempting to shake it with
clockwise; take care to keep your hands clear!
your hand.
If the towball is not locked, the trailer can
become detached - risk of an accident!

During use
Never release the locking system with a
trailer or load carrier on the towball.
Never exceed the maximum authorised
weight for the vehicle - the Gross Train ► Below the rear bumper, remove the protective
Weight or GTW. plug 2 from the carrier 1.
Always comply with the maximum authorised ► Insert the end of the towball 5 into the carrier
load on the towing device: if it is exceeded, 1 and push it upwards; it will lock into position
this device may become detached from the automatically. ► Check that the mechanism has correctly
vehicle - risk of an accident! locked into place (position A).
Before driving, check the headlamp height ► Close the lock 7 using the key.
adjustment and check that the lamps on the ► Remove the key. The key cannot be removed
trailer operate correctly. while the lock is open.
For more information on Headlamp height ► Clip the cap onto the lock.
adjustment, refer to the corresponding
section.

179
 Practical information

► Remove the protective cover from the ► Insert the key into the lock 7. ► Replace the protective plug 2 into the
towball. ► Open the lock using the key. carrier 1.
► Attach the trailer to the towball. ► Stow the towball in its bag to protect it from
► Attach the cable on the trailer to the safety knocks and dirt.
eye 4 on the carrier.
► Insert the trailer plug and rotate it by a Maintenance
quarter turn to connect it to the connection Correct operation is only possible if the towball
socket 3 on the carrier. and its carrier are kept clean.
Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure
Removing the towball jet wash, the towball must be removed and the
► Grasp the trailer's plug, perform a quarter protective plug fitted to the carrier.
turn and pull to disconnect it from the connection
Work on the towing device
socket 3 on the carrier.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
► Detach the trailer's safety cable from the ► Hold the towball 5 firmly in one hand; using qualified workshop.
safety eye 4 on the carrier. the other hand, pull and turn the wheel 6 fully in
► Unhitch the trailer from the towball. a clockwise direction until it stops; do not release
► Replace the protective cover over the towball.
► Remove the cap from the lock and press it
the wheel.
► Extract the towball from the base of its
Roof bars
onto the head of the key. carrier 1.
As a safety measure and to avoid
► Release the wheel; it automatically locks in
damaging the roof, it is essential to use
the unlocked position (position B).

180
 Practical information

transverse roof bars approved for your

vehicle.
Direct fitting on roof Remove the roof bars once they are no longer
needed.
7
Observe the instructions on fitting and use
contained in the guide supplied with the roof Sunroof
bars. Check that the load does not protrude
below the roof bars, so that it does not
Maximum load distributed over the impede movement of the sunroof - risk of
transverse roof bars, for a loading height major damage!
not exceeding 40 cm (except bicycle carrier):
80 kg.
As this value may change, please verify the Snow chains
maximum load quoted in the guide supplied
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve
with the roof bars.
The transverse bars must only be fixed at the traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed
four anchorage points located on the roof frame. when braking.
of the vehicle to the profile of the road to
avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings These points are concealed by the vehicle doors
Snow chains must be fitted only to the
on the vehicle. when the doors are closed.
front wheels. They must never be fitted to
Be sure to refer to national legislation in order The roof bar fixings have a stud which must be
"space-saver" type spare wheels.
to comply with the regulations for transporting inserted into the opening of each anchorage
objects that are longer than the vehicle. point.
Observe the legislation in force in your
Recommendations country relating to the use of snow
Fitting on longitudinal bars Distribute the load uniformly, taking care
to avoid overloading one of the sides.
chains and maximum authorised speeds.

Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close Use only chains designed to be fitted to the type
as possible to the roof. of wheel fitted to the vehicle:
Secure the load firmly. Original tyre size Maximum link size
Drive gently: the vehicle will be more
susceptible to the effects of side winds and its 215/65 R17 9 mm
stability may be affected. 225/55 R18 9 mm
Regularly check the security and tight
205/55 R19 9 mm
The transverse bars must be fixed at the fastening of the roof bars, at least before each
markings located on the longitudinal bars. trip.

181
 Practical information

Rechargeable hybrid vehicles Before any operation, ensure that the

Original tyre size Maximum link size
The use of snow chains is only engine is off and the cooling fan has
235/50 R19 Not suitable for authorised on the front wheels. stopped.
chains The driving mode selector must be on the
4WD position (depending on version). It is essential to remove them when:
For more information on snow chains, contact a
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. – the outside temperature exceeds
10°C.
Installation tips Very cold climate screen – recovery is in progress.
– the speed is above 75 mph (120 km/h).
► To fit the snow chains during a journey, stop (Depending on country of sale)
the vehicle on a flat surface at the side of the This removable device prevents the
road. accumulation of snow around the radiator Fitting
► Apply the parking brake and position any cooling fan.
wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent It consists of two elements to be attached to the
movement of the vehicle. front bumper.
► Fit the snow chains following the instructions
provided by the manufacturer.
► Move off gently and drive for a few moments,
without exceeding 31 mph (50 km/h).
► Stop the vehicle and check that the snow
chains are correctly tightened.

It is strongly recommended that you

practise fitting the snow chains on a level ► Hold the corresponding screen in front of the
and dry surface before setting off. lower grille of the bumper.
► First insert the upper and side fixing brackets
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads In case of difficulty with installation/ into the bumper.
that have been cleared of snow to avoid removal ► Tilt the screen downwards to engage the
damaging the vehicle's tyres and the road Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified lower part of the screen into the bumper.
surface. If the vehicle is fitted with alloy workshop. ► Check that the unit is firmly held by pressing
wheels, check that no part of the chain or its around the edges.
fixings is in contact with the wheel rim. Repeat these operations for the other screen.

182
 Practical information

Removing If a telephone call is in progress at the

time, it will be maintained for around 10
functions, such as the air conditioning and the
heated rear screen.
7
minutes via the audio system’s hands-free The deactivated functions are reactivated
system. automatically as soon as conditions permit.

Exiting the mode Bonnet

These functions are automatically reactivated the
Stop & Start
next time the vehicle is used.
Before doing anything under the bonnet,
To restore the use of these functions
you must switch off the ignition to avoid any
immediately, start the engine and let it run:
risk of the engine restarting automatically.
– For less than 10 minutes, to use the
Take care with objects or clothing that could
► Insert a finger into the notch in the upper part equipment for approximately 5 minutes.
be caught in the blades of the cooling fan
of the screen. – For more than 10 minutes, to use the
or in certain moving components - risk of
► Pull towards you to unclip the unit. equipment for approximately 30 minutes.
strangulation and serious injury!
Repeat these operations for the other screen. Let the engine run for the specified duration to
ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.

Energy economy mode To recharge the battery, avoid repeatedly or

continuously restarting the engine.
This system manages the duration of use of
A flat battery prevents the engine from
certain functions, in order to conserve a sufficient
starting. Rechargeable hybrid vehicles
level of charge in the battery with the ignition off.
For more information on the 12 V battery, Before any work is carried out under the
After switching off the engine and for a maximum
refer to the corresponding section. bonnet, it is essential to switch off the ignition
cumulative period of around 30 minutes, you can
and disconnect the charging connector nozzle
continue to use functions such as the audio and
if it is connected, check that the READY
telematics system, dipped beam headlamps or
courtesy lamps. Load reduction mode indicator lamp is off on the instrument panel
and wait 4 minutes - risk of serious injury!
This system manages the use of certain
Selecting the mode functions according to the level of charge
A confirmation message is displayed when remaining in the battery.
energy economy mode is entered, and the active When the vehicle is being driven, the load
functions are placed on standby. reduction function temporarily deactivates certain

183
 Practical information

The location of the interior bonnet ► Open the left-hand front door. ► Clip the stay in its housing.
release lever prevents the bonnet being ► Pull the interior release lever, located at the ► Lower the bonnet and release it near the end
opened when the left-hand front door is bottom of the door frame, towards you. of its travel.
closed. ► Pull on the bonnet to check that it is locked
correctly.
When the engine is hot, handle the Because of the presence of electrical
exterior safety catch and the bonnet stay equipment under the bonnet, it is strongly
with care (risk of burns), using the protected recommended that exposure to water (rain,
area. washing, etc.) be limited.
When the bonnet is open, take care not to
damage the safety catch.
Do not open the bonnet under very windy
conditions.
Engine compartment
► Lift the exterior safety catch and raise the The engine shown here is an example for
Cooling of the engine when stopped bonnet. illustrative purposes only.
The engine cooling fan may start after The locations of the following components may
the engine has been switched off. vary:
Take care with objects or clothing that – Air filter.
could be caught in the blades of the fan! – Engine oil dipstick.
– Engine oil filler cap.
Petrol engine
Opening

► Unclip the stay from its housing and place it

in the support slot to hold the bonnet open.

Closing
► Hold the bonnet and pull out the stay from the
support slot.

184
 Practical information

Diesel engine If a level drops significantly, have the

corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT
ignition is switched on (for vehicles equipped
with an electric gauge), or using the dipstick.
7
dealer or a qualified workshop. It is normal to top up the oil level between two
services (or oil changes). It is recommended
The fluids must comply with the
that you check the level, and top up if necessary,
Manufacturer's requirements and with
every 3,000 miles (5,000 km).
the vehicle's engine.
In order to maintain the reliability of the
Take care when working under the engine and emissions control system,
bonnet, as certain areas of the engine never use additives in the engine oil.
1. Screenwash fluid reservoir may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the
2. Engine coolant reservoir cooling fan could start at any time (even with Checking using the dipstick
3. Brake fluid reservoir the ignition off).
For the location of the dipstick, please refer
4. Battery/Fuses to the illustration of the corresponding engine
5. Remote earth point (-) Used products compartment.
6. Fusebox ► Grasp the dipstick by its coloured grip and
7. Air filter Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or pull it out completely.
8. Engine oil filler cap fluids with the skin. ► Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean,
9. Engine oil dipstick Most of these fluids are harmful to health and lint-free cloth.
very corrosive.
Diesel fuel system
This system is under very high pressure. Do not discard used oil or fluids into
All work must be carried out only by a sewers or onto the ground.
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop Empty used oil into the containers reserved
for this purpose at a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Checking levels ► Reinsert the dipstick and push fully down,
then pull it out again to visually check the oil
Check all of the following levels regularly in Engine oil level: the correct level is between marks A (max)
accordance with the Manufacturer's service and B (min).
The level is checked, with the engine
schedule. Top them up if required, unless Do not start the engine if the level is:
having been switched off for at least 30
otherwise indicated. – above mark A: contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
minutes and on level ground, either using the oil
level indicator in the instrument panel when the a qualified workshop.

185
 Practical information

– below mark B: top up the engine oil Brake fluid Once the pressure has dropped, remove the cap
immediately. and top up to the required level.
The level of this fluid should be close to
the "MAX" mark. If not, check the brake
Oil grade
Before topping up or changing the pads for wear.
Screenwash fluid
To know how often the brake fluid should be Top up to the required level when
engine oil, check that the oil is suitable
replaced, refer to the manufacturer's servicing necessary.
for your engine and complies with the
schedule. Capacity of the tank:
recommendations in the service schedule
– 5.3 litres for "very cold climate" versions.
supplied with the vehicle (or available
Clean the cap before removing it to refill. – 2.2 litres for other versions.
from your PEUGEOT dealer or qualified
Use only DOT4 brake fluid from a sealed
workshop).
container. Fluid specification
Use of non-recommended oil may invalidate
The fluid must be topped up with a pre-mixed
your warranty in the event of engine failure.
Engine coolant product.
In winter (temperatures below zero), a fluid
Topping up the engine oil level It is normal to top up this fluid between
containing an anti-freeze agent which is
two services.
For the location of the engine oil filler cap, please appropriate for the temperature conditions
The check and top-up must only be done with
refer to the corresponding engine compartment must be used in order to protect the system's
the engine cold.
illustration. components (pump, tank, ducts, jets).
A level of coolant that is too low risks causing
► Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any spills
major damage to the engine; the coolant level Filling with pure water is prohibited in all
on engine components (risk of fire).
must be close to the "MAX" mark without ever circumstances (risk of freezing,
► Wait a few minutes before checking the level
going above it. limescale, etc.).
again using the dipstick.
If the level is close to or below the "MIN" mark, it
► Top up the level if necessary.
is essential to top it up.
► After checking the level, carefully screw the
When the engine is hot, the temperature of the
Diesel fuel additive (Diesel
oil filler cap back on and replace the dipstick in
its tube.
coolant is regulated by the fan. with particle filter)
As the cooling system is pressurised, wait at On reaching the minimum level in the
The oil level indication displayed on the least one hour after switching off the engine particle filter additive tank, this warning
instrument panel when the ignition is before carrying out any work. lamp comes on fixed, accompanied by an
switched on is not valid for 30 minutes In order to avoid the risk of scalding if you need audible signal and a warning message.
following an addition of oil. to top up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around
the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to
allow the pressure to drop.

186
 Practical information

Topping up
The topping up of this additive must be carried
braking system, PEUGEOT selects and offers
very specific products.
Air filter
Depending on the environment and the
7
out quickly. use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere,
Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop.
12 V battery city driving), change it twice as often, if
necessary.
The battery does not require any
AdBlue (BlueHDi)
® maintenance.
Oil filter
Check regularly that the terminals are correctly
An alert is triggered when the reserve level is Change the oil filter each time the engine
tightened (versions without quick-release
reached. oil is changed.
terminals) and that the connections are clean.
For more information on the Indicators and in
particular the AdBlue range indicators, refer to For more information on the precautions Particle filter (Diesel)
the corresponding section. to take before any work on the 12 V The start of clogging of the particle filter is
To avoid the vehicle being immobilised in battery, refer to the corresponding section. indicated by the temporary lighting of this
accordance with regulations, you must top up the warning lamp, accompanied by an alert
AdBlue tank. Versions equipped with Stop & Start are message.
For more information on AdBlue® (BlueHDi), fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of As soon as traffic conditions allow, regenerate
and in particular the supply of AdBlue, refer to specific technology and specification. the filter by driving at a speed of at least 37 mph
the corresponding section. Its replacement should be carried out only by (60 km/h), with an engine speed above 2,500
a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. rpm, for about 15 minutes (until the warning lamp
Checks goes out).
If it is not possible to reach 37 mph (60 km/h),
Unless otherwise indicated, check these Passenger compartment leave the engine running at idle for about 15
components in accordance with the filter minutes, then drive with an engine speed above
Manufacturer's service schedule and according
Depending on the environment and the 2,500 rpm for 15 minutes.
to your engine.
use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere,
Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT Do not switch off the engine until the filter
city driving), change it twice as often, if
dealer or a qualified workshop. is fully regenerated; repeated intervals
necessary.
can degrade the engine oil prematurely.
Only use products recommended by
A clogged passenger compartment filter Regenerating the filter while the vehicle is
PEUGEOT or products of equivalent
can adversely affect air conditioning stationary is not recommended.
quality and specification.
system performance and generate
In order to optimise the operation of
undesirable odours.
components as important as those in the

187
 Practical information

If the warning lamp stays on, this checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The pressures indicated on the tyre pressure
indicates a low Diesel additive level. workshop. label are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have driven
For more information on Checking levels, for more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles
For more information on the Electric
refer to the corresponding section. (10 kilometres) at over 31 mph (50 km/h), add
parking brake, refer to the
0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the values indicated on the
corresponding section.
Following prolonged operation of the label.
vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you Under-inflation increases energy
may, in exceptional circumstances, notice Brake pads consumption. Non-compliant tyre
water vapour coming from the exhaust while Brake wear depends on the style of pressures cause tyres to wear prematurely
accelerating. These emissions have no driving, particularly in the case of vehicles and have an adverse effect on the vehicle's
impact on the vehicle’s behaviour and the used in town, over short distances. It may be road holding - risk of accident!
environment. necessary to have the condition of the brakes
checked, even between vehicle services. Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces the
New vehicle Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the braking and road holding performance of the
During the first few particle filter brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads vehicle. Regularly check the condition of the
regeneration operations, you may notice a are worn. tyres (tread and sidewalls) and rims as well as
"burning" smell. This is perfectly normal. the presence of the valve caps.
After washing the vehicle, moisture, or in
When the wear indicators no longer appear set
wintry conditions, ice can form on the
back from the tread, the depth of the grooves is
Manual gearbox brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may
less than 1.6 mm; replace the tyres as soon as
be reduced. Gently dab the brakes to dry and
The gearbox does not require any possible.
defrost them.
maintenance (no oil change). Using different size wheels and tyres from those
specified can affect the lifetime of tyres, wheel
Automatic gearbox Brake disc wear rotation, ground clearance, the speedometer
/ The gearbox does not require reading and have an adverse effect on road
For information on checking brake disc
any maintenance (no oil holding.
wear, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
change). Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles
qualified workshop.
can cause the ESC to mistime.
Electric parking brake Wheels and tyres Always mark the direction of rotation on the tyres
This system does not require any routine that will be stored when fitting winter or summer
The inflation pressure of all tyres,
servicing. However, in the event of a tyres. Store them in a cool, dry place and away
including the spare wheel, must be
problem, do not hesitate to have the system from direct exposure to the sun's rays.
checked on "cold” tyres.

188
 Practical information

Winter or 4-seasons tyres can be

identified by this symbol on their
Reduction) with a Diesel Particle Filter (DPF) for
the treatment of exhaust gases.
In the event of a confirmed SCR system
malfunction, it is essential to visit a
7
sidewalls. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
SCR system After 685 miles (1,100 km), a device is
Shock absorbers Using a liquid called AdBlue® that contains automatically activated to prevent the engine
It is not easy for drivers to detect when urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of from starting.
shock absorbers are worn. Nevertheless, the nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and In both cases, a range indicator indicates
the shock absorbers have a major impact on water, which are harmless to health and the the distance that can be travelled before the
road holding and braking performance. environment. vehicle is stopped.
For your safety and driving comfort, it is The AdBlue® is contained in a special
important to have them regularly checked by a tank holding about 17 litres. Freezing of the AdBlue®
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Its capacity allows a driving range of AdBlue® freezes at temperatures below
approximately 4,000 miles (6,500 km), which around -11°C.
Timing and accessory kits may vary considerably depending on your The SCR system includes a heater for the
The timing and accessory kits are used driving style. AdBlue® tank, allowing you to continue driving
from the time the engine is started until it An alert system is triggered once the reserve in very cold conditions.
is switched off. It is normal for them to wear over level is reached: it is then possible to drive for a
time. further 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the tank is
A faulty timing or accessory kit can damage empty and the vehicle is immobilised. Supply of AdBlue®
the engine, rendering it unusable. Observe the It is recommended that the AdBlue® be topped
For more information on the Warning
recommended replacement frequency, stated in up as soon as the first alert is issued indicating
and indicator lamps and the associated
distance travelled or time elapsed, whichever is that the reserve level has been reached.
alerts, or the Indicators, please refer to the
reached first. For the correct operation of the SCR
corresponding sections.
system:
AdBlue® (BlueHDi) Once the AdBlue® tank is empty, a device – Use only AdBlue® fluid that meets the ISO
required by law prevents the engine from 22241 standard.
To respect the environment and ensure
being restarted. – Never transfer AdBlue® to another container
compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without
If the SCR system is faulty, the level of as it would lose its purity.
adversely affecting the performance or fuel
emissions from the vehicle will no longer meet – Never dilute AdBlue® with water.
consumption of its Diesel engines, PEUGEOT
has taken the decision to equip its vehicles with the Euro 6 standard and the vehicle starts
You can obtain AdBlue® from a PEUGEOT
a system that combines SCR (Selective Catalytic polluting the environment.
dealer or a qualified workshop, as well as service

189
 Practical information

stations equipped with AdBlue® pumps specially Store AdBlue® out of the reach of ► Press the "START/STOP" button to switch off
designed for passenger vehicles. children, in its original container. the engine.

Recommendations on storage
Procedure
AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C and deteriorates
above +25°C. Containers should be stored in a Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure that
cool area and protected from direct sunlight. the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface.
Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept for In wintry conditions, ensure that the temperature
at least a year. of the vehicle is above -11°C. Otherwise the
If the fluid has frozen, it can be used once it has AdBlue® may be frozen and so cannot be poured
completely thawed out at room temperature. into the tank. Park the vehicle in a warmer area
for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried
Never store AdBlue® containers in your out.
vehicle.
Never pour the AdBlue® into the Diesel
fuel tank.
Precautions for use
AdBlue® is a urea-based solution. This fluid is If any AdBlue® is splashed, or if there are
non-flammable, colourless and odourless (when any spillages on the bodywork, rinse
kept in a cool place). immediately with cold water or wipe with a
In the event of contact with the skin, wash the damp cloth.
affected area with soap and running water. In the If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off using a
event of contact with the eyes, immediately rinse ► Turn the blue cap of the AdBlue® tank anti-
sponge and hot water.
the eyes with large amounts of water or with an clockwise and remove it.
eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. Seek ► With a container of AdBlue®: after checking
Important: in the event of a top-up after the expiry date, read the instructions on the
medical attention if you feel a persistent burning
an AdBlue breakdown, you must wait label carefully before pouring the contents of the
sensation or irritation.
about 5 minutes before switching on the container into the vehicle's AdBlue® tank.
If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth
ignition, without opening the driver's door, ► With an AdBlue® pump: insert the nozzle and
with clean water and then drink plenty of water.
unlocking the vehicle or bringing the fill the tank until the nozzle automatically cuts
In certain conditions (high temperature, for
electronic key into the passenger out.
example), the risk of release of ammonia cannot
compartment.
be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. Ammonia
Switch on the ignition, then wait for 10
vapours have an irritant effect on mucous
seconds before starting the engine.
membranes (eyes, nose and throat).

190
 Practical information

In order not to overfill the AdBlue® tank:

– Add between 10 and 13 litres using
With a manual gearbox and
electric parking brake
Within 5 seconds:
► Depress and hold the brake pedal, then
7
AdBlue® containers. observe this order: switch off the engine and
– Stop after the nozzle’s first automatic cut- /
move the push selector forwards or backwards.
out, if you are refilling at a service station. ► Release the brake pedal, then switch on the
The system only registers AdBlue® To release them ignition.
intermediate top-ups of 5 litres or more. ► Place your foot on the brake and press the
► With the engine running and while depressing
electric parking brake control to release it.
the brake pedal, move the gear selector to the
If the AdBlue tank is completely empty
® ► Release the brake pedal, then switch off the
neutral position.
– which is confirmed by the message ignition.
► While depressing the brake pedal, switch off
“Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible” – it is the engine. A message is displayed on the
essential to add at least 10 litres. ► Release the brake pedal, then switch on the instrument panel to confirm the unlocking
Top-up detection may not be instantaneous ignition. of the wheels for 15 minutes.
after addition. It may take a few minutes of ► While depressing the brake pedal, press the When the vehicle is free-wheeling, the
driving before the top-up detection is effective. control to release the parking brake. audio system cannot be updated (message
► Release the brake pedal, then switch off the displayed on the instrument panel).
ignition.
Free-wheeling Reverting to normal operation After 15 minutes or reverting to normal
In certain situations, it is necessary to put the operation
► While depressing the brake pedal, restart the
vehicle into free-wheeling mode (e.g. towing, on engine and apply the parking brake. ► While depressing the brake pedal, restart the
a rolling road, automatic car wash (Wash mode), engine and select mode P.
rail or sea transport). With an automatic gearbox
The procedure varies according to the type of With an automatic gearbox
(type 1) and electric parking
gearbox and parking brake. (type 2) and electric parking
brake
Never leave the vehicle unattended with brake
the vehicle into free-wheeling mode. /

Release procedure
► With the vehicle stationary and the engine
running, depress the brake pedal and select
mode N.

191
 Practical information

Release procedure Advice on care and and mud/salts (in wet or cold areas). These
substances can be highly corrosive.
► With the vehicle stationary and the engine
running, select mode N and switch off the
maintenance Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
ignition. workshop for advice on removing stubborn
Within 5 seconds: General recommendations stains requiring special products (such as tar
► Switch on the ignition again. Observe the following recommendations to avoid or insect removers).
► While depressing the brake pedal, move the damaging the vehicle. Preferably, have paint touch-ups performed
push selector forwards or backwards to confirm by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
Exterior
mode N. workshop.
► While depressing the brake pedal, press the Never use a high-pressure jet wash in
control lever to release the parking brake. the engine compartment - risk of
Interior
► Release the brake pedal, switch off the damaging the electrical components!
When washing the vehicle, never use a
ignition. Do not wash the vehicle in bright sunshine or
water hose or high-pressure jet to clean
If the 5-second time limit is exceeded, the extremely cold conditions.
the interior.
gearbox engages mode P; it is then necessary to
Liquids carried in cups or other open
restart the procedure. When washing the vehicle in an containers can spill, presenting a risk of
Reverting to normal operation automatic roller-brush car wash, be sure damage to the instruments and controls and
► While depressing the brake pedal, restart the to lock the doors and, depending on version, the controls located on the centre console. Be
engine. move the electronic key away and deactivate vigilant!
the "hands-free" function (Hands-Free To clean instrument panels, touch screens
Keyless Entry and Start Tailgate Access). or other displays, wipe gently with a soft,
You must not depress the brake pedal When using a pressure washer, keep the jet dry cloth. Do not use products (e.g. alcohol,
while switching the ignition on again, then nozzle at a minimum distance of 30 cm from disinfectant) or soapy water directly on these
switching it off. If you do, the engine will start, the vehicle (particularly when cleaning areas surfaces - risk of damage!
requiring you to restart the procedure. containing chipped paint, sensors or seals).
Promptly clean up any stains containing
chemicals liable to damage the vehicle's
paintwork (including tree resin, bird
droppings, insect secretions, pollen and tar).
Depending on the environment, clean the
vehicle frequently to remove salty deposits
(in coastal areas), soot (in industrial areas)

192
 Practical information

Bodywork
High-gloss paint
Never select the programme with hot wax
finish.
Textile
The dashboard, door panels and seats may
7
Never use high-pressure lances equipped
contain parts made of textile material.
with brushes - risk of scratching paint!
Do not use abrasive products, solvents, Maintenance
Never apply glossy polish or preservatives to
petrol or oil to clean the bodywork.
the bodywork or alloy wheels; these products
Never use an abrasive sponge to clean Do not use aggressive cleaning products
irreversibly reveal glossy or spotted areas.
stubborn stains - risk of scratching the (e.g. alcohol, solvent or ammonia).
paintwork! Do not use steam-cleaning systems - risk of
Do not apply polish in strong sunshine, or to Choose high-pressure wash, or at least affecting the adhesion of the fabrics!
plastic or rubber parts. high-flow water jet.
Rinse the vehicle with demineralised water.
Remove dust from the textile parts
Only a clean microfibre cloth is recommended
Use a soft cloth and soapy water or a pH regularly with a dry cloth, soft brush or
for wiping the vehicle; pass it over the vehicle
neutral product. vacuum cleaner.
without rubbing.
Gently wipe the bodywork with a clean Rub down the textile parts once per year with
Carefully wipe off any fuel spilt on the
microfibre cloth. a clean, damp cloth. After leaving overnight to
bodywork using a soft cloth, then allow to dry.
Apply polish with the vehicle clean and dry. dry, brush with a soft-bristled brush.
Clean off minor marks (for example, finger
Comply with the instructions for use stated on
marks), using a maintenance product
the product. Stain removal
recommended by PEUGEOT.
Textured paint Do not rub the stain or it may spread or
Decals you may cause the substance to
This type of paint reacts under the effect of
(Depending on version) penetrate the surface.
light, through variations in appearance and
finish that highlight the lines and contours of the Do not use a high-pressure washer to
vehicle. Its varnish is enriched with particles that clean the vehicle - risk of damaging or Act quickly by reducing the stain from its
remain visible and create a unique satin effect detaching the decals! edges inwards.
with relief. Its slightly granular texture gives it a Remove as much substance or solids as
surprising touch. possible using a spoon or spatula, and
Use a high-flow hose (temperature
remove as much liquid as possible using
Never attempt to clean without water. between 25°C and 40°C).
absorbent paper.
Never clean your vehicle in an automatic Place the jet of water perpendicular to the
roller-brush car wash. surface to be cleaned.
Rinse the vehicle with demineralised water.

193
 Practical information

Product/Procedure to use depending Do not clean leather using unsuitable

on the type of stain: cleaning agents such as solvents,
– Grease, oil and ink: clean with a pH-neutral detergents, petrol or pure alcohol.
detergent. When cleaning items partly made from
– Vomit: clean with sparkling mineral water. leather, take care not to damage the other
– Blood: spread flour over the stain and allow materials with the specific leather product.
to dry; remove with a slightly damp cloth.
– Mud: allow to dry and then remove with a Before cleaning greasy stains or liquids,
slightly damp cloth. quickly mop up any surplus.
– Cake, chocolate, ice cream: clean with Before cleaning, wipe off any residues liable
lukewarm water. to scuff the leather, using a cloth that has
– Sugary and/or alcoholic drinks: clean with been dampened with demineralised water
lukewarm water, or lemon juice if the stain is and thoroughly wrung out.
persistent. Clean leather using a soft cloth moistened
– Hair gel, coffee, tomato sauce, vinegar: with soapy water or a pH-neutral product.
clean with lukewarm water and lemon juice. Dry with a soft, dry cloth.
For solid substances, then use a soft brush or
vacuum cleaner.
For liquid substances, then use a damp
microfibre cloth and then dry with another
cloth.

Leather
Leather is a natural product. Appropriate regular
care is essential for its durability.
It must be protected and nourished using a
specific leather product, to keep it supple and
preserve its original appearance.

194
 In the event of a breakdown

Warning triangle
This reflective and dismantlable device is to be
Assembling and placing the
triangle
For more information on Refuelling and
on Misfuel prevention (Diesel), refer to
8
the corresponding section.
installed on the side of the road when a vehicle
is broken down or damaged. 1.5 BlueHDi engines
Before getting out of the vehicle ► Switch on the ignition (without starting the
Turn on the hazard warning lamps, then engine).
put on the safety vest to assemble and install ► Wait around 1 minute and switch off the
the triangle. ignition.
► Operate the starter motor to start the engine.
If the engine does not start at the first attempt,
Storage compartment do not keep trying, but restart the procedure.

Tool kit
For versions supplied with a triangle as original
Set of tools supplied with the vehicle.
equipment, refer to the illustration above.
Its content depends on your vehicle's equipment:
For other versions, refer to the assembly
– Temporary puncture repair kit.
instructions provided with the triangle.
– Spare wheel.
► Put the triangle in place behind the vehicle,
as required by local legislation.
Accessing the tools
Running out of fuel
There is a compartment in the interior trim of the (Diesel)
tailgate to store a warning triangle.
► After opening the tailgate, release the cover With Diesel engines, the fuel system must be
by turning the screw a quarter turn to the left. primed if you run out of fuel.
Before starting to prime the system, it is
essential to put at least 5 litres of Diesel into the
fuel tank.

195
 In the event of a breakdown

With temporary puncture repair kit Accessing the tools

Some of the tools are stored beneath the floor

► Unclip the two fixings to open its cover. against the boot sill.
The left-hand box contains the wheelbrace and
With spare wheel its extension piece.
The tool kit is stored in the boot, under the floor. The right-hand box contains the wheel chocks
To access it: and the towing eye.
Versions with 2-position boot floor: To access it:
► Open the boot. ► Open the boot.
► Place the adjustable boot floor in the high ► Fold the concertina panels.
position. ► Install the third row seats.
► Lift the boot floor past the two retractable ► Unclip the required tools from the boot sill
stops. trim.
► Place the boot floor onto these two stops to
hold it up.
Versions with articulated boot mat
(Rechargeable hybrid):
► Unclip the storage box by pulling it upwards.
► Open the boot.
► Unclip the two fixings to open its cover.
► Unfold the articulated boot mat by pulling its
handle until it is fully opened.

196
 In the event of a breakdown

With temporary puncture repair kit The tool box is installed at the centre of the
spare wheel beneath the vehicle.
For more information on Towing the vehicle
and using the removable towing eye, refer to the 8
It contains the jack and the wheel bolt cover corresponding section.
removal tool.
► First, access the spare wheel. With temporary puncture repair kit
For further information on the Spare wheel, Kit 1
please refer to the corresponding section.
► Press the tab to unlock the cover.
► While keeping the tab pressed in, slide the
cover to the middle and remove it.
Model without storage box
This kit, stored in a bag, is installed behind the
second row left-hand seat.
List of tools
► Fold the seat backrest onto the cushion to
access the bag.
Model with storage box
This kit is installed in the storage box, located in Kit 2
front of the second row left-hand seat.
► Open the storage box cover to access the kit.

With spare wheel

1. Chocks to immobilise the vehicle (depending

on equipment)
2. Socket for the wheel security bolts (located in
the glove box) (depending on equipment) 4. 12 V compressor with cartridge of sealant
To adapt the wheelbrace to the special and speed limit sticker
‘security’ bolts. For temporary repair of a tyre and to adjust
3. Removable towing eye the tyre pressure.

197
 In the event of a breakdown

For more information on the Temporary

puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding
8. Temporary puncture
section. repair kit
With spare wheel Wheelbrace extension Visit this link to view explanatory videos:
For loosening/tightening the spare wheel http://q-r.to/bagGl9
carrier winch cable nut.
For more information on the Spare wheel, refer
to the corresponding section.

These tools are specific to the vehicle

and may vary according to the level of
Made up of a compressor and a sealant
equipment.
cartridge, it allows you to carry out a temporary
Do not use them for any other purpose.
repair of the tyre so that you can drive to the
nearest garage.
The jack must only be used to change a
It is designed to repair most punctures located
wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre.
on the tyre tread.
Do not use any jack other than the one
5. Wheelbrace supplied with the vehicle. The vehicle's electric system allows the
For removing the wheel trim and the wheel If the vehicle does not have its original jack, connection of the compressor to the 12 V
bolts. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified power supply for long enough to repair a tyre
6. Jack with integrated handle workshop to obtain the one that was intended after a puncture.
To raise the vehicle. by the manufacturer.
7. Wheel bolt cap removal tool (depending on The jack meets European standards, as Only the 12 V socket located at the front
equipment) defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/ of the vehicle can be used to power the
For removing the wheel bolt head finishers on CE. compressor.
alloy wheels. The jack does not require any maintenance.
For more information on the Tool kit,
refer to the corresponding section.

198
 In the event of a breakdown

Tyre inflation pressures are indicated on

this label.
Connecting kit 2
8
For more information on Identification
markings, particularly this label, refer to the
corresponding section.
► Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be
repaired, and place it in a clean place.

Should the pressure of one or more tyres

be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise
the under-inflation detection system. ► Remove the transparent cap from the bottle
For more information on Tyre under-inflation of sealant.
detection, refer to the corresponding section. ► Lift the protective cover before installing the
bottle of sealant on the compressor.
► Turn the bottle of sealant over and screw it a
Repair procedure quarter turn into the compressor.
► Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be ► Connect the pipe from the bottle of sealant to
Do not remove any foreign body
repaired, and place it in a clean place. the valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten
(e.g. nail, screw) which has penetrated
firmly.
the tyre.
► Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor.
► Park the vehicle without obstructing traffic ► Connect the pipe from the compressor to the
and apply the parking brake. bottle of sealant.
► Follow the safety instructions (hazard Repairing the tyre
warning lamps, warning triangle, high visibility
► Check that the compressor switch is in
jacket, etc.) according to the legislation in force
position "O".
in the country in which you are driving.
► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under
► Switch the ignition off.
the compressor.
Connecting kit 1 ► Connect the compressor's electric plug to the
► Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor.
► Connect the pipe from the compressor to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten firmly.

199
 In the event of a breakdown

► Remove the kit. • If the tyre pressure is correct, drive a second

► Affix the speed limit sticker. ► Refit the cap on the valve. time for approximately 3 miles (5 kilometres)
► Remove and store the bottle of sealant. at reduced speed (between 12 and 37 mph
(20 and 60 km/h)), stop then check again
The sealant product is harmful if
the tyre pressure using the kit to confirm the
swallowed and causes irritation to the
effective repair of the tyre.
The speed limit sticker must be affixed eyes.
inside the vehicle in the area close to the Keep this product out of the reach of children. With a tyre repaired using this type of kit,
driver, to remind them that a wheel is in The use-by date of the fluid is marked on the do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
temporary use. bottle. (80 km/h) and do not drive more than
After use, do not discard the bottle into the 125 miles (200 km).
► Switch the ignition on. environment; take it to a PEUGEOT dealer or You must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
an authorised waste disposal site. qualified workshop to have the repair checked
Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of and the tyre changed.
sealant, available from a PEUGEOT dealer or
a qualified workshop.
Checking/adjusting tyre
pressures
► Switch on the compressor by moving the The compressor can be used, without injecting
switch to position "I" until the tyre pressure sealant, to check and, if necessary, adjust the
reaches 2 bar. The sealant product is injected tyre pressures.
under pressure into the tyre; do not disconnect ► Remove the valve cap from the tyre and keep
the pipe from the valve during this operation (risk it in a clean place.
of blowback). ► Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor.
► Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten
If after approximately 7 minutes, the
firmly.
pressure of 2 bar is not reached, this ► Drive immediately for approximately 3 miles
► Check that the compressor switch is in
indicates that the tyre is not repairable; (5 kilometres) at reduced speed (between
position "O".
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified 12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)) to plug the
► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under
workshop for assistance. puncture.
the compressor.
► Stop to check the repair and the tyre
► Move the switch to position "O". ► Connect the compressor's electric plug to the
pressure using the kit:
► Disconnect the compressor's electric plug vehicle's 12 V socket.
• If the tyre pressure is incorrect, contact a
from the vehicle's 12 V socket. ► Switch the ignition on.
PEUGEOT dealer to have the tyre changed.

200
 In the event of a breakdown

► Start the compressor by placing the switch at

position "I" and adjust the pressure to the value
► Position the fastening device (nut and bolt) in
the middle of the wheel.
8
shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure label. To ► Tighten the central nut sufficiently to retain
deflate: press the black button located on the the wheel correctly.
compressor pipe, near the valve connection. ► Put the tool box back in place in the middle of
the wheel and clip it in place.
If after 7 minutes the pressure of 2 bar is
not reached, the tyre is damaged;
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
Accessing the spare wheel
workshop for assistance.

► Once the correct pressure is reached, put the

The spare wheel is stored in the boot, under the
switch in position "O".
floor.
► Remove the kit and stow it.
To access the spare wheel, first refer to the Tool
► Refit the cap on the valve.
kit section.

Spare wheel Depending on version, the spare wheel

may be a standard size steel or alloy
wheel.
Visit this link to view explanatory videos:
In some countries, it is a ‘space saver’ wheel.
http://q-r.to/bagGl9

Removing the spare wheel

► Slacken the central nut.
► Remove the fastening device (nut and bolt). The spare wheel is held by a winch system
► Lift the spare wheel towards you from the underneath the rear of the vehicle.
rear.
Only a "space-saver" type spare wheel
Accessing the spare wheel ► Take the wheel out of the boot.
may be fixed underneath the vehicle.
Putting the spare wheel back in place
► Put the spare wheel back in place in its
housing.
► Slacken the nut on the bolt by a few turns.

201
 In the event of a breakdown

Removing the spare wheel Storing the tools

► Remove the wheel/box unit through the rear

of the vehicle.
► Fold up the concertina panel and install ► Straighten the spare wheel to access the tool ► Replace the appropriate tools in the box and
the third row seat, on the left-hand side (if the box (A). close the cover.
vehicle is equipped with it). ► Place the tool box on the ground.
► Lift the pre-cut section of carpet to release ► Insert the connecting piece into the tool box
the spare wheel fixing winch nut. hole (B - C).
► With extension piece 8 placed on the end ► Reel in the winch by loosening the winch
of wheelbrace 5, "tighten" the nut to unreel the control nut with wheelbrace 5 and extension
winch cable until the spare wheel is flat on the piece 8: the nut should rotate freely once the
ground. Unwind the length required to access cable is completely reeled in.
the wheel easily. ► Store the rest of the tools in the storage
areas in the boot sill trim.

The punctured wheel cannot be secured

beneath the vehicle; it must be stored in
► Detach the connecting piece from the cover the boot (use a cover to protect the inside of
of the tool box (B - C). the boot).
► Pass the connecting piece through the wheel
hub to release it (D).

202
 In the event of a breakdown

Putting the winch and spare wheel

back in place
► Straighten the wheel.
► Pass the connecting piece through the wheel
8
hub (A).

► Raise the wheel/box unit underneath the

vehicle, by "loosening" the winch control nut with
wheelbrace 5 and extension piece 8.
► Place the appropriate tools in the box and ► Tighten fully. When the cable is completely
close the cover. ► Insert the connecting piece into the tool box reeled in, turning the nut no longer encounters
► Place the tool box on the ground. hole (B - C). resistance.
► Centre and position the spare wheel on the ► Check that the wheel is properly flattened
When the spare wheel is fitted in place of tool box (D). against the floor.
a wheel with a punctured tyre, the winch
and tool box must be placed beneath the
Removing a wheel
vehicle again before restarting.
Wheel with wheel trim
When removing the wheel, first remove
the wheel trim by pulling at the valve aperture
using the wheelbrace.
When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel
trim, starting by placing its aperture in line
with the valve and then pushing it into place
all round its edge with the palm of your hand.
► Insert the centring guide into the wheel hub.
► Place the wheel/box unit beneath the rear of
the vehicle.

203
 In the event of a breakdown

Parking the vehicle

Immobilise the vehicle where it does
not obstruct traffic: the ground must be level,
stable and non-slippery. ► To remove the wheel bolt cover on each of
With a manual gearbox, engage first gear the bolts, use tool 7 (alloy wheels).
to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake, ► Fit security socket 2 on wheelbrace 5 to
unless it is set to automatic mode, and switch slacken the security bolt.
off the ignition. ► Slacken the other bolts using the
With an automatic gearbox, select mode P wheelbrace 5 only.
to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake, Never use an impact wrench on the
unless it is set to automatic mode, and switch security bolt socket.
► Extend jack 6 until its head comes into
off the ignition.
contact with jacking point A or B; contact area A
Check that the parking brake indicator lamps
or B on the vehicle must be properly inserted
on the instrument panel are on fixed.
into the central part of the head of the jack.
The occupants must get out of the vehicle
► Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
and wait where they are safe.
space between the wheel and the ground to
If necessary, place a chock under the wheel
easily admit the spare (not punctured) wheel.
diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed.
Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a Ensure that the jack is stable. If the
jack; use an axle stand. ground is slippery or loose, the jack may
slip or collapse - risk of injury!
► Place the foot of jack 6 on the ground and Take care to position the jack strictly at
ensure that it is directly below the front A or one of the jacking points A or B under the
rear B jacking point on the underbody, whichever vehicle, ensuring that the head of the jack is
is closest to the wheel to be changed. centred under the contact area on the vehicle.
Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the
vehicle and/or of the jack collapsing - risk of
injury!

204
 In the event of a breakdown

► Remove the bolts and store them in a clean ► Tighten the security bolt using the
place. ► Fit the wheel on the hub. wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 2.
► Remove the wheel. ► Screw in the bolts by hand as far as possible. ► Tighten the other bolts using the
► Pre-tighten the security bolt using the wheelbrace 5 only.
Fitting a wheel wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 2. ► Refit the bolt covers to each of the bolts
► Pre-tighten the other bolts using the (depending on equipment).
Fitting a steel or "space-saver" type wheelbrace 5 only. ► Store the tools.
spare wheel
After changing a wheel
Store the punctured wheel in the boot or,
depending on version, remove the central cover
first to store it beneath the floor in place of the
spare wheel.

If the vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, the With a non-standard or 'space-saver'
washers A do not make contact with the steel spare wheel
or "space-saver" type spare wheel. The wheel
is held in place by the conical contact surface
► Lower the vehicle again fully.
B of each bolt.
► Fold jack 6 and remove it.

205
 In the event of a breakdown

Deactivate certain driving aid functions Never look too closely at the light beam It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet
(Active Safety Brake, Adaptive cruise control, of LED technology lamps - risk of serious (UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the
etc.). eye injury! headlamp.
Do not exceed the maximum authorised Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or the maximum of the same type and specification. To avoid
distance of 50 miles (80 km). lighting imbalance, replace the bulbs in pairs.
Driving with more than one spare wheel of
this type is prohibited. Refitting the lamp units
The wheel trim from the replaced wheel must Perform the operations in the reverse
not be refitted. order to dismantling.

Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified

workshop. The headlamps have polycarbonate Light-emitting diode (LED)
Have the tightening of the spare wheel's bolts lenses with a protective coating: headlamps and lamps
and its tyre pressure checked. – Do not clean them with a dry or abrasive Depending on version, the affected types of
Have the punctured tyre examined. After cloth, nor with detergent or solvent headlamps/lamps are:
inspection, the technician will advise you on products. – LED technology headlamps.
whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must – Use a sponge and soapy water or a pH – Full LED technology headlamps.
be replaced. neutral product. – Direction indicator side repeaters.
– When using a high-pressure washer on – Side spotlamps.
persistent marks, do not keep the lance – Brake lamps.
Changing a bulb directed towards the headlamps, lamps or – LED technology rear lamps.
their edges for too long, so as not to damage – Third brake lamp.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low their protective coating and seals. – Number plate lamps.
temperature or humidity), misting on the
If you need to replace this type of bulb,
internal surface of the glass of the headlamps Changing a bulb must only be done with
you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or
and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear the ignition off and after the headlamp /
a qualified workshop.
after the lamps have been on for a few lamp has been switched off for several
Do not touch the LED or Full LED technology
minutes. minutes - risk of serious burns!
headlamps - risk of electrocution!
Do not touch the bulb directly with your
fingers; use a lint-free cloth.

206
 In the event of a breakdown

Front lamps Model with Full

LED technology headlamps
8
Model with
LED technology headlamps

1. Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps/Brake

lamps (LED)
2. Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps (LED)
3. Direction indicators (LED)
4. Reversing lamps (LED)
5. Foglamps (P21W)
1. Dipped beam headlamps/Main beam
headlamps
2. Static cornering lamps
Foglamps (P21W)
1. Dipped beam headlamps/Main beam
headlamps 3. Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps /Direction
2. Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps /Direction indicators
indicators
Rear lamps

These bulbs are replaced from outside the rear

bumper.
► Pass your hand under the bumper.
► Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and
remove it.
► Turn the bulb a quarter turn and replace it.

207
 In the event of a breakdown

When changing the bulb within a few

minutes of switching off the ignition, take
12 V battery/Accessory Frozen battery
Never try to charge a frozen battery - risk
care not to touch the exhaust - risk of burns! batteries of explosion!
If the battery has frozen, have it checked by a
Lead-acid starter batteries PEUGEOT dealer or by a qualified workshop,
Fuses These batteries contain harmful
who will verify that the internal components
have not been damaged and that the case
Changing a fuse substances (sulphuric acid and lead). has not cracked, which could lead to a risk of
All work must be carried out only by a They must be disposed of in accordance leakage of toxic and corrosive acid.
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop with regulations and must never under any
The replacement of a fuse by a third party circumstances be discarded with household
Automatic gearbox
could cause a serious malfunction of the waste.
Never try to start the engine by pushing
vehicle. Dispose of used batteries at a designated
the vehicle.
collection point.

Installing electrical accessories

Protect your eyes and face before Symbols
The vehicle's electrical system is
handling the battery. No sparks or naked flames, no smoking.
designed to operate with standard or optional
equipment. All operations on the battery must be carried
out in a well ventilated area and away from Always protect your eyes. Explosive
Before fitting other electrical equipment
naked flames and sources of sparks, to avoid gases can cause blindness and injury.
or accessories to your vehicle, contact a
any risk of explosion or fire. Keep the vehicle's battery out of the reach
PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Wash your hands afterwards. of children.
The vehicle's battery contains sulphuric
PEUGEOT accepts no responsibility for
Electronic control units/LED acid which can make you go blind or
the cost incurred in repairing the vehicle
technology headlamps cause severe burns.
or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from
Never connect the negative jump lead to the For more information, refer to the
the installation of accessories not supplied or
metal part of the electronic control units or at handbook.
not recommended by PEUGEOT and not
the back of the headlamps. Explosive gases can be present close to
installed in accordance with its
Risk of destroying the electronic control the battery.
recommendations, in particular when the
units and/or headlamps!
combined power consumption of all of the
Connect to the remote earth point provided
With petrol/Diesel engines
additional equipment connected exceeds 10
for this purpose. Procedure for starting the engine using another
milliamperes.
battery or for charging a discharged battery.

208
 In the event of a breakdown

Accessing the battery

The battery is located under the bonnet.
Check beforehand that the backup battery
has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity
► Connect one end of the green or black cable
to the (-) terminal of the backup battery B or of
8
at least equal to that of the discharged the booster (or to an earth point on the assisting
battery. vehicle).
The two vehicles must not be in contact with ► Connect the other end of the green or black
each other. cable to the earth point C.
Switch off all electricity-consuming equipment ► Start the engine on the assisting vehicle and
on both vehicles (audio system, wipers, leave it running for a few minutes.
lighting, etc.). ► Operate the starter on the broken down
Make sure that the jump leads are well away vehicle and let the engine run.
from the engine’s moving parts (fan, belt, If the engine does not start immediately, switch
etc.). off the ignition and wait a few moments before
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while the trying again.
engine is running. ► Wait for it to return to idle.
For access to the (+) terminal:
► Disconnect the jump leads in reverse order.
► Release the bonnet by pulling the internal
► Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
release lever, then the external safety catch.
the vehicle has one.
► Raise the bonnet.
► Allow the engine to run for at least
(+) Positive terminal with a quick-release
30 minutes, with the vehicle stationary, so that
terminal.
the battery reaches an adequate state of charge.
(-) Negative terminal.
As the battery's negative terminal is not Driving immediately without having
accessible, a remote earth point is located near reached a sufficient level of charge may
the battery. affect some of the vehicle's functions (e.g.
Stop & Start).
Starting using another battery
If the vehicle's battery is flat, the engine can be
► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the Charging the battery using a battery
started using a backup battery (either external or
from another vehicle) and jump leads or using a
vehicle has one. charger
► Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of For optimum service life of the battery, it is
battery booster.
flat battery A (at the metal elbow), then to the essential to maintain an adequate state of
Never start the engine by connecting a (+) terminal of the backup battery B or of the charge.
battery charger. booster. In some circumstances, it may be necessary to
Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster. charge the battery:

209
 In the event of a breakdown

– When using the vehicle mainly for short ► Switch off charger B before connecting Before disconnecting the battery:
journeys. the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any ► Close all openings (doors, boot, windows,
– If the vehicle is to be taken off the road for dangerous sparks. roof).
several weeks. ► Ensure that the charger cables are in good ► Switch off all electricity-consuming devices
Consult a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified condition. (audio system, wipers, lamps, etc.).
workshop. ► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the ► Switch off the ignition and wait for 4 minutes.
vehicle has one. After accessing the battery, it is only necessary
To charge the vehicle's battery yourself,
► Connect the cables of charger B as follows: to disconnect the (+) terminal.
use only a charger compatible with
• the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal
lead-acid batteries with a nominal voltage of Quick-release terminal clamp
of battery A,
12 V.
• the negative (-) black cable to earth point C Disconnecting the (+) terminal
on the vehicle.
Follow the instructions provided by the ► At the end of the charging operation, switch
manufacturer of the charger. off charger B before disconnecting the cables
Never reverse polarities. from battery A.

If this label is present, use only a 12 V

It is not necessary to disconnect the
charger to avoid causing irreversible
battery.
damage to the electrical components.
► Switch the ignition off.
► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio 24V
system, lighting, wipers, etc.).

12V ► Depending on equipment, lift the plastic cover

on the (+) terminal.
► Raise lever A fully to release clamp B.
Disconnecting/reconnecting the ► Remove clamp B by lifting it off.
battery
In order to maintain an adequate state of
charge for starting the engine, we recommend
disconnecting the battery if the vehicle is to be
unused for an extended period.

210
 In the event of a breakdown

Reconnecting the (+) terminal state of charge of the battery (up to about 8
hours).
8
With rechargeable hybrid
engines
The rechargeable hybrid system has two
accessory batteries: one at the front and one at
the rear of the vehicle.

Replacing the accessory batteries

Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a For access to the (+) terminal:
qualified workshop. ► Release the bonnet by pulling the internal
► Raise lever A fully. release lever, then the external safety catch.
► Refit open clamp B on the (+) terminal. Jump-starting another vehicle ► Raise the bonnet.
► Push clamp B fully down. Do not start or jump-start another vehicle (+) Positive terminal with a quick-release
► Lower lever A to lock clamp B. using the vehicle’s accessory batteries. terminal.
► Depending on equipment, lower the plastic (-) Negative terminal.
cover on the (+) terminal. As the battery's negative terminal is not
Accessing the accessory batteries accessible, a remote earth point is located near
Do not force the lever when pressing on
Front the battery.
it, as if the clamp is not positioned
correctly, locking will then not be possible. The front battery is located under the bonnet. Rear
Start the procedure again. The rear battery is located in the boot.
To reach the battery:
The Stop & Start system may not be
operational during the trip following the
first engine start.
In this case, the system will only be available
again after a continuous period with the
vehicle immobilised, the duration of which
depends on the exterior temperature and the
► Lift the boot floor.

211
 In the event of a breakdown

(+) Positive terminal, protected by a red plastic It is not necessary to disconnect the Disconnecting/reconnecting the
cover (not accessible). battery. accessory batteries
(-) Negative terminal with a black quick-release Procedure for disconnecting/reconnecting the
connector. ► Switch the ignition off.
accessory batteries in the event of long-term
► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
immobilisation of the vehicle.
Charging the front battery using a system, lighting, wipers, etc.).
Before disconnecting the accessory batteries:
battery charger ► Open the driver's door and boot.
For optimum service life of the front battery, it ► Close all other doors.
is essential to maintain an adequate state of ► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
charge. system, wipers, lamps, etc.).
In some circumstances, it may be necessary to ► Switch off the ignition and wait for the
charge the front battery: READY indicator lamp to go out.
– When using the vehicle mainly for short ► Observe a waiting time of 4 minutes.
journeys.
– If the vehicle is to be taken off the road for Never reverse the order of the steps for
several weeks. disconnecting and reconnecting the
Consult a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified accessory batteries - risk of irreversible
workshop. ► Switch off charger B before connecting damage!
the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any
To charge the vehicle's front battery
dangerous sparks.
yourself, use only a charger compatible
► Ensure that the charger cables are in good
with lead-acid batteries with a nominal voltage
condition.
of 12 V.
► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the
vehicle has one.
► Connect the cables of charger B as follows:
• Positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal on Disconnection
battery A.
• Negative (-) black cable to earth point C on Rear battery:
the vehicle. ► Disconnect the (-) terminal using the black
► At the end of the charging operation, switch quick-release connector.
Follow the instructions provided by the off charger B before disconnecting the cables Front battery:
manufacturer of the charger. from battery A.
Never reverse polarities.

212
 In the event of a breakdown

• Push clamp B fully down.

• Lower lever A to lock clamp B.
operation is perfectly normal. The message
will disappear while driving.
8
Rear battery:
► Connect the (-) terminal using the black
quick-release connector. Towing the vehicle
Following reconnection Procedure for having your vehicle towed or
for towing another vehicle using a removable
After reconnecting the battery, turn on the
mechanical device.
ignition and wait 1 minute before starting the
engine, to enable the electronic systems to
initialise.
► Disconnect the (+) terminal by disconnecting
the red quick-release clamp: For right-hand drive versions, when the
• Raise lever A fully to release clamp B. total distance recorder has reached
• Remove clamp B by lifting it off. 62 miles (100 km), you must wait
approximately 15 minutes before starting the
Reconnection
engine.
Front battery:
If minor problems nevertheless persist following
this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Referring to the relevant section, reinitialise
certain equipment:
– Remote control key or electronic key
(depending on version).
– Sunroof and electric blind.
– Electric windows.
– Date and time.
– Preset radio stations.

► Connect the (+) terminal by connecting the After reconnecting the battery, the
red quick-release clamp: message "Collision risk detection
• Raise lever A fully. system fault" is displayed on the instrument
• Refit open clamp B on the (+) terminal. panel when the ignition is switched on. This

213
 In the event of a breakdown

General recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in the country where you are driving.
Check that the towing vehicle is heavier than the towed vehicle.
The driver must remain at the wheel of the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towbar; ropes and straps are prohibited.
The towing vehicle must move off gently.
When the vehicle is towed with its engine off, there is no longer braking and steering assistance.

A professional recovery service must be called in the following cases:

– broken down on a motorway or main road;
– not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release the parking brake;
– not possible to tow a vehicle with an automatic gearbox, with the engine running;
– towing with only two wheels on the ground;
– four-wheel drive vehicle;
– no approved towbar available.

Rechargeable hybrid vehicles N, then switch off the hybrid system (READY Use the towing eye only to free the vehicle
Before any intervention, with the ignition indicator lamp off). if it is stuck, or to secure it for recovery on a
on, depress the brake pedal and select mode Always call on professionals for recovery of flatbed lorry or trailer.
the vehicle on a flatbed lorry or trailer.

Towing constraints
Type of vehicle Front wheels on the Rear wheels on the Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground
(engine/gearbox) ground ground with towbar
Internal combustion/Manual

Internal combustion/Automatic

214
 In the event of a breakdown

Towing constraints 8
Type of vehicle Front wheels on the Rear wheels on the Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground
(engine/gearbox) ground ground with towbar
Hybrid 2WD

Hybrid 4WD

2WD: 2-wheel drive.

4WD: 4-wheel drive.

In case of battery or electric parking brake failure, it is essential to call a professional using flatbed recovery vehicles (excluding manual gearbox).

Accessing the tools The towing eye is stored in a tool box, under the
boot floor.
For more information on accessing the Tool kit,
refer to the corresponding section.

Towing your vehicle

To access the front screw thread:

Depending on version, the towing eye is stored

either in the interior trim of the boot sill, left-hand
side, or in a bag behind the left-hand rear seat.

215
 In the event of a breakdown

Towing another vehicle ► Unclip the cover by pressing at its left-hand

section.
To access the rear screw thread:
► Pull the cover downwards.
To tow:
► Screw the towing eye in fully.
► Install the towbar.
► Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both
vehicles.
► Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a
short distance.

► Unclip the cover by pressing at its top left-

hand corner.
To be towed:
► Screw the towing eye in fully.
► Install the towbar.
► Put the gearbox into neutral.

Failure to observe this instruction could

result in damage to certain components
(braking, transmission, etc.) and to the
absence of braking assistance the next time
the engine is started.

Automatic gearbox
Never tow the vehicle with the driving
wheels on the ground and the engine off.

► Unlock the steering and release the parking

brake.
► Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both
vehicles.
► Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a
short distance.

216
 Technical data

Engine technical data and must be reduced by 10% for each additional
1,000 metres of altitude.
9
towed loads The maximum authorised nose weight
corresponds to the weight permitted on the
Engines towball.
The engine characteristics are given in the When exterior temperatures are high, the
vehicle's registration document, as well as in vehicle performance may be limited in
sales brochures. order to protect the engine. When the exterior
Only the values available at the time of temperature is higher than 37°C, reduce the
publication are presented in the tables. towed weight.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop to obtain missing values.
Towing even with a lightly loaded vehicle
The maximum power corresponds to the can adversely affect its road holding.
value type-approved on a test bed, under Braking distances are increased when towing
conditions defined by European legislation a trailer.
(Directive 1999/99/EC). When using a vehicle to tow, never exceed
a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) (observe the
For more information, contact a PEUGEOT local legislation in force).
dealer or a qualified workshop.

Weights and towed loads

The weights and towed loads relating to
the vehicle are indicated on the registration
document, as well as in sales brochures.
These values are also indicated on the
manufacturer's plate or label.
For more information, contact a PEUGEOT
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The GTW (Gross Train Weight) and towed load
values indicated are valid up to a maximum
altitude of 1,000 metres. The towed load value

217
 Technical data

Engines and towed loads - Petrol

Engines PureTech 130 S&S BVM6 PureTech 130 S&S EAT8
Gearboxes BVM6 EAT8
(Manual 6-speed) (Auto. 8-speed)
Codes EB2ADTS MB6 STT EB2ADTS ATN8 STT
Model codes HNSM/C HNSM/S HNSU/C HNSU/S
HNSC/C HNSC/S
Body styles 3008 5008 3008 5008
Cubic capacity (cc) 1,199 1,199
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96 96
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,400 1,280 1,150 950
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 690 690 690 750
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 80 72 80 72

218
 Technical data

Engines THP 150 EAT6 THP 165 EAT6 PureTech 180 S&S EAT8 9
Gearboxes EAT6 EAT6 EAT8
(Auto. 6-speed) (Auto. 6-speed) (Auto. 8-speed)
Codes EP6FDTMD AT6III EP6FDTM AT6III EP6FADTXD ATN8 STT
Model codes 5GXV/C 5GXV/S 5GYV/C 5GYV/S 5GFU/C 5GFU/S
5GYW/C 5GYW/S
5GYZ/C 5GYZ/S
5GSD/C
Body styles 3008 5008 3008 5008 3008 5008
Cubic capacity (cc) 1,598 1,598 1,598
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 110 121.4 133
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 600 600 600 600 1,500 1,400
on a 10% or 12% gradient 1,550* 1,350*
Unbraked trailer (kg) 600 600 600 600 750 750
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 80 72 80 72 80 72

* For Australia only.

219
 Technical data

Engines and towed loads – BlueHDi Diesel

Engines BlueHDi 130 S&S EAT8
Gearboxes EAT8
(Auto. 8-speed)
Codes DV5RC ATN8 STT
Model codes YHZU/C YHZU/S
Body styles 3008 5008
Cubic capacity (cc) 1,499
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96
Fuel Diesel
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,300 1,200
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 750 750
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 80 72

220
 Technical data

Engines and towed loads - Rechargeable hybrid 9

HYBRID 225 e-EAT8 HYBRID4 300 e-EAT8
Codes EP6FADTXDHP ATN8 FWD EP6FADTXHP ATN8 AWD
Model codes DGZU/C 5GBU/C
M4...
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1,310 1,250
on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (kg) 745 750
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) - 64
Petrol engines PureTech 180 PureTech 200
Gearboxes Electric automatic 8-speed Electric automatic 8-speed
Cubic capacity (cc) 1,598 1,598
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 132 147
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded
Electric motor(s)
Technology Synchronous with permanent magnets
Max. power: EC standard (kW) 81 Front: 81
Rear: 83
Battery
Technology Lithium-Ion
Voltage (Volts AC) 240-400 240-400
Max. consumption (kWh) 14.2 14.2
Combined power (kW) 165 220

221
 Technical data

Dimensions (mm) 5008

These dimensions have been measured on an

unladen vehicle.
3008

222
 Technical data

– European whole vehicle type approval

number.
9
– Vehicle Identification number (VIN).
– Gross vehicle weight (GVW).
– Gross train weight (GTW).
– Maximum weight on the front axle.
– Maximum weight on the rear axle.
D. Tyres/paint code label.
Affixed to the driver's door.
Bears the following information about the tyres:
Identification markings – Tyre pressures, unladen and laden.
Various visible markings for vehicle identification – Tyre specification, made up of the dimensions
and vehicle search. and type as well as the load and speed indices.
– Spare tyre inflation pressure.
Also indicates the paint colour code.

The vehicle may be originally equipped

with tyres with higher load and speed
indices than those indicated on the label,
without affecting tyre pressure (on cold tyres).
In the event of a change in the type of tyres,
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), under contact a PEUGEOT dealer for the tyre fits
the bonnet. approved for the vehicle.
Stamped on the chassis.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on the
dashboard.
Printed on an adhesive label visible through the
windscreen.
C. Manufacturer's label.
Affixed to the right-hand door.
Bears the following information:
– Manufacturer’s name.

223
 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

PEUGEOT Connect The system’s Open Source Software

(OSS) source codes are available at the
Press in the shaded area to go back up a level
or confirm.
Radio following addresses: Press the back arrow to go back a level or
https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ confirm.
Multimedia audio system - https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/
The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
Applications - Bluetooth® type.
telephone First steps
To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive
cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional
The functions and settings described With the engine running, a press mutes product.
vary according to the vehicle version and the sound. Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
configuration, as well as the country of sale. With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
Increase or decrease the volume using
Certain information is displayed permanently in
For safety reasons and because they the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons
the upper bar of the touch screen:
require sustained attention by the driver, (depending on the equipment).
– Air conditioning status information (depending
the following operations must be carried out Use the buttons on either side of or below the
on version), and direct access to the
with the vehicle stationary and the ignition touch screen to access the menus, then press
corresponding menu.
on: the virtual buttons on the touch screen.
– Radio Media and Telephone menu status
– Pairing the smartphone with the system via Depending on the model, use the "Source" and
information.
Bluetooth. "Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen to
– Privacy status information.
– Using the smartphone. access the menus, then press the virtual buttons
– Access to the touch screen and digital
– Connecting to the CarPlay® or Android on the touch screen.
instrument panel settings.
Auto applications (certain applications stop At all times it is possible to display the rolling
Audio source selection (depending on
displaying when the vehicle is moving). menus by pressing the screen briefly with three
equipment):
– Changing the system settings and fingers.
– FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on
configuration. All touch-sensitive areas on the screen are
equipment).
white.
– Telephone connected via Bluetooth and
On pages with multiple tabs at the bottom of the
The system is protected so that it only Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming).
screen, you can switch between pages either
operates in the vehicle. – USB Memory stick.
by tapping the tab for the desired page or by
The message Energy economy mode is – Media player connected via the auxiliary
swiping the pages to the left or right with your
displayed when the system is about to go into socket (depending on equipment).
finger.
standby.

224
 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Steering mounted controls Steering mounted controls -

Type 2
10
Steering mounted controls -
Type 1
Voice commands:
This control is located on the steering
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk
Radio:
(depending on equipment).
Select the previous/next preset radio
Short press, smartphone voice commands via
station.
In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to the system.
Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list.
create a profile for an individual or for a Increase volume.
Media:
group of people with shared interests, and Select the previous/next track.
configure a wide range of settings (radio Decrease volume.
Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list.
presets, audio settings, ambiences, etc.). Mute by pressing the volume increase
Radio:
Settings are applied automatically. and decrease buttons simultaneously
Short press: display the list of radio
(depending on equipment).
stations.
Restore the sound by pressing one of the two
In very hot conditions, the volume may Long press: update the list.
volume buttons.
be limited to protect the system. It may Media:
Media (short press): change the
enter standby mode (with the screen and Short press: display the list of folders.
multimedia source.
sound off) for 5 minutes or more. Long press: display the available sorting options.
Telephone (short press): start telephone
The system will resume normal operation Change audio source (radio; USB; AUX if
call.
when the temperature in the passenger equipment connected; CD; streaming).
Call in progress (short press): access
compartment has dropped. Confirm a selection.
telephone menu.
Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call,
Increase volume.
end call; when no call is in progress, access
telephone menu.
Decrease volume.
Radio (rotate): automatic search for the
previous/next station.
Mute/restore sound by simultaneously
Media (rotate): previous/next track, move in a
pressing the increase and decrease
list.
volume buttons.

225
 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing Radio Media Settings

selected, access to presets.
Radio: display the list of stations.
Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio (press and hold): update the list of
stations received.

Menus
Applications
Select an audio source or radio station. Configure a personal profile and/or
configure the sound (balance, ambience,
etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time,
Telephone etc.).

Driving

Access configurable equipment.

Connect a mobile phone via Bluetooth®.

Run certain applications from a
smartphone connected via CarPlay® or Android Activate, deactivate or configure certain
Auto. vehicle functions.

226
 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Navigation Applications Press this button to search and select a

recipient.
10
Select the "Quick messages” tab.
Viewing photos
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. Press this button to select the display
To protect the system, do not use a USB settings for messages.
hub. Press this button to write a new message.

The system can read folders and image files in Press the bin alongside the selected
the formats: .tiff; .gif; .jpg/jpeg; .bmp and .png. message to delete it.
Press Applications to display the main Press this button alongside the selected
page. message to display the secondary page.
Configure the navigation and select your Press "Photos". Press this button to edit and modify the
destination via CarPlay® or Android Auto. existing text.
Select a folder. Press this button to write a new message.
Air conditioning
Select an image to view. Press the bin to delete the message.

Press this button to display the details of

the photo.
Radio
18,5 21,5 Press the back arrow to go back a level.

Selecting a station
Managing messages Press Radio Media to display the main
Press Applications to display the main page.
page. Press one of the buttons to perform an
Manage various temperature and air flow Press "SMS". automatic search for radio stations.
settings. Or
Select the "SMS” tab. Move the slider to manually search for
frequencies up or down.
Press this button to select the display Or
settings for messages. Press the frequency.

227
 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Enter the FM and AM waveband values Or Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
using the virtual keypad. Select a radio station or frequency. secondary page.
Press "OK" to confirm. Press "Preset". Activate/deactivate "News".
Make a long press on one of the buttons
to preset the station. Press in the shaded area to confirm.
Radio reception may be affected by the
use of electrical equipment not approved
Activating/Deactivating RDS
by the Brand, such as a USB charger
connected to the 12 V socket.
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Playing TA messages
listening to the same station by automatically The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives
The exterior environment (hills, buildings,
retuning to alternative frequencies. priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may
Press Radio Media to display the main function needs good reception of a radio station
block reception, including in RDS mode.
page. that transmits this type of message. While traffic
This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the information is being broadcast, the current
context of radio wave transmission, and
secondary page. media is automatically interrupted so that the
in no way indicative of an audio system
Activate/deactivate "RDS". TA message can be heard. Normal play of the
malfunction.
previously playing media resumes at the end of
Press in the shaded area to confirm. the message.
Changing the waveband Press Radio Media to display the main
Press Radio Media to display the main page.
RDS station tracking may not be
page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
available nationwide, as many radio
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the secondary page.
stations do not cover 100 % of the country.
secondary page. Activate/deactivate "TA".
This explains the loss of reception of the
Press "Band" to change waveband. station during a journey.
Press in the shaded area to confirm.
Press in the shaded area to confirm.
Displaying text information
The "Radio Text" function displays information
Audio settings
Presetting a station transmitted by the radio station relating to the Press Radio Media to display the main
Select a radio station or frequency. station or the currently playing song. page.
Make a short press on the star outline. If Press Radio Media to display the main Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
the star is solid, the radio station is page. secondary page.
already preset. Press "Audio settings".

228
 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Select the "Tone", "Balance", "Sound",

"Voice" or "Ringtones" tab to configure
DAB (Digital Audio Press in the shaded area to confirm.
10
the sound settings. Broadcasting) radio
If "FM-DAB Follow-up" is activated, there
Press the back arrow to confirm.
may be a time offset of a few seconds
Terrestrial Digital Radio when the system switches to "FM" analogue
In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience, Bass, Digital radio provides higher quality sound. radio, and in some cases a change in volume.
Medium and Treble sound settings are The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a When the digital signal quality is restored, the
different and independent for each audio choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical system automatically changes back to "DAB".
source. order. To minimise this time lag, storing radio
In the "Balance” tab, the All passengers, Press Radio Media to display the main stations in the "DAB" band is recommended.
Driver and Front only settings are common page.
to all sources. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
If the "DAB" station being listened to is
In the "Sound” tab, activate or deactivate secondary page.
not available on "FM", or if "FM-DAB
"Volume linked to speed", "Auxiliary input" Press "Band" to select "DAB band".
Follow-up" is not activated, the sound will cut
and "Touch tones". out when the digital signal becomes too weak.
Press in the shaded area to confirm.
The balance/distribution (or spatialisation
with the Arkamys© system) uses audio
FM-DAB Follow-up Media
processing to adjust the sound quality
according to the number of passengers in the "DAB" does not cover 100% of the territory.
vehicle. When the digital radio signal is poor, the USB port
"FM-DAB Follow-up" enables you to continue Insert the USB memory stick into the USB
listening to the same station by automatically port or connect the USB device to the
Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging ©
switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
optimises the sound distribution inside
station (if there is one).
the passenger compartment. To protect the system, do not use a USB
Press Radio Media to display the main
hub.
page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the The system builds playlists (in temporary
secondary page. memory); this operation can take from a
Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up". few seconds to several minutes at the first
connection.

229
 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Reduce the number of non-music files and the If play does not start automatically, it may be Information and advice
number of folders to reduce the waiting time. necessary to start the audio playback from the
The system supports USB mass storage
Playlists are updated whenever the ignition smartphone.
devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players
is switched off or a USB memory stick is Control is from the portable device or by using
via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not
connected. The audio system memorises these the system's touch buttons.
supplied.
lists, which will subsequently load faster if they
Once connected in Streaming mode, the Devices are managed using the audio system
have not been changed.
smartphone is considered to be a media controls.
Other devices, not recognised on connection,
Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket source.
must be connected to the auxiliary socket using
Depending on equipment a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth
Connect a portable device (MP3 player, Connecting Apple® players streaming, if compatible.
etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an Connect the Apple® player to the USB socket
audio cable (not supplied). To protect the system, do not use a USB
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" hub.
Play starts automatically.
has been selected in the audio settings. Control is via the audio system. The audio system will only play audio files with
First adjust the volume on the portable device
The classifications available are those of ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the
the portable device connected (artists/ extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and
audio system.
albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ 320 Kbps.
Controls are managed via the portable device.
podcasts). It is also possible to use a It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
Selecting the source classification structured in the form of a No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files.
library.
Press Radio Media to display the main
The default classification used is by artist. To The supported sampling rates are 11, 22, 44 and
page.
modify the classification used, return to the 48 KHz.
Press the "SOURCES" button.
first level of the menu then select the desired To avoid reading and display problems, we
Select the source.
classification (playlists for example) and recommend choosing file names less than 20
characters long that do not contain any special
BluetoothStreaming® confirm to go down through the menu to the
characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù).
desired track.
Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
from your smartphone. The version of software in the audio system may (File Allocation Table).
The Bluetooth profile must be activated. not be compatible with the generation of the
First adjust the volume on the portable device We recommend using the original USB
Apple® player.
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the cable for the portable device.
system.

230
 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Telephone On connecting the USB cable, the

CarPlay® function deactivates the
Android Auto smartphone
connection
10
USB sockets system's Bluetooth® mode.
The "CarPlay" function requires the use of Depending on country.
Depending on equipment, for more information
a compatible smartphone and compatible On the smartphone, download the
on the USB sockets compatible with CarPlay® or
applications. Android Auto application.
Android Auto applications, refer to the "Ease of
use and comfort" section. The "Android Auto" function requires the
Connect the USB cable. The smartphone
use of a compatible smartphone and
For the list of compatible smartphones, charges when connected by the USB
applications.
visit the Manufacturer's website in your cable.
country. From the system, press Telephone to
display the CarPlay® interface. Telephone not connected by
Synchronising a smartphone enables Or Bluetooth®
users to display applications that support If the smartphone has already connected
Connect a USB cable. The smartphone
the smartphone’s CarPlay® or Android Auto by Bluetooth®.
charges when connected by a USB cable.
technology on the vehicle’s screen. For Connect the USB cable. The smartphone
From the system, press "Telephone" to
CarPlay® technology, the CarPlay® function charges when connected by the USB
display the main page.
must first be activated on the smartphone. cable.
Press "Android Auto" to start the
Unlock the smartphone for the communication From the system, press "Telephone" to
application in the system.
process between the smartphone and the display the main page.
Depending on the smartphone, it may be
system to work. Press the "PHONE" button to go to the
necessary to activate the "Android Auto"
As principles and standards are constantly secondary page.
function.
changing, we recommend keeping the Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay®
During the procedure, several screen
smartphone's operating system up-to- interface.
pages relating to certain features are
date, together with the date and time on When the USB cable is disconnected displayed.
the smartphone and the system. and the ignition is switched off then back Accept to start and complete the connection.
on, the system will not automatically switch to When connecting a smartphone to the
CarPlay® smartphone Radio Media mode; the source must be system, we recommend enabling
Bluetooth® on the smartphone.
changed manually.
connection
Depending on country. The CarPlay® navigation can be accessed Telephone connected by Bluetooth®
at any time by pressing the system's From the system, press "Telephone" to
Navigation button. display the main page.

231
 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Press the "PHONE" button to display the If the pairing procedure fails, we Depending on the type of telephone, you may by
secondary page. recommend deactivating and then prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and
Press "Android Auto" to start the reactivating the Bluetooth function on the messages.
application in the system. telephone.
The ability of the system to connect just
Access to the different audio sources remains
one profile depends on the telephone.
available in the margin of the Android Auto
Procedure from the telephone All three profiles may connect by default.
display, using the touch buttons located in the
upper bar. Select the name of the system in the list
Access to the menus for the system is possible of detected devices. The profiles compatible with the system
at any time using the dedicated buttons. In the system, accept the connection request are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
from the telephone. MAP and PAN.
There may be a pause before
applications become available, Procedure from the system Visit the Brand's website for more information
depending on the quality of the network. Press Telephone to display the main (compatibility, additional help, etc.).
page.
Automatic reconnection
Pairing a Bluetooth® Press "Bluetooth search".
The list of detected telephones is On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone
telephone displayed. connected is present again, it is automatically
Select the name of the chosen telephone recognised and within about 30 seconds
The services available depend on the after switching on the ignition, the pairing is
in the list.
network, the SIM card and the established automatically (Bluetooth activated).
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Connection sharing To modify the connection profile:
Consult the telephone user guide and the Press Telephone to display the main
The system offers to connect the telephone with
service provider to check which services are page.
3 profiles:
available. Press the "PHONE" button to access the
– "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only),
– “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of secondary page.
The Bluetooth function must be activated audio files on the telephone), Press "Bluetooth connection" to
and the telephone configured as "Visible – "Mobile internet data". display the list of paired devices.
to all” (in the telphone settings). Select one or more profiles. Press the "Details" button for a paired
device.
To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is Select one or more profiles.
Press "OK" to confirm.
used (from the telephone or from the system),
ensure that the code is the same in the system
and in the telephone.

232
 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Press "OK" to confirm. on the steering mounted PHONE button

to reject the call.
Press "Call".
10
Or
Managing paired telephones Press "End call". Calling a recently used
This function lets you connect or disconnect a number
device or delete a pairing.
Press Telephone to display the main Making a call Press Telephone to display the main
page.
page.
Using the telephone is not recommended Or
Press the "PHONE" button to access the
while driving. Press and hold
secondary page.
Parking the vehicle.
Press "Bluetooth connection" to
Make the call using the steering mounted the steering mounted button.
display the list of paired devices.
controls.
Press on the name of the telephone
Press "Recent calls".
selected in the list to disconnect it.
Select the desired contact from the displayed list.
Press again to connect it. Calling a new number
Press Telephone to display the main It is always possible to make a call
Deleting a telephone directly from the telephone; as a safety
page.
Press the basket at the top right of the Enter the phone number using the digital measure, first park the vehicle.
screen to display a basket alongside the keypad.
telephone chosen.
Press the basket alongside the telephone
Press "Call" to start the call. Setting the ringtone
chosen to delete it. Press Telephone to display the main
Calling a contact page.
Receiving a call Press Telephone to display the main
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a secondary page.
page.
superimposed display in the screen. Press "Ring volume" to display the
Or press and hold
Make a short press on the steering volume bar.
mounted PHONE button to accept an Press the arrows or move the slider to set
the steering mounted PHONE button.
incoming call. the ring volume.
And Press "Contacts".
Make a long press Select the desired contact from the displayed list.

233
 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Settings Modifying system settings Press Settings to display the main page.
Press Settings to display the main page.
Press "Configuration" to access the
Configuring profiles secondary page.
Press "Configuration" to access the
Press Settings to display the main page. Press "Screen configuration".
secondary page.
Press "System configuration".
Press "Profiles". Press "Brightness".
Move the slider to adjust the brightness of
Press the "Units" tab to change the units of
Select "Profile 1", "Profile 2", "Profile 3” or the screen and/or the instrument panel
distance, fuel consumption and temperature.
"Common profile". (depending on version).
Press the "Factory settings" tab to restore the
Press this button to enter a name for the Press the back arrow to confirm.
initial settings.
profile using the virtual keypad.
Press "OK" to save. Returning the system to factory settings Press "Animation".
activates the English language by default Activate or deactivate: “Automatic
Press the back arrow to confirm. (depending on version). scrolling”.
Select "Animated transitions".
Press this button to activate the profile. Press the "System info" tab to display the
versions of the various modules installed in the
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Press the back arrow again to confirm. system.
Press the "Privacy" tab,
Press this button to reset the selected or Selecting the language
profile. Press Settings to display the main page.
Press Settings to display the main page.

Adjusting the brightness Press "Privacy" to activate or deactivate

Press "Configuration" to access the
Press Settings to display the main page. the private data mode.
secondary page.
Activate or deactivate:
Select "Language" to change the
Press Brightness. language.
– "No sharing (data, vehicle position)".
Press the back arrow to confirm.
Move the slider to adjust the brightness of – "Only data sharing”
the screen and/or the instrument panel – "Data and vehicle position sharing"
(depending on version). Press the back arrow to confirm.
Setting the time
Press in the shaded area to confirm. Press Settings to display the main page.

234
 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

Press "Configuration" to access the

secondary page.
Press this button to set the date. The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels,
basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, 10
Press "Date and time". Press the back arrow to save the date. including in RDS mode.
This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is
Select "Time". Select the display format for the date. not indicative of an audio system malfunction.
Press this button to set the time using the The aerial is missing or has been damaged
virtual keypad. Press the back arrow again to confirm. (for example while entering a car wash or
Press "OK" to save the time. underground car park).
► Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
Time and date setting is only available if
Press this button to set the time zone. I cannot find some radio stations in the list of
"GPS Synchronisation:" is deactivated.
received stations.
Select the display format for the time The name of the radio station changes.
(12h/24h). The station is no longer received or its name has
Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 Frequently asked changed in the list.
hour). questions ► Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the
Activate or deactivate GPS "Radio" page.
The following information groups together the
synchronisation (UTC). Some radio stations send other information
answers to the most frequently asked questions
Press the back arrow to save the settings. in place of their name (the title of the song for
concerning the system.
example).
The system interprets these details as the station
The system may not automatically Radio name.
manage the change between winter and The reception quality of the tuned radio ► Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the
summer time (depending on the country of station gradually deteriorates or the station "Radio" page.
sale). presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz
is displayed, etc.). Media
Setting the date The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s
transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only
Press Settings to display the main page. after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes).
geographical area.
Some files supplied with the memory stick may
► Activate the "RDS" function in the upper bar
Press "Configuration" to access the greatly slow down access to reading the memory
to enable the system to check whether there is
secondary page. stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing
a more powerful transmitter in the geographical
Press "Date and time". time).
area.

Select "Date".

235
 PEUGEOT Connect Radio

► Delete the files supplied with the memory Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and
stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the USB cables are of poor quality. bass settings, and vice versa.
file structure on the memory stick. ► Use genuine USB cables to ensure ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience
Some characters in information about the compatibility. settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.
currently playing media are not displayed Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. When the balance settings are changed, the
correctly. Android Auto and CarPlay are not available in all distribution is deselected.
The audio system is unable to process certain countries. When the distribution setting is changed, the
types of character. ► Check the Google Android Auto or Apple balance settings are deselected.
► Use standard characters to name tracks and website to see which countries are supported. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the
folders. The volume of the telephone connected in balance settings, and vice versa.
Playback of streaming files does not start. Bluetooth mode is inaudible. ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution
The connected device does not automatically The volume depends on both the system and the setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
launch playback. telephone. There is a difference in sound quality
► Start playback from the device. ► Increase the volume of the audio system, to between audio sources.
Track names and playing times are not maximum if required, and increase the volume of To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound
displayed on the audio streaming screen. the telephone if necessary. settings can be tailored to different audio
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer Ambient noise affects the quality of the sources, which can generate audible differences
of this information. telephone call. when changing source.
► Reduce ambient noise (close windows, turn ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate
Telephone down ventilation, slow down, etc.). to the sources listened to. Adjust the sound
I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. The contacts are not listed in alphabetical functions to the middle position.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be order. When the engine is off, the system switches
switched off or the device may not be visible. Some telephones offer display options. off after several minutes of use.
► Check that the telephone has Bluetooth Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can When the engine is switched off, the system's
switched on. be transferred in a specific order. operating time depends on the state of charge of
► Check in the telephone settings that it is ► Modify the telephone directory display the battery.
"visible to all". settings. The switch-off is normal: the system
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with automatically goes into energy economy mode
the system. Settings and switches off to maintain an adequate charge
► Check the compatibility of the telephone on When the treble and bass settings are in the battery.
the Brand's website (services). changed, the ambience is deselected. ► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the
Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. When the ambience is changed, the treble charge of the battery.
and bass settings are reset.

236
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

PEUGEOT Connect Nav The system is protected so that it only

operates in the vehicle.
All of the touch areas of the screen are white.
Press the back arrow to go back a level.
11
The message Energy economy mode is Press "OK" to confirm.
GPS navigation - displayed when the system is about to go into
The touch screen is of the "capacitive"
Applications - Multimedia standby.
type.
audio system - Bluetooth® To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive
System and map updates can be
telephone downloaded from the Brand's website.
cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional
product.
The functions and settings described The update procedure is also available there. Do not use sharp objects on the screen.
vary according to the vehicle version and Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
configuration, as well as the country of sale. The system’s Open Source Software
(OSS) source codes are available at the Certain information is displayed permanently
following addresses: in the side bars or in the upper bar of the touch
For safety reasons and because they
https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ screen (depending on equipment):
require sustained attention by the driver,
https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ – Air conditioning status information (depending
the following operations must be carried out
on version), and direct access to the
with the vehicle stationary and the ignition
corresponding menu.
on:
– Pairing the smartphone with the system via First steps – Go directly to the audio source selection
option, to view the list of radio stations (or list of
Bluetooth. With the engine running, a press mutes titles depending on the source).
– Using the smartphone. the sound. – Go to the "Notifications" of messages, emails,
– Connecting to the CarPlay® or Android With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. map updates and, depending on the services,
Auto applications (certain applications stop Increase or decrease the volume using the navigation notifications.
displaying when the vehicle is moving). the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons – Go to the settings for the touch screen and the
– Watching a video (the video stops when the (depending on the equipment). digital instrument panel.
vehicle starts to move again). Use the menu buttons on either side of or below Audio source selection (depending on
– Changing the system settings and the touch screen for access to the menus, then equipment):
configuration. press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. – FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on
Depending on the model, use the "Source" or equipment).
AM and DAB radio are not available on "Menu" buttons to access the rolling menus, then – Telephone connected via Bluetooth and
Hybrid vehicles. press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming).
Display the rolling menus at any time by pressing – USB memory stick.
the screen briefly with three fingers.

237
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

– Media player connected via the auxiliary

socket (depending on equipment).
Steering mounted controls Media: display the list of tracks.
Radio (press and hold): update the list of
– Video (depending on equipment). Voice control: detected stations.
This control is located on the steering
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk
(depending on equipment). Menus
Short press, system voice control.
Long press, voice commands from smartphone Connected navigation
or CarPlay®, Android Auto via the system.
Increase volume.

Decrease volume.
Mute by pressing the volume increase
and decrease buttons simultaneously
In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to (depending on equipment).
create a profile for an individual or for a Restore the sound by pressing one of the two
group of people with shared interests, and volume buttons.
configure a wide range of settings (radio Media (short press): change the
presets, audio settings, navigation history, multimedia source.
Enter navigation settings and choose a
favourite contacts, etc.). Settings are applied Telephone (short press): start telephone
destination.
automatically. call.
Use real-time services, depending on equipment.
Call in progress (short press): access
In very hot conditions, the volume may telephone menu.
be limited to protect the system. It may Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call,
enter standby mode (with the screen and end call; when no call is in progress, access
sound off) for 5 minutes or more. telephone menu.
The system will resume normal operation Radio (rotate): automatic search for the
when the temperature in the passenger previous/next station.
compartment has dropped. Media (rotate): previous/next track, move
through a list.
Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing
selected, access presets.
Radio: display the list of stations.

238
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Applications Telephone Vehicle 11

Run certain applications from a Connect a telephone via Bluetooth®, read Activate, deactivate or configure certain
smartphone connected via CarPlay® or messages and emails and send quick vehicle functions.
Android Auto. messages.
Check the status of the Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi Air conditioning
connections. Settings
Radio Media

18,5 21,5
FM 87.5 MHz

Manage various temperature and air flow

Configure a personal profile and/or settings.
configure the sound (balance, ambience,
Select an audio source or radio station, or etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time,
display photographs. etc.).

239
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Voice commands Example of a "voice command" for the radio and

media:
"Play artist Madonna"
Steering wheel-mounted Example of a "voice command" for the
controls telephone:
Voice commands: "Call David Miller"
Voice commands can be issued from any The voice commands, with a choice of 17
screen page after a short press on the "Voice languages (Arabic, Brazilian, Czech,
commands" button located on the steering Danish, Dutch, English, Farsi, French,
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk German, Italian, Norwegian, Polish, A number of commands are available when a
(depending on equipment), as long as there is no Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, menu is selected.
telephone call in progress. Turkish), are made using the language
To ensure that voice commands are previously chosen and set in the system.
always recognised by the system, please For some voice commands, there are
follow these recommendations: alternative synonyms.
– use natural language in a normal tone Example: Guide to / Navigate to / Go to / ...
without breaking up words or raising your The voice commands in Arabic for: "Navigate
voice. to address" and "Display POI in the city", are
– always wait for the "beep" (audible signal) not available.
before speaking.
– for best results, closing the windows and
sunroof is recommended, to avoid extraneous
Information - Using the
Press the Push To Talk button and tell me
interference (depending on version). system what you'd like after the tone. Remember
– before issuing a voice command, ask any When voice commands are activated, by you can interrupt me at any time by pressing this
other passengers to refrain from speaking. briefly pressing the button, help is button. If you press it again while I'm waiting for
displayed on the touch screen, offering various you to speak, it'll end the conversation. If you
menus and enabling voice-based interaction with
First steps the system.
need to start over, say "cancel". If you want to
undo something, say "undo". And to get
Example of a "voice command" for information and tips at any time, just say "help".
navigation: If you ask to me do something and there's some
"Navigate to address 11 regent street, information missing that I need, I'll give you
London" some examples or take you through it step by

240
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

step. There's more information available in

"novice" mode. You can set the dialogue mode to
To plan a route, say "navigate to" followed by the
address, the contact name or an intersection. For
distance" or "arrival time". To learn more
commands, try saying "help with navigation".
11
"expert" when you feel comfortable. example, "navigate to address 11 Regent Street, Voice commands
London", "navigate to contact, John Miller",
Global voice commands or "navigate to intersection of Regent Street, Show POI ''hotel'' at the destination
Voice commands London". You can specify if it's a preferred Show nearby POI petrol station
address, or a Point of Interest. For example, say Navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London
Set dialogue mode as novice - expert "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", or Navigate to POI petrol station along the route
Select user 1 / Select profile John "navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London". Help messages
Increase temperature Or, you can just say, "navigate home". To see
Decrease temperature Points of Interest on a map, you can say things To see points of interest on a map, you can
Help messages like "show POI hotels in Banbury". For more say things like "show hotels in Banbury", "show
information say "help with points of interest" or nearby parking", "show hotel at the destination"
There are lots of topics I can help you with. "help with route guidance". or "show petrol station along the route". If you
You can say: "help with phone", "help with To choose a destination, say something like prefer to navigate directly to a point of interest,
navigation", "help with media" or "help with "navigate to line three" or "select line two". If you you can say "navigate to nearby petrol station".
radio". For an overview on how to use voice can't find the destination but the street's right, If you feel you are not being well understood,
controls, you can say "help with voice controls". say for example "select the street in line three". try to say the word "POI" in front of the point
Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" To move around a displayed list, you can say of interest. For example say "navigate to POI
and we'll start that again. "next page" or "previous page". You can undo restaurant at the destination".
your last action and start over by saying "undo", To choose a POI, say something like "select
"Navigation" voice or say "cancel" to cancel the current action. line 2". If you've searched for a Point of Interest
commands Voice commands and don't see the one you're after, you can filter
further by saying something like "select POI in
Voice commands
Tell me the remaining distance line 2", or "select the city in line 3". You can also
Tell me the remaining time scroll through the list by saying "next page" or
Navigate home
Tell me the arrival time "previous page".
Navigate to work
Stop route guidance
Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club Depending on the country, give
Help messages
Navigate to contact, John Miller destination (address) instructions in the
Navigate to address 11 regent street, London language configured for the system.
You can say "stop" or "resume route guidance".
Help messages
To get information about your current route, you
can say "tell me the remaining time", "remaining

241
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

"Radio Media" voice Voice commands Media voice commands are available
only with a USB connection.
commands What's playing?
Voice commands Help messages
"Telephone" voice
Turn on source radio - Streaming Bluetooth To choose what you'd like to play, start by saying commands
-… "play" and then the item. For example, say "play
Help messages song Hey Jude", "play line 3" or "select line 2". If there is no telephone connected by
You can undo your last action and start over Bluetooth, a voice message announces:
You can select an audio source by saying "turn by saying "undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the "Please first connect a telephone", and the
on source" followed by the device name. For current action. voice session is closed.
example, "turn on source, Streaming Bluetooth", Voice commands
Voice commands
or "turn on source, radio". Use the command
"play" to specify the type of music you'd like to Play song Hey Jude
Call David Miller*
hear. You can choose between "song", "artist", Play artist Madonna
Call voicemail*
or "album". Just say something like "play artist, Play album Thriller
Display calls*
Madonna", "play song, Hey Jude", or "play Help messages
Help messages
album, Thriller".
Voice commands I'm not sure what you'd like to play. Please say
To make a phone call, say "call" followed by
"play" and then a song title, an album title, or
the contact name, for example: "Call David
Tune to channel BBC Radio 2 an artist name. For example, say "play song
Miller". You can also include the phone type, for
Tune to 98.5 FM Hey Jude", "play artist Madonna" or "play
example: "Call David Miller at home". To make
Tune to preset number five album Thriller". To select a line number from the
a call by number, say "dial" followed by the
Help messages display, say "select line two". To move around
phone number, for example, "Dial 107776 835
a displayed list, you can say "next page" or
417". You can check your voicemail by saying
You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" "previous page". You can undo your last action
"call voicemail". To send a text, say "send quick
and the station name or frequency. For example and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel"
message to", followed by the contact, and then
"tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 to cancel the current action.
the name of the quick message you'd like to
FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say for
send. For example, "send quick message to
example "tune to preset number five".

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding
download has been performed.

242
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of

calls, say "display calls". For more information on
From the list of quick messages, say the name of
the one you'd like to send. To move around the
Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the phone menu
for the names of the supported messages.
11
SMS, you can say "help with texting". list you can say "go to start", "go to end", "next
The system only sends pre-recorded
To choose a contact, say something like "select page" or "previous page". You can undo your last
"Quick messages".
line three". To move around the list say "next action and start over by saying "undo", or say
page" or "previous page". You can undo your last "cancel" to cancel the current action.
action and start over by saying "undo", or say Voice commands
"cancel" to cancel the current action. Navigation
Send SMS to John Miller, I'm just arriving
"Text message" voice Send SMS to David Miller at the office, don't Choice of a destination
commands wait for me
Help messages To a new destination
If there is no telephone connected by Intuitive method:
Bluetooth, a voice message announces: Please say "call" or "send quick message to", Press Navigation to display the main
"Please first connect a telephone", and the and then select a line from the list. To move page.
voice session is closed. around a list shown on the display, you can Press "Search…".
say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or
The "Text messages" voice commands "previous page". You can undo your last action Enter an address or the key words for the
function allows you to dictate and send and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" destination.
an SMS. to cancel the current action. Press "OK" to select the "Guidance
Dictate the text, taking care to pause briefly Voice commands criteria".
between each word. Or
When you have finished, the voice recognition Listen to most recent message* Guided method:
system will automatically generate an SMS. Help messages
In order to be able to use the navigation,
Voice commands To hear your last message, you can say "listen to you must enter the "City", the "Street"
most recent message". When you want to send (suggestions are displayed automatically
Send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late a text, there's a set of quick messages ready for when you begin typing), then enter the
Help messages you to use. Just use the quick message name "Number" using the virtual keypad, or select
and say something like "send quick message to

* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding
download has been performed.

243
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

an address from the "Contact" list or the To a recent destination To a contact

address "History".
Press Navigation to display the main Press Navigation to display the main
page. page.
If you do not confirm the number, the Press the "MENU" button to access the Press the "MENU" button to access the
navigation system will show one end of secondary page. secondary page.
the street. Select "My destinations". Select "My destinations".
Press the "MENU" button to access the
Select the "Recent” tab. Select the "Contact” tab.
secondary page.
Select the address chosen in the list to display Select a contact in the list to start guided
Select "Enter address".
the "Guidance criteria”. navigation.
Press "OK" to start guided navigation.
Then
To points of interest (POI)
Select the "Country".
Guided method:
Select "Position" to see the point of
Points of interest (POI) are listed in different
Select the keyboard “language”. arrival on the map.
categories.
Press Navigation to display the main
Change the keyboard "type" according to
the selected "language": ABCDE;
To "Home" or "My work" page.
Press Navigation to display the main Press the "MENU" button to access the
AZERTY; QWERTY or QWERTZ.
page. secondary page.
Enter the "City", the "Street" and the
Press the "MENU" button to access the Select "Points of interest".
"Number", and confirm by pressing on
the displayed suggestions. secondary page.
Select "My destinations". Select the "Travel", "leisure",
Press "OK" to select the "Guidance
"Commercial", "Public" or "Geographic”
criteria".
Select the "Preferred” tab. tab.
And/or
Select "Home". Or
Select "See on map" to choose the
Select "Search" to enter the name and
"Guidance criteria".
Or address of a POI.
Press "OK" to start guided navigation.
Select "My work". Press "OK" to calculate the route.

Zoom in/out using the touch buttons or Or Or

with two fingers on the screen. Select a preset favourite destination. Intuitive method:

244
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

You can only select this method of

using the service if a network connection
To a point on the map
Press Navigation to display the main
A marker is displayed in the middle of the
screen, with the "Latitude" and
11
is active; this may be either a "network "Longitude" coordinates.
page.
connection provided by the vehicle", if you Choose the type of coordinates:
Explore the map by sliding a finger on the
use the Peugeot Connect Packs solution, or DMS for: Degrees, Minutes, Seconds.
screen.
else a "network connection provided by the DD for: Degrees, Decimals.
Select the destination by pressing on the map.
user" via a smartphone, Press this button to start guided
Tap the screen to place a marker and
In both cases, the system is automatically navigation.
display the sub-menu.
connected to the Internet, if network coverage Or
Press this button to start guided
permits. Press this button to save the displayed
navigation.
address.
Press Navigation to display the main Or
OR
page. Press this button to save the displayed
Press this button to enter the "Latitude"
Press the "MENU" button to access the address.
value using the virtual keypad.
secondary page. A long press on a point opens a list of And
Select "Search". nearby POIs. Press this button to enter the "Longitude"
value using the virtual keypad.
Press on the mode shown in the bottom right of
the screen (On-Board or Connected) to change To GPS coordinates TMC (Traffic Message
the "Database". Press Navigation to display the main
Select the "Database" in "On-Board" page.
Channel)
mode (integrated into the map), or in Explore the map by sliding a finger on the Available in some countries.
"Connected" mode (connected to the Internet). screen. TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages
Press the back arrow to confirm. Touch the screen with a finger to go to the next are based on a European standard for traffic
image. information broadcasting via the RDS system on
Enter an address or the key words for the Press this button to display the world FM radio, sending traffic information in real time.
destination (POI). map. The TMC information is then displayed on a GPS
Press "OK" to start the search. Using the grid, select the desired country or Navigation system map and taken into account
region by zooming. straight away when routes are calculated, to
Select the "On the route", "Around the Press this button to display or enter the avoid accidents, traffic jams and closed roads.
vehicle" or "At destination" tab to refine GPS coordinates. Danger zone alerts may or may not be
your search. displayed, depending on the applicable
Select the desired address to calculate the route.

245
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

legislation and subscription to the update the smartphone operating system Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or
corresponding service. as well as the date and time on the "Stored” tab.
smartphone and system, to ensure that the Select a network.
communication process between the
Connected navigation smartphone and the system functions Using the virtual keypad, enter the "Key"
correctly. network Wi-Fi and the "Password".
Press "OK" to establish a connection
Connected navigation USB connection between the smartphone and the
connection Connect the USB cable. vehicle’s system.
The smartphone charges when
Depending on version, vehicle trim level and
connected by the USB cable. Usage restrictions:
subscription to online services and options.
Bluetooth connection With CarPlay®, connection sharing is only
Activate the Bluetooth function on the available with a Wi-Fi connection.
Network connection provided by the
telephone and ensure that it is visible to The quality of services depends on the quality
vehicle
all (see the "Connect-App" section). of the network connection.
With the Peugeot Connect Packs
Wi-Fi connection
solution, the system is automatically
connected to the Internet and connected
Select a Wi-Fi network detected by the
system and connect to it.
Authorize sending
services, and does not require the user to information
provide a connection via their smartphone. This function is only available if it has
Press Settings to display the main page.
OR been activated either via the
"Notifications" or via the "Applications" menu.
Network connection provided by the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Press "Notifications". secondary page.
user
Select "System configuration".
Select Wi-Fi to activate it.
Select the "Private mode" tab.
For the list of compatible smartphones, OR
visit the Brand's website in your country. Press Connect-App to display the main OR
page. Press "Notifications".
Activate and enter settings for sharing the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
smartphone connection. secondary page. Press "Private mode".

As processes and standards are Select "Wi-Fi network connection".

THEN
constantly changing, we recommend you

246
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Activate or deactivate: – "Give an audible warning".

– "Advise proximity of POI 1".
Press Navigation to display the main
page.
11
– "No data sharing except for company – "Advise proximity of POI 2". Press the "Declare a new danger zone"
vehicles". Press “OK” to confirm your selection. button located in the side bars or the
– "Only data sharing" upper bar of the touch screen (depending on
– "Sharing data and vehicle position" equipment).
The "Notifications", located in the upper
Select the "Type” option to select the type
Settings specific to bar, can be accessed at any time.
of "Danger area".
connected navigation Danger zone alerts may or may not be
Select the "Speed" option and enter it
using the virtual keypad.
Press Navigation to display the main displayed, depending on the applicable Press "OK" to save and send the
page. legislation and subscription to the information.
Press the "MENU" button to access the corresponding service.
secondary page.
When "TOMTOM TRAFFIC” appears, the
Displaying fuel information
Select "Settings".
services are available. Press Navigation to display the main
page.
Select the "Map” tab.
The services offered with connected Press this button to display the list of
navigation are as follows. services.
Activate or deactivate:
A Connected Services pack: Press "POI on map" to display the list
– "Allow declaration of danger zones".
– Weather, of points of interest.
– "Guidance to final destination on foot".
– Filling stations, Press one of the buttons to search for
These settings must be configured for each
– Car park, "Stations".
profile.
– Traffic, Activate/deactivate "Stations".
Press “OK” to confirm your selection.
– POI local search.
A Danger area pack (optional). Press this button to display a secondary
Select the "Alerts” tab.
page.
Activate or deactivate: Declaration: "Risk areas Select the "Settings” tab.

– "Advise of car park nearby".

alert" Select the desired fuel.
– "Filling station alert". To send information about danger zones,
Press "OK" to save.
– “Risk areas alert" then press the warning icon select the option:Allow declaration of
(triangle) to configure the alerts. danger zones

247
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Displaying charging station Press this button to display basic As principles and standards are constantly
information. changing, we recommend keeping the
details Press this button to display detailed smartphone's operating system up-to-
Press Navigation to display the main weather information. date, together with the date and time on
page. the smartphone and the system.
Press this button to display the list of The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will
services. be the maximum temperature for the day.
Press "POI on map" to display the list The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will be Connectivity
of points of interest. the minimum temperature for the night. Press Applications to display the main
Press one of the buttons to search for page.
"Stations". Press "Connectivity" to access the CarPlay® or
Activate/deactivate "Stations". Applications Android Auto functions.

Press this button to display a secondary

USB sockets CarPlay® smartphone
page. Depending on equipment, for more information
on the USB sockets compatible with CarPlay® or
connection
Select the "Settings" tab.
Android Auto applications, refer to the "Ease of Depending on country.

Select the desired connector type. use and comfort" section. On connecting the USB cable, the
For the list of compatible smartphones, CarPlay® function deactivates the
Press "OK" to save. visit the Manufacturer's website in your system's Bluetooth® mode.
country. The "CarPlay" function requires the use of
a compatible smartphone and compatible
Displaying weather applications.
Synchronising a smartphone enables
information users to display applications that support Connect the USB cable. The smartphone
Press Navigation to display the main the smartphone’s CarPlay® or Android Auto charges when connected by the USB
page. technology on the vehicle’s screen. For cable.
Press this button to display the list of CarPlay® technology, the CarPlay® function Press "Telephone" to display the
services. must first be activated on the smartphone. CarPlay® interface.
Select "View map". Unlock the smartphone for the communication Or
process between the smartphone and the Connect the USB cable. The smartphone
Select "Weather". system to work. charges when connected by the USB
cable.

248
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

From the system, press "Applications" to

display the main page.
During the procedure, several screen
pages relating to certain features are
Select the country of residence.
11
Press "Connectivity" to access the "CarPlay®” displayed. Press "OK" to save and start the browser.
function. Accept to start and complete the connection.
Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® Access to the different audio sources remains
Connection to the internet is via one of
interface. available in the margin of the Android Auto
the network connections provided by the
display, using the touch buttons located in the
When the USB cable is disconnected vehicle or the user.
upper bar.
and the ignition is switched off then back
Access to the menus for the system is possible
on, the system will not automatically switch to
Radio Media mode; the source must be
at any time using the dedicated buttons. Bluetooth connection®
changed manually. In Android Auto mode, the function that The services available depend on the
displays rolling menus by briefly pressing network, the SIM card and the
the screen with three fingers is disabled.
Android Auto smartphone compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used.
Consult the smartphone user guide and the
connection There may be a pause before service provider to check which services are
Depending on country. applications become available, available.
depending on the quality of the network.
Install the "Android Auto" application on
the smartphone via "Google Play". The Bluetooth function must be activated
The "Android Auto" function requires the use Car Apps and the smartphone configured as
of a compatible smartphone and compatible "Visible to all".
Press Applications to display the main
applications. page. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is
Press "Car Apps" to display the applications used (from the smartphone or from the system),
Connect the USB cable. The smartphone
home page. ensure that the code is the same in the system
charges when connected by the USB
cable. and in the smartphone.
From the system, press "Applications" to
Internet Browser
If the pairing procedure fails, we
display the main page. Press Applications to display the main
recommend deactivating and then
Press "Connectivity" to access the "Android page.
reactivating the Bluetooth function on the
Auto” function. Press "Connectivity" to access the "Connected
smartphone.
Press "Android Auto" to start the Apps” function.
application in the system. Press "Connected Apps" to display the browser
home page.

249
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Procedure from the smartphone the vehicle does not have "Emergency and Press Connect-App to display the main
Select the name of the system in the list assistance call" services), after first activating page.
of detected devices. smartphone connection sharing. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
In the system, accept the connection request secondary page.
Select one or more profiles. Select "Share Wi-Fi connection".
from the smartphone.

Procedure from the system Press "OK" to confirm. Select the "Activation" tab to activate or
Press Connect-App to display the main deactivate Wi-Fi connection sharing.
And/or
page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Wi-Fi connection Select the "Settings" tab to change the system’s
Network connection via the smartphone's Wi-Fi. network name and password.
secondary page.
Press Connect-App to display the main Press "OK" to confirm.
Press "Bluetooth connection".
page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Select "Search". To protect against unauthorised access
secondary page.
The list of detected smartphones is and to make all systems as secure as
Select "Wi-Fi network connection".
displayed. possible, the use of a security code or a
Select the name of the chosen complex password is recommended.
Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or
smartphone in the list.
"Stored” tab.
Depending on the type of smartphone,
you may by prompted to accept the
Select a network. Managing connections
Press Connect-App to display the main
transfer of contacts and messages. Using the virtual keypad , enter the Wi-Fi
page.
network "Key" and "Password".
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Press "OK" to establish the connection.
Connection sharing secondary page.
The system offers to connect the smartphone Select "Manage connection".
with 3 profiles: The Wi-Fi connection and Wi-Fi
– "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), connection sharing are exclusive. With this function, you can view the access to
– “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of connected services, the availability of connected
audio files on the smartphone), services and modify the connection mode.
– "Mobile internet data".
Wi-Fi connection sharing
Depending on equipment.
The "Mobile internet data" profile must Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the system.
be activated for connected navigation (if

250
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Radio This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the

context of radio wave transmission, and
Press "OK" to confirm.
11
in no way indicative of an audio system
Selecting a station malfunction.
RDS station tracking may not be
Press Radio Media to display the main available nationwide, as many radio
page. stations do not cover 100 % of the country.
Press "Frequency". Presetting a station This explains the loss of reception of the
Press one of the buttons to perform an Select a radio station or frequency. station during a journey.
automatic search for radio stations. (refer to the corresponding section)
Or Press "Presets". Displaying text information
Move the slider to manually search for Make a long press on one of the buttons
The "Radio Text" function displays information
frequencies up or down. to preset the station.
transmitted by the radio station relating to the
Or
Press Radio Media to display the main Changing the waveband station or the currently playing song.
Press Radio Media to display the main
page. Press Radio Media to display the main
page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
secondary page. To change the waveband, press "Band…",
secondary page.
Select "Radio stations" on the secondary displayed at the top right of the screen.
Select "Radio settings".
page.
Press "Frequency". Activating/Deactivating RDS Select "General".
Enter the values using the virtual keypad. RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Activate/deactivate "Display radio text".
First enter the units then click on the listening to the same station by automatic
decimals field to enter the figures after the retuning to alternative frequencies. Press "OK" to confirm.
decimal point. Press Radio Media to display the main
Press "OK" to confirm. page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Playing TA messages
Radio reception may be affected by the secondary page.
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives
use of electrical equipment not approved Select "Radio settings".
priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this
by the Brand, such as a USB charger function needs good reception of a radio station
connected to the 12 V socket. Select "General".
that carries this type of message. While traffic
The exterior environment (hills, buildings, Activate/deactivate "Station follow".
information is being broadcast, the current
tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may media is automatically interrupted so that the
block reception, including in RDS mode.

251
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

TA message can be heard. Normal play of the

previously playing media resumes at the end of
Press the "OPTIONS" button to go to the
secondary page.
Media
the message. Select "Radio settings".
Select "Announcements".
USB port
Activate/deactivate "Traffic Select "General". Insert the USB memory stick into the USB
announcement". Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up". port or connect the USB device to the
Press "OK" to confirm. USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
Activate/deactivate "Station follow". To protect the system, do not use a USB
hub.
DAB (Digital Audio Press "OK".
The system builds playlists (in temporary
Broadcasting) radio If "FM-DAB auto tracking" is activated,
memory); this operation can take from a
few seconds to several minutes at the first
there may be a time lag of a few seconds
Terrestrial Digital Radio when the system switches to "FM" analogue
connection.
Reduce the number of non-music files and the
Digital radio provides higher quality sound. radio, and in some cases a change in volume.
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a When the digital signal quality is restored, the
Playlists are updated whenever the ignition
choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical system automatically changes back to "DAB".
is switched off or a USB memory stick is
order. To minimise this time lag, storing radio
connected. The audio system memorises these
Press Radio Media to display the main stations in the "DAB" band is recommended.
lists, which will subsequently load faster if they
page.
have not been changed.
Press “Band …" at the top right of the screen to If the "DAB" station being listened to is
display the "DAB" waveband. not available on "FM" ("FM-DAB" greyed Auxiliary socket (AUX)
out), or "FM-DAB auto tracking" is not
FM-DAB tracking activated, the sound will cut out when the
Depending on equipment
Connect a portable device (MP3 player,
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the territory. digital signal becomes too weak.
etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an
When the digital radio signal is poor,
audio cable (not supplied).
“FM-DAB auto tracking" enables you to continue
This source is only available if "Auxiliary input"
listening to the same station by automatically
has been selected in the audio settings.
switching to the corresponding FM analogue
First adjust the volume on the portable device
station (if there is one).
(to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the
Press Radio Media to display the main
audio system.
page.
Controls are managed via the portable device.

252
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Selecting the source

Press Radio Media to display the main
If play does not start automatically, it may be
necessary to start the audio playback from the
Information and advice
The system supports USB mass storage
11
smartphone.
page. devices, BlackBerry® devices and Apple® players
Control is from the portable device or by using
Select "SOURCES". via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not
the system's touch buttons.
Select the source. supplied.
Once connected in streaming mode, the Devices are managed using the audio system
Watching a video smartphone is considered to be a media controls.
Depending on equipment/Depending on version/ source. Other devices, not recognised on connection,
Depending on country. must be connected to the auxiliary socket using
Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth
Connecting Apple® players streaming, if compatible.
Video control commands are accessible Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using The audio system will only play audio files with
only through the touch screen. a suitable cable (not supplied). ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file
Play starts automatically. extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and
Press Radio Media to display the main
Control is via the audio system. 320 Kbps.
page.
Select "SOURCES". It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
The classifications available are those of
Select Video to start the video. No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
the portable device connected (artists/
All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files.
albums/genres/playlists/audio books/
To remove the USB memory stick, press The supported sampling rates are 32, 44 and
podcasts).
the pause button to stop the video, then 48 KHz.
The default classification used is by artist. To
remove the memory stick. To avoid reading and display problems, we
modify the classification used, return to the
The system can play video files in the MPEG-4 recommend choosing file names less than 20
first level of the menu then select the desired
Part 2, MPEG-2, MPEG-1, H.264, H.263, VP8, characters long that do not contain any special
classification (playlists for example) and
WMV and RealVideo formats. characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù).
confirm to go down through the menu to the
Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
desired track.
Streaming Bluetooth® (File Allocation Table).
Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed The version of software in the audio system may
We recommend using the original USB
from your smartphone. not be compatible with the generation of the
cable for the portable device.
The Bluetooth profile must be activated. Apple® player.
First adjust the volume on the portable device (to
a high level).
Then adjust the volume of the audio system.

253
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Telephone Procedure from the system The ability of the system to connect just
one profile depends on the telephone.
Press Telephone to display the main
All three profiles may connect by default.
Pairing a Bluetooth® page.
Press "Bluetooth search".
telephone The profiles compatible with the system
Or are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP,
The services available depend on the
Select "Search". MAP and PAN.
network, the SIM card and the
The list of detected telephones is
compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Visit the Brand's website for more information
displayed.
Consult the telephone user guide and the (compatibility, additional help, etc.).
Select the name of the chosen telephone
service provider to check which services are
in the list.
available. Automatic reconnection
Connection sharing On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone
The Bluetooth function must be activated The system offers to connect the telephone with connected is present again, it is automatically
and the telephone configured as "Visible 3 profiles: recognised and within about 30 seconds
to all” (in the telphone settings). – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), after switching on the ignition, the pairing is
– “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of established automatically (Bluetooth activated).
To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is To modify the connection profile:
audio files on the telephone),
used (from the telephone or from the system), Press Telephone to display the main
– "Mobile internet data".
ensure that the code is the same in the system page.
and in the telephone. The "Mobile internet data" profile must Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
be activated for connected navigation, secondary page.
If the pairing procedure fails, we
after first activating smartphone connection Select "Bluetooth connection" to display
recommend deactivating and then
sharing. the list of paired devices.
reactivating the Bluetooth function on the
telephone. Press the "Details" button.
Select one or more profiles.

Select one or more profiles.

Procedure from the telephone Press "OK" to confirm.
Select the system name in the list of Press "OK" to confirm.
Depending on the type of telephone, you may by
detected devices.
prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and
In the system, accept the connection request
messages.
from the telephone.

254
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Managing paired telephones

This function lets you connect or disconnect a
Select "End call" on the touch screen. Calling a recently used
number
11
device or delete a pairing.
Press Telephone to display the main
Making a call Press Telephone to display the main
page.
page. Using the telephone is not recommended Or
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the while driving. Press and hold
secondary page. Park the vehicle.
Select "Bluetooth connection" to display Make the call using the steering mounted the steering mounted telephone button.
the list of paired devices. controls.
Press on the name of the telephone
Select "Calls".
selected in the list to disconnect it.
Press again to connect it. Calling a new number Select the desired contact from the displayed list.

Press Telephone to display the main It is always possible to make a call

Deleting a telephone page. directly from the telephone; as a safety
Select the basket at top right of the Enter the phone number using the digital measure, first park the vehicle.
screen to display a basket alongside the keypad.
telephone chosen. Press "Call" to start the call.
Press the basket alongside the telephone Managing contacts/entries
chosen to delete it. Press Telephone to display the main
Calling a contact page.
Receiving a call Press Telephone to display the main Select "Contact".
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a page. Select "Create" to add a new contact.
superimposed display in the screen. Or press and hold
Make a short press on the steering Press the "Telephone" tab to enter the
mounted telephone button to accept an the steering mounted telephone button. contact’s telephone number(s).
incoming call. Press the "Address" tab to enter the
And Select "Contact". contact’s address(es).
Make a long press Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Press the "Email" tab to enter the
Select "Call". contact’s email address(es).
on the steering mounted telephone button Press "OK" to save.
to reject the call.
Or

255
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Press this button to sort contacts by Managing quick messages Access to email messages depends on
Surname+first name or by First the compatibility between the
Press Telephone to display the main
name+surname. smartphone and the onboard system.
page.
The "Email" function allows email Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
addresses to be entered for a contact, secondary page.
but the system is not able to send emails. Select "Quick messages" to display the Settings
list of messages.
Select the "Delayed", "My arrival", "Not Audio settings
Managing messages available" or "Other" tab, enabling you to Press Settings to display the main page.
Press Telephone to display the main create new messages.
page. Press "Create" to write a new message. Select "Audio settings".
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
secondary page. Select the message chosen in one of the Then select "Ambience", "Position", "Sound",
Select "Messages" to display the list of lists. "Voice" or "Ringtone".
messages. Press "Transfer" to select one or more Press "OK" to save the settings.
Select the "All", "Incoming" or "Sent” recipients.
tab. Press "Play" to start playing the message.
Select the details of the message chosen The balance/distribution (or spatialisation
in one of the lists. with the Arkamys© system) uses audio
Press "Answer" to send a quick message Managing email processing to adjust the sound quality
stored in the system. Press Telephone to display the main according to the number of passengers in the
Press "Call" to start the call. page. vehicle.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Available only with the front and rear speaker
Press "Play" to listen to the message. secondary page. configuration.
Select "Email" to display the list of
messages. The Ambience setting (choice of 6
Access to "Messages" depends on the
Select the "Incoming", "Sent" or "Not ambiances) as well as for Bass, Medium
compatibility between the smartphone
read” tab. and Treble are different and independent for
and the onboard system.
Select the message chosen in one of the lists. each audio source.
Some smartphones retrieve messages or
Press "Play" to start playing the message. Activate or deactivate "Loudness".
email messages more slowly than others.

256
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

The "Position" settings (All passengers,

Driver and Front only) are common to all
Press "OK" again to save the settings. Move the slider to adjust the brightness of
the screen and/or the instrument panel.
11
sources. Press Settings to display the main page.
The location for the photograph is
Activate or deactivate "Touch tones",
square; the system reshapes the original
"Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
photograph if in another format.
input". secondary page.
Press this button to reset the selected Select "System settings".
Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging© profile.
optimises the sound distribution inside Select "Units" to change the units of distance,
Resetting the selected profile activates fuel consumption and temperature.
the passenger compartment.
the English language by default. Select "Factory settings" to restore the initial
settings.
Configuring profiles Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to link "Audio
settings" with it. Resetting the system to "Factory
Press Settings to display the main page.
Select "Audio settings". settings" activates English and degrees
Fahrenheit and deactivates summer time.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound",
secondary page. Select "System info" to display the versions of
"Voice" or "Ringtone".
Select "Setting of the profiles". the various modules installed in the system.
Press "OK" to save the selected profile’s
settings.
Select "Profile 1", "Profile 2", "Profile 3” or Selecting the language
"Common profile". Modifying system settings Press Settings to display the main page.
Press this button to enter a name for the
Press Settings to display the main page.
profile using the virtual keypad. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
Press "OK" to confirm. secondary page.
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
secondary page. Select "Languages" to change the
Press this button to add a photograph to language.
Select "Screen configuration".
the profile.
Insert a USB memory stick containing the
Select "Animation". Setting the date
photograph in the USB port.
Activate or deactivate:Automatic Press Settings to display the main page.
Select the photograph.
scrolling
Press "OK" to accept the transfer of the
Select "Brightness". Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
photograph.
secondary page.

257
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

Select "Setting the time-date". Press "OK" to confirm. Navigation

I cannot enter the navigation address.
Select "Date".
The system may not automatically The address is not recognised.
Press this button to set the date.
manage the change between winter and ► Use the "intuitive method" by pressing
summer time (depending on the country of the "Search…" button at the bottom of the
Press "OK" to confirm.
sale). "Navigation” page.
The route calculation is not successful.
Select the display format for the date.
The route settings may conflict with the current
Colour schemes location (for example, if toll roads are excluded
Time and date setting is only available if Depending on equipment/Depending on version. but the vehicle is on a toll road).
"GPS synchronisation" is deactivated. ► Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
As a safety measure, the procedure for
menu.
changing the colour scheme is only
I am not receiving "Danger zone" alerts.
Setting the time possible when the vehicle is stationary.
You have not subscribed to the online services
Press Settings to display the main page. Press Settings to display the main page. option.
► If you have subscribed to the option:
Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Select "Color schemes". - a few days may elapse before the service is
secondary page. activated,
Select "Setting the time-date". Select a colour scheme in the list then - services may not be selected in the system
press "OK" to confirm. menu,
Select "Time". - online services are not active ("TOMTOM
Press this button to set the time using the Whenever the colour scheme is
TRAFFIC" not shown on the map).
virtual keypad. changed, the system restarts, temporarily
The POIs do not appear.
Press "OK" to confirm. displaying a black screen.
The POIs have not been selected.
► Set the zoom level to 200 metres (656 ft), or
Press this button to set the time zone. select POIs from the POI list.
Frequently asked The "Danger zone" audible warning feature is
Select the display format for the time
(12h/24h).
questions not working.
The audible warning is not active or the volume
Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 The following information groups together the is too low.
hour). answers to the most frequently asked questions
Activate or deactivate GPS concerning the system.
synchronisation (UTC).

258
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

► Activate the audible warning in the

"Navigation" menu and check the voice volume
On starting, GPS initialisation may take up to
3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites
► Have the aerial checked by a dealer.
The surrounding area (e.g. hill, building, tunnel, 11
in the sound settings. correctly. underground car park, etc.) is blocking reception,
The system does not suggest a detour ► Wait until the system has started up including in RDS tracking mode.
around an incident on the route. completely so that there is GPS coverage by at This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is
The route settings do not take account of TMC least 4 satellites. not indicative of an audio system malfunction.
messages. Depending on the geographical environment I cannot find some radio stations in the list of
► Configure the "Traffic info" function in the (tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of stations received.
route settings list (None, Manual or Automatic). reception of the GPS signal may vary. The name of the radio station changes.
I am receiving a "Danger zone" alert which is This behaviour is normal. The system is The station is no longer received or its name has
not on my route. dependent on the GPS signal reception changed in the list.
As well as providing guided navigation, the conditions. Some radio stations send other information
system announces all "Danger areas" positioned My navigation is no longer connected. in place of their name (the title of the song for
in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may During start-up and in certain geographical example).
provide an alert for "Danger areas" located on areas, the connection may be unavailable. The system interprets these details as the station
nearby or parallel roads. ► Check that the online services are activated name.
► Zoom the map to show the exact location (settings, contract). ► Press "Update list" in the "Radio stations"
of the "Danger area". You can select "On the secondary menu.
route" to stop receiving warnings or decrease the Radio
warning duration. The reception quality of the radio station Media
Certain traffic jams along the route are not being listened to gradually deteriorates or Playback of my USB memory stick starts only
indicated in real time. the station presets are not working (e.g. no after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes).
On starting, a few minutes may elapse before sound, "87.5" MHz is displayed). Some files supplied with the memory stick may
the system begins to receive traffic information. The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s greatly slow down access to reading the memory
► Wait until traffic information is being received transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing
correctly (traffic information icons shown on the geographical area. time).
map). ► Activate the "RDS" function by means of the ► Delete the files supplied with the memory
In certain countries, only major routes short-cut menu to enable the system to check stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the
(motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic whether there is a more powerful transmitter in file structure on the memory stick.
information. the geographical area. There may be an extended pause after
This is perfectly normal. The system is The aerial is missing or damaged (e.g. when inserting a USB stick.
dependent on the traffic information available. going through a car wash or in an underground
The altitude is not displayed. car park).

259
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

The system reads a variety of data (folder, title, ► You can check the compatibility of the Some telephones offer display options.
artist, etc.). This can take from a few seconds to telephone on the Brand's website (services). Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can
a few minutes. Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. be transferred in a specific order.
This is perfectly normal. Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the ► Modify the telephone directory display
Some characters in information about the USB cables are of poor quality. settings.
currently playing media may not be displayed ► Use genuine USB cables to ensure The system is not receiving SMS text
correctly. compatibility. messages.
The audio system is unable to process certain Android Auto and/or CarPlay do not work. Bluetooth mode does not allow SMS text
types of character. Android Auto and CarPlay are not available in all messages to be sent to the system.
► Use standard characters to name tracks and countries.
folders. ► Check the list of supported countries via Settings
Playback of streaming files does not start. these websites: Google Android Auto or Apple. When the treble and bass settings are
The connected device does not automatically The volume of the telephone connected via changed, the ambience is deselected.
launch playback. Bluetooth is too low. When the ambience is changed, the treble
► Start playback from the device. The volume depends on both the system and the and bass settings are reset.
Track names and playing times are not telephone. Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and
displayed on the audio streaming screen. ► Increase the volume of the audio system, to bass settings, and vice versa.
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer maximum if required, and increase the volume of ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience
of this information. the telephone if necessary. settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.
Ambient noise affects the quality of the When the balance settings are changed, the
Telephone telephone call. distribution is deselected.
I am unable to connect my Bluetooth ► Reduce ambient noise (e.g. close the When the distribution setting is changed, the
telephone. windows, reduce ventilation, slow down). balance settings are deselected.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Some contacts are duplicated in the list. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the
switched off or the device may not be visible. The options for synchronising contacts are: balance settings, and vice versa.
► Check that the telephone has Bluetooth synchronise the contacts on the SIM card, the ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution
switched on. contacts on the telephone, or both. When both setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
► Check in the telephone settings that it is synchronisations are selected, some contacts There is a difference in sound quality
"visible to all". may be duplicated. between audio sources.
► Deactivate then reactivate the telephone’s ► Select "Display SIM card contacts" or To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound
Bluetooth function. "Display telephone contacts". settings can be tailored to different audio
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with The contacts are not listed in alphabetical sources, which can generate audible differences
the system. order. when changing source.

260
 PEUGEOT Connect Nav

► Check that the sound settings are appropriate

to the sources listened to. We recommend
11
setting the sound functions (Bass, Treble,
Balance) to the middle position, setting the
musical ambience to "None", setting loudness
correction to "Active" in USB mode and "Inactive"
in Radio mode.
► In all cases, after applying sound settings,
adjust the volume level on the portable device (to
a high level) first. Then adjust the volume level
on the audio system.
When the engine is off, the system switches
off after several minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's
operating time depends on the state of charge of
the battery.
The switch-off is normal: the system
automatically goes into energy economy mode
and switches off to maintain an adequate charge
in the battery.
► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the
charge of the battery.
The date and time cannot be set.
Date and time settings are only available if
satellite synchronisation is deactivated.
► Settings menu/Options/Date-Time Setting.
Select the "Time" tab and deactivate "GPS
synchronisation" (UTC).

261
 Vehicle data recording and privacy

Vehicle data recording – Environmental conditions (e.g. temperature,

rain sensor, distance sensor).
identification number and used if necessary.
The personnel working for the servicing network
and privacy As a general rule, this data is temporary, is (e.g. garages, manufacturers) or third parties
Electronic control units are installed in your not stored for longer than one operating cycle (e.g. roadside assistance agents) may read
vehicle. These control units process data and is only used within the vehicle itself. The the vehicle's data. This also applies to work
received from the vehicle's sensors, for example, control units often record this data (including the carried out under warranty and quality assurance
or data they generate themselves or exchange vehicle's key). This function allows either the measures.
with each other. Some of these control units are temporary or permanent storage of information This data is generally read via the OBD
required for the correct operation of your vehicle, about the state of the vehicle, stresses on (On-Board Diagnostics) port fitted by law to
some others assist you while driving (driving or components, servicing requirements, as well as the vehicle. It is used to report on the technical
manoeuvring aids), while others provide comfort events and technical errors. state of the vehicle or its components and
or infotainment functions. Depending on the vehicle's equipment level, the facilitates the diagnosis of malfunctions, in
The following contains general information about data stored is as follows: compliance with warranty obligations and for
how data is processed within the vehicle. – Operating state of system components quality improvement. This data, in particular the
You will find additional information about the (e.g. filling level, tyre pressures, battery charge information relating to stress on components,
specific data which is downloaded, stored status). technical events, operator errors and other
and transmitted to third parties and what it is – Faults and malfunctions in important system malfunctions, is sent to the Manufacturer, if
used for in your vehicle under the keyword components (e.g. lamps, brakes). necessary, along with the vehicle's identification
"Data protection". This information is directly – System reactions in specific driving situations number. The Manufacturer's liability may also be
associated with the references for the functions (e.g. deployment of an airbag, triggering of engaged. The Manufacturer may also use the
in question contained in the corresponding stability control and braking systems). operating data taken from the vehicle for product
vehicle handbook, or in the general terms and – Information about events which have recalls. This data may also be used to check the
conditions of sale. damaged the vehicle. customer's warranty and any claims made under
This information is also available online. – For electric and rechargeable hybrid vehicles, warranty.
the traction battery charge level and the Any malfunctions stored in the vehicle may be
Vehicle operating data estimated driving range. reset by an after-sales service company during
The control units process the data used for the In particular circumstances (e.g. if the vehicle servicing or repair work, or at your request.
operation of the vehicle. has detected a malfunction), it may be necessary
This data includes, for example: to record data which would otherwise simply not
– Information about the state of the vehicle be stored.
(e.g. speed, travel time, lateral acceleration, When taking your vehicle in for servicing
wheel rotation rate, fastened seat belts display). (e.g. repairs, maintenance), the stored operating
data may be read along with the vehicle's

262
 Vehicle data recording and privacy

Comfort and infotainment

functions
online services in line with the settings that you
have selected.
Online services
If your vehicle is connected to a wireless
12
network, data can be exchanged between
Comfort settings and personalised settings Smartphone integration your vehicle and other systems. Connection
may be saved in the vehicle and modified or
reinitialised at any time.
(e.g. Android Auto® or to a wireless network is made possible via a
Depending on the vehicle's equipment level, this Apple®CarPlay®) transmitter located in your vehicle or a mobile
device that you have provided (e.g. smartphone).
may include: If your vehicle is equipped accordingly, you can
The online services can be used via this wireless
– Seat and steering wheel position settings. connect your smartphone or another mobile
connection. These include online services and
– Chassis and air conditioning settings. device to the vehicle in order to operate it using
applications (apps) provided to you by the
– Personalised settings such as the interior the vehicle's integrated controls. Images and
Manufacturer or other suppliers.
lighting. sounds from the smartphone can be transmitted
You can enter your own data into the functions
of your vehicle's audio and telematic system, as
through the audio and telematics system.
Specific information is simultaneously sent
Exclusive services
part of the selected functionalities. As regards the Manufacturer's online services,
to your smartphone. Depending on the type
Depending on the vehicle's equipment level, this the corresponding functions are described by
of integration, this includes data such as location,
may include: the Manufacturer in an appropriate medium
day/night mode and other general information
– Multimedia data such as music, videos or (e.g. handbook, Manufacturer's website) and the
about the vehicle. For more information, please
photos to be read by an integrated multimedia information about data protection is provided.
refer to the user instructions for the vehicle or the
system. Personal data may be used for online services.
audio and telematics system.
– Address book data to be used with an The exchange of data for this purpose takes
Integrating a smartphone allows you to use
integrated hands-free system or with an place over a secure connection, using for
its applications, such as a navigation app or
integrated navigation system. example the Manufacturer's dedicated computer
music player. No other integration between
– Entered destinations. systems. The collection, processing and use of
the smartphone and the vehicle is possible, in
– Data regarding the use of online services. personal data for the development of services
particular active access to vehicle data. How the
This data for the comfort and infotainment are carried out solely on the basis of a legal
data is processed subsequently is determined
functions may be stored locally in the vehicle authorisation, for example in the case of a
by the supplier of the application being used.
or saved to a device that you have connected legal emergency call system or a contractual
The ability the change settings depends on the
to the vehicle (e.g. smartphone, USB memory agreement or else under a consent agreement.
application in question and on the operating
stick or MP3 player). Data that you have entered You can activate or deactivate the services and
system installed on your smartphone.
yourself may be deleted at any time. functions (some may be chargeable) and, in
This data may also be transmitted outside the some cases, the vehicle's entire connection to
vehicle at your request, particularly when using the wireless network. This does not include the

263
 Vehicle data recording and privacy

statutory functions and services such as the

emergency or assistance call system.

Third-party services
If you use online services provided by other
(third-party) suppliers, these services are subject
to the responsibility, the data protection and
the terms and conditions of use of the supplier
in question. The Manufacturer often has no
influence over the content exchanged in this
regard.
Please therefore ensure that you are aware of
the nature, extent and purpose of the collection
and use of personal data as part of the third-
party services provided by the service provider
in question.

264
 Alphabetical index

A
Air intake 58, 60 Brake lamps 207
Air vents 56 Brakes 188
ABS 87 Alarm 37–38 Braking 123
Accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) 169–170 Amplifier, audio 63 Braking assistance system 87
Accessories 84 Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 87 Braking, automatic emergency 150–152
Active Safety Brake 150–152 Antitheft / Immobiliser 27 Braking, dynamic emergency 115–117
AdBlue® 18, 189 Applications 249 Brightness 234
AdBlue® tank 190 Armrest, front 65 Bulbs (changing) 206–207
Additive, Diesel 186–187 Armrest, rear 67
Adjusting headlamps 76 Assistance call 85–86

C
Adjusting head restraints 44 Assistance, emergency braking 87, 152
Adjusting seat 43, 45, 50–52 Audio streaming (Bluetooth) 230, 253
Adjusting the air distribution 58–60 Cable, audio 252
Adjusting the air flow 58–60 Cable, Jack 252
Adjusting the date 235, 257
B
Capacity, fuel tank 165
Adjusting the headlamp beam height 76 Care of the bodywork 193
Adjusting the height and reach of Backrest, folding 44 Central locking 29–30
the steering wheel 47 Battery, 12 V 183, 187, 208–212 Changing a bulb 206–207
Adjusting the lumbar support 43, 45 Battery, ancillaries 208 Changing a fuse 208
Adjusting the seat belt height 92 Battery, charging 208–209, 212 Changing a wheel 195–197, 201–203
Adjusting the temperature 58 Battery, remote control 31 Changing a wiper blade 82–83
Adjusting the time 234, 258 Blanking screen (snow shield) 182 Changing the remote control battery 31
Advanced Grip Control 89 Blind 39–41 Changing to free-wheeling 191
Advice on care and maintenance 168, 192 Blind spot monitoring 154 Charge level indicator (Rechargeable
Advice on driving 7, 111–112 Blinds, side 68 hybrid) 20
Airbags 95, 97, 99 BlueHDi 18, 20, 187, 195 Charger, induction 64
Airbags, curtain 96–97 Bluetooth (hands-free) 232, 254 Charger, wireless 64
Airbags, front 96–97, 100 Bluetooth (telephone) 232–233, 254–255 Charging cable 171
Airbags, lateral 96–97 Bodywork 193 Charging cable (Rechargeable
Air conditioning 56, 59 Bonnet 184 hybrid) 169–170, 176
Air conditioning, automatic 60 Boot 32–33, 36, 73 Charging connector (Rechargeable
Air conditioning, dual-zone 57 Boot (fittings) 68 hybrid) 168, 175–177
Air conditioning, dual-zone automatic 57 Brake discs 188

265
 Alphabetical index

Charging flap (Rechargeable Container, AdBlue® 190 Dials and gauges 9

hybrid) 168, 175–177 Control, emergency boot release 33 Digital instrument panel 9–10
Charging the traction battery Control, emergency door 30–31 Dimensions 222
(Rechargeable hybrid) 19, 167, 175–177 Control, heated seats 46 Dipstick 17, 185
CHECK 20 Controls, steering mounted 118, 121–123 Direction indicators (turn signals) 75, 207
Checking the engine oil level 17 Control stalk, lighting 74–75 Domestic charging 171
Checking the levels 185–186 Control stalk, wipers 80–82 Domestic charging (Rechargeable
Checking tyre pressures Control unit 169–171, 176 hybrid) 176–177
(using the kit) 198, 200 Courtesy lamps 66 Door pockets 62
Checks 185–186, 187–189 Cruise control 131, 134, 137–139 Doors 32
Checks, routine 187–188 Cruise control, adaptive 139 Drive Assist Plus 139
Child lock 109 Cruise control, adaptive with Stop function 134 Driver’s attention warning 153
Children 94, 101–102, 105–106, 108 Cruise control by speed limit recognition 134 Driving 42–43, 111–112
Children (safety) 109 Cup holder 62 Driving aids camera (warnings) 130
Child seats 94, 97–101, 107, 108 Driving aids (recommendations) 130
Child seats, conventional 100–101 Driving economically 7
Child seats, i-Size 108
D
Driving modes 89–90, 125
Child seats, ISOFIX 102, 104–105 Driving positions (storing) 45–46
Cleaning (advice) 168, 192–194 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) - Dynamic stability control (DSC) 88, 90
Closing the boot 29, 33 Digital radio 229, 252
Closing the doors 29, 32 Date (setting) 235, 257
Collision Risk Alert 150–151
E
Daytime running lamps 75, 207
Configurations, seats 55 Deactivating the passenger airbag 96, 99–100
Configuration, vehicle 23–24 Deadlocking 27, 29 EBFD 87
Connected applications 249 Deferred charging 24, 176 Eco-driving (advice) 7
Connection, Android Auto 249 Deferred charging (Rechargeable ECO mode 125
Connection, Apple CarPlay 231, 248 hybrid) 23–24, 168, 175 Electric windows 38
Connection, Bluetooth 232–233, Defrosting 48, 60 Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) 87
249–250, 254–255 Defrosting, front 60 Emergency braking assistance (EBA) 87
Connection, MirrorLink 231 Defrosting, rear screen 61 Emergency call 85–86
Connection, Wi-Fi network 250 Demisting 48, 60 Emergency switching off 114
Connectivity 248 Demisting, front 60 Emergency warning lamps 84, 195
Consumptions 24 Demisting, rear 61 Emissions control system, SCR 19, 189

266
 Alphabetical index

H
Energy economy (mode) 183 Flap, ski 67
Energy economy mode 183 Flashing indicators 75
Energy flows 23 Flat bed (towing) 214 Hands-free access 34–35
Energy recovery 19, 123 Floor, boot, adjustable 72 Hands-free tailgate 34–36
Engine 189 Floor, concertina 53 Hazard warning lamps 84, 195
Engine compartment 183–185 Fluid, brake 186 Headlamps (adjustment) 76
Engine, Diesel 165, 185, 195, 220 Fluid, engine coolant 186 Headlamps, automatic dipping 77–78
Engine, petrol 126, 185, 218 Foglamps, rear 74, 207 Headlamps, automatic operation 76
Engines 217–218, 220 Folding the rear seats 49–52 Headlamps, dipped beam 207
Environment 7, 31 Four-wheel drive (4WD) 126, 182 Headlamps, halogen 76
e-Save function (energy reserve) 24 Frequency (radio) 251 Headlamps, main beam 77, 207
ESC (electronic stability control) 87 Fuel 7, 165 Head restraints, front 44–45
Expanded traffic sign recognition 135 Fuel consumption 7, 19 Head restraints, rear 48–50
Exterior lighting 77 Fuel level, low 165 Heating 56
Fuel (tank) 165–166 Heating, programmable 24, 61
Fuses 208 Hi-Fi system 63

F
High voltage 167
Hill Assist Descent Control (HADC) 90

G
Fatigue detection 153 Hill start assist 124
Filling the AdBlue® tank 187, 190 Histogramme, fuel consumption 24
Filling the fuel tank 165–166 Gauge, fuel 165 Horn 85
Filter, air 187 Gearbox, automatic 117–118, 120–124, Hybrid 221
Filter, oil 187 188, 208
Filter, particle 186–187 Gearbox, manual 117, 124, 188

I
Filter, passenger compartment 56, 187 Gear lever, manual gearbox 117
Fitting a wheel 203, 205 Gear shift indicator 126
Fitting roof bars 180–181 Glove box 62 i-Cockpit® amplify function 46
Fittings, boot 68 G.P.S. 245 Ignition 114, 255
Fittings, front 62 Grab handles 62 Ignition on 114
Fittings, interior 62 Immobiliser, electronic 112
Fittings, rear 66 Indicator, AdBlue® range 18
Flap, charging 176 Indicator, coolant temperature 18
Flap, fuel filler 165–166 Indicator, engine oil level 17, 20

267
 Alphabetical index

L
Indicators, direction 75 Locking the doors 30
Indicator, service 16, 20 Long objects, transporting 67
Inflating tyres 188, 223 Labels 6
Inflating tyres and accessories Labels, identification 223

M
(using the kit) 198, 200 Lamps, parking 75
Information, vehicle 9, 262 Lamps, rear 207
Infrared camera 79, 130 Lamps with Full LED technology 76, 78 Mains socket (domestic network) 169–170
Instrument panel 9–10, 20–22, 131 Lane assist 139, 143–145 Maintenance (advice) 168, 192
Instrument panel (Rechargeable hybrid) 9 Lane keeping assist 147 Maintenance, routine 131, 187, 189
Intelligent Traction Control 88 Leather (care) 194 Manoeuvring aids (recommendations) 130
Internet browser 246, 249 LEDs - Light-emitting diodes 75, 206–207 Map reading lamps 66
ISOFIX mountings 102 Level, AdBlue® 187 Markings, identification 223
Level, brake fluid 186 Massage function 46
Level, Diesel additive 186–187 Massage, multi-point 46

J
Level, engine coolant 18, 186 Mat 65, 131
Level, engine oil 17, 185 Memorising a speed 131
Jack 198, 201–203, 252 Levels and checks 185–187 Menu 231
Jump starting 209 Level, screenwash fluid 81, 186 Menu, main 23
Light-emitting diodes - LEDs 75, 206–207 Menus (audio) 226–227, 238–239
Lighting, boot 73 Menu, shortcuts 23

K
Lighting, cornering 78–79 Messages 256
Lighting dimmer 21 Messages, quick 256
Key 26–27, 30–31 Lighting, exterior 74, 77 Mirror, rear view 48
Key, electronic 28–29 Lighting, guide-me home 27, 77 Mirrors, door 47–48, 61, 154
Keyless Entry and Starting 26, 28–29, 113 Lighting, interior 66 Mirror, vanity 62
Key not recognised 114 Lighting, mood 21, 66 Misfuel prevention 166
Key with remote control 26, 112 Lighting, welcome 77 Mobile application 24, 61, 175–176
Kit, hands-free 232, 254 Loading 70–71, 180–181 Modularity, seats 55
Kit, puncture repair 196–197 Load reduction mode 183 Motor, electric 125–126, 167, 221
Kit, temporary puncture repair 195–200 Load space cover 69 Motorised tailgate 33–34, 36
Klaxon 85 Locating your vehicle 27 Mountings, ISOFIX 102
Locking 27, 29
Locking from the inside 30

268
 Alphabetical index

N
Parking sensors, audible and visual 155 Rear screen (demisting) 61
Parking sensors, front 156 Rechargeable hybrid engine 8, 23, 182–183,
Navigation 243–245 Parking sensors, rear 156 214, 221
Navigation, connected 246–248 Passenger compartment temperature pre- Rechargeable hybrid system 5, 8, 23, 113,
Net 69–70 conditioning (Rechargeable hybrid) 24, 61 126, 167
Net, high load retaining 70–71 Pedestrian horn (Rechargeable hybrid) 85 Recharging the battery 208–209, 212
Night vision 79 Personalisation 10 Recharging the traction battery 171
Night Vision 79 Plates, identification 223 Recharging the traction battery
Player, Apple® 230, 253 (Rechargeable hybrid) 167, 175–177
Player, USB 229, 252 Recirculation, air 58, 60

O
Port, USB 63, 67, 229, 231, 248, 252 Recorder, total distance 20
Power 19 Recorder, trip distance 21
Obstacle detection 155 Power indicator (Rechargeable hybrid) 8, 19 Reduction of electrical load (mode) 183
Oil change 185 Pressures, tyres 188, 199, 223 Regeneration of the particle filter 187
Oil consumption 185 Pre-tensioning (seat belts) 94 Regenerative braking (deceleration
Oil, engine 185 Priming the fuel system 195 by engine braking) 123
On-board tools 72, 195–198 Profiles 234, 257 Reinitialising the remote control 32
Opening the bonnet 183–184 Protecting children 96–102, 105–106, 108 Reinitialising the under-inflation detection
Opening the boot 28, 32 Puncture 198–199, 201 system 129
Opening the doors 28, 32 Reminder, lighting on 74
Remote control 26–30
Remote functions 176
R Remotely operable functions (Rechargeable
P Radar (warnings) 130 hybrid) 24, 61
Pads, brake 188 Radio 227–228, 251 Removing a wheel 203–205
Paint 193, 223 Radio, digital (Digital Audio Broadcasting - Removing the mat 65
Paint colour code 223 DAB) 229, 252 Replacing bulbs 206–207
Paint, matt 193 Range, AdBlue® 18, 187 Replacing fuses 208
Paint, textured 193 RDS 228, 251 Replacing the air filter 187
Parcel shelf, rear 67, 69 Reading lamps 66 Replacing the oil filter 187
Park Assist 161–162 READY (warning lamp) 183 Replacing the passenger compartment
Parking brake, electric 115–117, 188 Rear air blower 59 filter 187
Parking (sensors) 155 Rear bench seat 48–49 Reservoir, screenwash 186

269
 Alphabetical index

Resetting the trip 21–22 Silent vehicle warning sound (Rechargeable Storing driving positions 45–46
Resetting the trip recorder 21 hybrid) 85 Sunroof, panoramic 39–41
Rev counter 9 Smartphone 25, 64 Sunshine sensor 56
Reversing camera 130, 157–159 Snow chains 129, 181–182 Sun visor 62
Reversing lamps 207 Snow screen 182 Suspension 189
Roof bars 180–181 Socket, 12 V accessory 63, 66, 72 Synchronising the remote control 32
Running out of fuel (Diesel) 195 Socket, auxiliary 230, 252
Socket, Jack 252

T
Speakers 63

S
Speed limiter 131, 134–136
Speed limit recognition 131, 133 Table position 44
Safety, children 96–102, 105–106, 108 Speedometer 9, 131 Tables, aircraft 67
Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel) 187 Sport mode 125–126 Tables of engines 221
Screen menu map 231 Spotlamps, side 77 Tailgate 32
Screens, very cold conditions 182 Stability control (ESC) 87–88, 90 Tank, fuel 165–166
Screenwash 81 Starting a Diesel engine 165 Technical data 218, 220–221
Screenwash, front 81 Starting the engine 113 Telephone 232–233, 254–256
Screenwash, rear 81 Starting the vehicle 113, 122–123 Temperature, coolant 18
SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) 19, 189 Starting using another battery 114, 209 Ticket holder 62
Seat belts 91–92, 94, 100 State of charge, battery 23 Time (setting) 234, 258
Seat belts, rear 92–93 Station, radio 227–228, 251 TMC (Traffic info) 245
Seats, additional 53–55 Stay, engine bonnet 184 Tool box 72
Seats, electric 45–46 Steering mounted controls, audio 225, 238 Tools 195–198, 201–203
Seats, front 43, 45–46 Steering wheel (adjustment) 47 Topping-up AdBlue® 190
Seats, heated 46 Stickers, customising 193 Top Tether (fixing) 102
Seats, rear 48–55, 98 Stopping the vehicle 113, 122–123 Total distance recorder 20–21
Selector, gear 118, 121–124 Stop & Start 22, 57, 60, 127–128, Touch screen 21–24, 61
Sensors (warnings) 130 165, 183, 187, 211 Towball, quickly detachable 178–180
Serial number, vehicle 223 Storage 62, 65, 67–68 Towbar 88, 177
Servicing 16, 187, 189 Storage box 72 Towbar with quickly detachable
Settings, equipment 23–24 Storage boxes 68 towball 178–180
Settings, system 234, 257 Storage compartments 62 Towed loads 217–218, 220–221
Sidelamps 75, 207 Storage wells 72 Towing 213–216

270
 Alphabetical index

Towing another vehicle 213, 216 Video 253

Towing the vehicle 213–215 Visibility 60
Traction battery charge 171 Vision, 180° forward 159
Traction battery (Rechargeable Vision, 180° rear 159
hybrid) 20, 167–168, 175 Visiopark 1 158
Traction control (ASR) 88, 90 Visiopark 1 - Visiopark 2 157, 159
Traffic information (TMC) 245 Voice commands 240–243
Trailer 88, 177
Trailer stability assist (TSA) 88

W
Trajectory control systems 87
Triangle, warning 195
Trip computer 21–22 Wallbox (Rechargeable hybrid) 169–170, 176
Tyres 188, 223 Warning and indicator lamps 11
Tyre under-inflation detection 128, 199 Warning lamp, driver's seat belt
not fastened 94
Warning lamp, READY 183

U
Warning lamps 11, 20
Warning lamp, seat belts 94
Under-inflation (detection) 128 Warnings and indicators 11
Unlocking 26, 28 Washing 131
Unlocking from the inside 30 Washing (advice) 168, 192–193
Unlocking the boot 26, 28 Weights 217–218, 220
Unlocking the doors 30 Welcome lighting 27, 77
Unlocking the tailgate 26, 28 Wheel, spare 188, 195–198, 201–203
Updating the date 235, 257 Windscreen, heated 61–62
Updating the time 234, 258 Wiper blades (changing) 82–83
USB 229, 231, 248, 252 Wiper, rear 81
Wipers 80, 82
Wipers, automatic rain sensitive 81–82

V
Wipers, windscreen 80–81

Vehicle data recording and privacy 262

Ventilation 56

271
 Appendix

272
Appendix

273
 Appendix

274
Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, in accordance with the provisions of European legislation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End-of-Life Vehicles, that it
achieves the objectives set by this legislation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells.
Reproducing and translating this document, even partially, is strictly prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT.

Printed in the EU
05-22
 ANG. 22.P8.0040

*22.P8.0040*